Home

ClearOne Converge Pro 840T

1. 241 BAUD BaudRate mananuo 241 BFBINFO Beamforming Array Beam Information 242 BFLED Beamforming Mic LED Mode 243 BFMODE Sets Reports Beamforming Mic Mode 242 BFMUTEMACRO Define Macros When Beamforming Mic Mute Button Is Pressed 243 BFPOS Beamforming Array Position in Auto Mode 242 BFZONE Manually Disables Enables Beamforming Mic Zones 243 CALLDUR Call Duration 244 CALLERID Reports Caller ID Information 244 CALLSTATUS Report the Status of VoIP Channels 296 CGROUP Compressor Group Select 244 CHAIRO Chairman Override Mode 244 CLEAREFFECT ClearEffect Wide Band Telco Emulation 245 CLOCK Clock Set unananwan aaa LE OS 245 COMPDLY Compressor Delay 00 nanana 245 COMPDLYEN Compressor DelayEnable 245 COMPRESS Compressor Adjust
2. wao 288 XCHAIRO Chairman Override Mode 288 XCOMPRESS Compressor Adjust 289 XCOMPSEL CompressorEnable 289 XDECAY Decay AQjusSt o o o o ooooooo een eee nea 289 XDELAY Audio Delay eee ne 289 XDELAYSEL Audio Delay Enable 290 XDELAYSEL Audio Delay Enable 290 XDIAL DTMF Dialing o 290 XDTMFLVL DTMF Tone Level o 290 XDTONELVL Dial Tone Level 291 XGHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust 291 XGMODE Gating Mode 291 XGOVER Gating Override 291 XGRATIO Gate RatioAdjust 291 XGRPSEL Gating Group Select 292 XHOOKD Hook Flash Duration 292 XHOOK Hook Flash EEEa 292 XLOCALNUM Local Number 292 XOFFA Off Attenuation Mode
3. 280 SFTYMUTE Safety Mute wanasua man 280 SIGGENEN Signal Generator Enable 281 SIGGEN Signal Generator 281 SIGGENSWEEP Signal Generator Sweep 281 SIGTOUT Signal Generator Time Out 281 SLVL Speech Level Control 282 SMTPSRV SMTP Mail Server Address 282 SNMPMNGRIP SNMP Manager Host IP Address 282 SNMPMNGRPORT SNMP Manager Notification Port 282 SNMPREADCOMM SNMP Read Community String 282 SNMPWRITECOMM SNMP Write Community String 282 SPEEDDIAL SpeedDialaNumber 283 STRING String EXecutiOD o o o o oooooo aaa 283 SYSCHECKS System Checks wanauawan 283 SYSRESULT System Check Result 284 TAMODE Telco Adapt Mode 285 TELCOLVLCTRL Telco RX Level Control Enable Disable 285 TELOVER Telco Current
4. 265 MCRAMP Multi ChannelRamp uma 265 MINMAX Minimum and Maximum Gain Setting 265 MIN Minimum Gain Setting 265 MLINE Mic Line Coarse Gain Setting 266 MMAX Maximum NumberofMicrophones 266 MODEL Model Identification Label 266 MTRXCLEAR Clear Matrix 000 EEEE 267 MTRXLVL Matrix Attenuation Adjust 267 243 MTRX Matrix ROU INQD oooooococcoconoc manna 267 MTRXTYPE Select Pre AEC Gated or Non Gated Routing 268 MULTILNEN VoIP Multi Line Enable 297 MULTILNSTAT VoIP Multi Line Status 297 MUTE Mute re a a ee eee ee 268 NAME Unit Name NETBIOS Name 268 NCD Noise Cancellation Depth Adjust 268 NCSEL Noise Cancellation Select 268 NLP Non Linear Processing Adjust 269 NOM Number of Op
5. 246 COMPSEL Compression Select 246 CONFCANCEL Cancels a Conference Call Bridge 296 CONFCOMPLETE Completes a Conference Call Bridge 296 CONFSTART Initiates a 3 Way Conference Call 297 COUNTRY Country Selection 00 eens 246 CTRLMASTER Control Master Mode 246 DECAY Decay Adjust 0 00 0 eee een teen en eee nes 247 DEFAULT Default The Unit 247 241 DELAY Delay Adjust wamama mamaa manana wamama manana mama 247 DELAYSEL Delay Select 247 DEVICENAME Argument Identification Label 247 DEVICESUBTYPE Sets the Subtype of a Connected Device 248 DEVICETYPE Sets the Type of a Connected Device 248 DFLTM Default Meter o o o ooo nee een 248 DIAG Diagnostic Commands uaaa uaaa teens 248 DIAL DTMF Dialing 248 DID Device ID AAA IA 249 DTMFLVL DTMF ToneLevel 249 DTONELVL Dial Tone L
6. 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 o 1 Grounded Power Cor P N 699 150 006 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 19 Toe 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable P N 830 153 001 Converge Pro 880TA Packing Contents CONVERGE PRO 880TA QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS GREEN SCREW WASHER ACC KIT RACK DECOR 4EA BLK 673 017 212 QTY 1 680 000 001 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS BLACK 673 017 012 QTY 2 CD CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800 151 881 QTY 1 PWR CORD MOLDED 6 BLK 3 COND 699 150 006 QTY 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY RJ45 RJ45 18 830 150 004 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS ORANGE 673 017 112 QTY 2 CABLE ASSY TELEPHONE 12FT 830 000 012 QTY 1 MANUAL CONVERGE 840T CABLE ASSY USB A B TYPE 6FT 800 151 880 QTY 1 830 153 001 QTY 1 20 CONVERGE PRO 8407 1 Converge Pro 840T P N 910 151 840 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 1 Software 8 Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 Grounded Power Cor P N 699 150
7. 12345674 POOOO OOOO aaa CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS GREEN 673 017 212 QTY 1 Y CD CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800 151 881 QTY 1 PWR CORD MOLDED 6 BLK 3 COND 699 150 006 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS ORANGE 673 017 112 QTY 2 MANUAL CONVERGE 840T 800 151 880 QTY 1 26 N SELECT he cu 1234 04470 POOO R VRR RA 1212A QTY 1 SCREW WASHER ACC KIT RACK DECOR 4EA BLK 680 000 001 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS BLACK 673 017 012 QTY 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY RJ45 RJ45 18 830 150 004 QTY 1 CABLE ASSY USB A B TYPE 6FT 830 153 001 QTY 1 The Beamforming Microphone Array requires a separately ordered PoE power supply and cable kit and a ceiling mount kit as listed below 910 001 003 Beamforming Microphone Array with 4 cable retention clips 910 001 004 PoE Power Supply Cables Kit for Beamforming Microphone Array 910 001 005 12 Ceiling Mount kit with 12 inch spanner for Beamforming Microphone Array 910 001 005 24 Ceiling Mount kit with 24 inch spanner for Beamforming Microphone Array 27 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS Refer to the following diagrams and descriptions for CONVERGE Pro front panel controls and back panel connectors CONVERGE Pro Front Panels CONVERGE Pro 880 Front Panel a IE TA i CONVERGE PRO 880T CONVERGE Pro 880TA Front Panel A B C D EF
8. Accessing Execute Presets File View Add Connect Modes Services Help UU ANI EA LEE E Site Selection Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler EA i NOM Mute rrent Unit muti eo i TEE H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 3 4 yA Site View Tree View 4 _ seu Joly P T R NC if ES A 1 O Converge 880TA Mode Configuration Site Default _ Unit Data Default Ml NotConnected W M H H H H H E Last Macro 0 Last Preset 0 E N Microphone w DVD CD wit Video Codec H a VCR H 6 Sound Card bac Qe Loudspeaker A A ki From the Console main screen click on the Services menu and select Execute Preset as shown below Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log web Builder Firmware Loader Debug Console System Checks Run Macro Macro Record F The Execute Preset dialog appears as shown below Execute Preset Select Prezet Execute Cancel 236 Select the preset you want to run from the drop down list then click Execute to run the preset or Cancel to return to Console You can also use macros to execute presets or multiple presets simultaneously For more information see the Macro lab topic For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Preset Mode e Services Menu e Configuration Mode e Preset Mode Overview e Macro Tab 237 MA AAA APPENDIX A APPLIC
9. Copy Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above an Input Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel m Pre Gain Gain Post Gain o Post Process gt o Post Gate 20 20 hc 1 Input 1 ly PPR pe PA Adapt and AEC Reference Output E Ea e had Procesz A Process B This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Processing Settings and Fader Settings for more information You can change the label name of the channel in the Output entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time 136 NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Ceiling Mic changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the
10. Crown CM 30 M Enable Phantom Powe S Crown CM 31 Q Input 2 Tabletop Input 3 Push to Talk Q Input 4 EN Lectern p Line ter mda DVD CD a Input 5 m i y pe e y Video Codec N Input 6 VCR Input 7 F fs 2 2 j 8 Sound Card gt Input 8 3 au aw Amplifier 49 Telco Rx v k 4 Telco RX Output E 20 50 500 2K 5K 20 K Hz i KIG yi kb lab Course Gain Fine Gain No o Pata Telco Tx D Telco TX Processing BD Process 4 B Process B Process B Process D fb Fader H Fader 1 IL Fader 2 v iil amp a 1 E Cante EVEL Report Export Import Upload All Devices Download All Devices D n Mode Configuration Site Data Good E Unit Data Good F Connected NHBRA Site Board Room Unit Converge840T 03 Device ID 0 As shown above there are two tabs available in the center pane AV Devices and Objects A corresponding tab is displayed in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen The Database Button Bar is located at the bottom of the Center Panel These components are described in the following sections NOTE Advanced object types are not viewable in the Database Tab The Database Button Bar shown below allows you to create save delete export import upload and download AV Devices and Objects Buttons available change based on the device object selected and the status of the configuration screen displayed in the ce
11. Null to query in text GAIN Gain Adjustment This command changes or reports back the gain for a channel Command Form DEVICE GAIN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Absol Rel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 12939 7 12 16 17 29 2001 3 0 MuoP L EAS Z D U V Value signed 2 99 90 99 90 dB Float Null to query in text Absol Rel 0 A Absolute R Relative A Null Relative NOTE Values indicate valid range for entry values only Actual internal range of the gain stage is from 65 to 20 Absolute values will be limited to the internal gain range GATE Gate Status This command reports the gate status of Mics This command is read only Command Form DEVICE GATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 Bits O 7 represent gate status on Mics 1 8 Null sent in text Value returned GHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust This command selects reports the setting of hold time Command Form DEVICE GHOLD lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Float 2 0 10 8 00 S Null to query in text 266 GMODE Gating Mode This command selects reports the setting of gating mode Command Form DEVICE GMODE lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Intege
12. 21 22 Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does nat fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet The device must be connected to a earth grounded socket For Norway Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt For Sweden Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag For Finland Laite on liitettava suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury
13. 343 A AAA APPENDIX E COMPLIANCE WARNING The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network and that it complies with the country s telco requirements Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause Converge Pro devices to be non compliant FCC PART 15 ICES 003 COMPLIANCE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES 003 These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by ClearOne Communications could void the user s
14. CONVERGE CONSOLE OVERVIEW The CONVERGE Console software provides a powerful intuitive interface for configuring and controlling your CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro system While you can use LCD Programming for simple configuration tasks you must use Console to configure the advanced settings required to customize units for your application Accessing CONVERGE Console Start CONVERGE Console by double clicking the m desktop icon or by clicking the Start button in Windows and selecting All Programs gt ClearOne Communications gt Converge Console gt Converge Console from the program list After Console loads you can open an existing Site File from the File menu or create a new site file by selecting New Site When a site file is opened Console displays the Unit Tab as shown below Default User ID and Password Connecting to a site with Console requires a user name and password The default user name is clearone the default password is converge NOTE User names and passwords are not case sensitive ClearOne recommends that you record user names and passwords and store them in a secure place There is no way to retrieve passwords f you forget a password the only way to connect to the device is to Default the unit After connecting you can add modify user IDs change passwords and set access privileges using the Site Properties dialog Navigating CONVERGE Console File View Add Connect Modes Services Help y Eou Trice 2S MDBRa
15. Group 3 23 29 Group 5 O None 1 All Pass 2 Low Pass 3 High Pass 4 Low Shelving 5 High Shelving 1 4 1 15 6 Parametric Equalizer 7 CD Horn 8 Bessel Crossover 9 Butterworth Crossover 10 Linkwitz Riley Crossover 11 Notch Null to query in text Type O Type 1 6 8 11 Type 7 Type 0 3 7 11 Type 4 6 Type 8 9 Type 10 Type 0 5 7 Type 6 11 Type 8 10 Values O Null in text 20 00 20000 00 500 00 5000 00 O Null in text 15 00 15 00 12 18 24 12 24 O Null in text 0 05 5 00 2 Low Pass 3 High Pass See Groups and Channels 3 5 23 29 M PJ V Group 3 23 29 Group 5 O Off 1 0mn 2 Toggle 1 4 OxFF for all text 1 15 OxFF for all text Null to query in text Units HZ dB dB per Octave Octaves Type Units FLOW Flow Control This command selects reports the flow control of the serial port on the unit Hardware flow control is implemented using DTR and DSR Command Form DEVICE FLOW Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 O Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text FMP First Mic Priority Mode This command selects reports first Mic priority mode Command Form DEVICE FMP lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 G Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle
16. PA Adapt Acoustic Echo Cancellation Reference Buses These buses allow an input from a CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro device to reference an output on another linked device for AEC and PA Adaption See AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference and AEC for more information Global Gating Groups A F These buses are microphone gating groups that support first mic priority maximum number of mics etc and work across all linked CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices Unlike the audio buses they contain only mic status and gate parameters See the Gating and Gating Group topics for more information Control Bus The control bus is an independent channel from the E bus s audio channel This allows control information to pass even if the units are not using the audio link All models support the use of the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro serial command set through the control bus 36 DEVICE IDS Device IDs provide unique identifiers for all units that are linked together using the E bus After making Expansion Bus connections you must set a unique Device ID number for all units of the same Device Type on the E bus Device Types and IDs Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 F VH20 E 0 F 840T 5 0 B 8i A 0 B 880T D 0 B 880 TA H 0 B SR 1212 G 0 B SR1212A 0 B Beamtorming N 0 F Microphone Array NOTE All models ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Assigning Device IDs Use the follow
17. The LCD Settings Menu allows you to configure serial port settings and Device IDs view network IP settings change the LCD contrast level and restore factory default settings for a unit Accessing the Settings Menu To access the Settings menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Settings and press the Select button The Settings menu appears as shown below 43 Settings menu options include e RS 232 e Network e DID e Default e Contrast e Version e SIP VH20 Only These options are described in the following sections RS 232 There are two parameters in the RS 232 menu Baud Rate and Flow Control To change these settings use the following procedure Use the Menu Dial to highlight Baud Rate or Flow Control Press the Select button Select the desired value using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to set the selected value Press the Esc button to return to the Settings menu MANS You can also use the Comm tab of the Unit Properties screen to change these settings Baud Rate This parameter allows you to set the baud rate to 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps or 115 2kbps The default is 57 6 kbps Select the baud rate you want to use then press the Select button A message appears on the LCD display indicating the change is in progress and another indicating the change is complete When finished the display returns to the RS 232 sub menu Flow Control Hardware A
18. 1 Telephone Cable 12 P N 830 000 012 1 Installation amp Operation Manual 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 800 151 880 P N 830 153 001 23 CONVERGE PRO TH20 1 Converge Pro VH20 P N 910 151 825 1 Software amp Documentation CD 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 800 151 881 P N 680 000 001 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Black P N 673 017 006 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Green P N 673 017 016 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Cable Assembly 7 P N 830 000 023L 24 CONVERGE PRO SR1212 Sz E TELCO 4 DOCS 1 Converge Pro SR1212 P N 910 151 900 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 25 METER 30 10 4 0 4 8412 fe 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 Converge SR 1212A Packing Contents
19. A cne es can EE TO Output Inputi a 1 H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 siis DVD CD Site View Tree View wit Video Codec VCR as H E Sound Card MILO I PIT IR OutputS _ __ _ i Amplifier Line Pres Gain NOM FE Comp Mute _ Gain _ Pres cdas Loudspeaker W PowerAmp 1 a W PowerAmp 2 3 04 9 9 9 WE PowerAmp 3 4 93 9000 E PowerAmp 4 NOM Mute Gain___ Pres T Telco TX 1 _ _ _Jooe uu Telco TX o gt O AV Devices Objects EN Microphone mm Pres Gain NC Wos 9 91 Audio RX Dp F o Exp Q D D an ZZ C A ONXZ lt LCHAVDOTVO o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Converge 880TA IOTMONOWP ZERACN lt XS lt CANDOVO Mode Configuration Site Data Default Default Mi Not Connected ELLE EE Last Macro 0 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic _ Configuring User Console The User Console tab allows you to configure the web version of Dialer a software interface that emulates the functionality of ClearOne s Tabletop Controller User Console provides six user programmable keys as described in the following sections 221 E WebBuilder Command Associated with Funcion Telco Line 1 Type a i Command Press 3 Converge 8407 o tone Select the key you want to program from the drop down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen Programmable keys include e Line 1 e Line 2 e User e Volume Down e Volume Up
20. CO RS BA gt BEN N ES Rem MN BOM O DY DN Be Bes BN Beas MN oe O Aa WH NMN O O WON OO MH BW PO O Z WE Zz EA z Ya z ei ml ml KA lt WA lt RI Aa eee lt Z gt 323 Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output NA Mute All Mics Toggle Status of Mute All Mics Mute Output 9 Toggle Status of Mute Output 9 Mute Output 10 Toggle Status of Mute Output 10 Mute Output 11 Toggle Status of Mute Output 11 Mute Output 12 Toggle Status of Mute Output 12 Volume Up Output 1 1 dB Volume Down Output 1 1 dB Microphone 1 Gate Status Microphone 2 Gate Status Microphone 3 Gate Status Microphone 4 Gate Status Microphone 5 Gate Status Microphone 6 Gate Status Microphone 7 Gate Status Microphone 8 Gate Status Ground User Definable Control Status Ohman O BA gt BEN N ES Rem MN BOM O DY DN Be Bes BN Beas MN oe O Aa WH NMN O O WON OO MH BW PO O lt ES Zz EA ku 2 Bee 72 MA 7 MA 7 Bee 7 MA 2 MA 7 MP 2 ee A Z ES gt gt gt Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status
21. Evert Scheader Database Gating Contromers HO Convenyet 0TADO sa Ae ce OEE Ste View Tree view TR PEPE ONENEAN ro Tres aan kwaa voz M ro ETE PEE NO Cr ROA AO aaa aa ECG Cr Pr Fer pg BB wat BB roo ree tees NA NA OA VIUN UR T UE TE VES PEO p ENET he he la P Lest Me Moda fon or fode Configuration SteDato Defeuk MM UrtDete Deflak MM NotConnected SURUA ste una ce Gating configurations are shown in the Center Pane The following sections describe how to configure gating groups 169 Gating Controllers ating Controders indeed Ghia Ka None 123 4 ABC OE F Brows i i reer ETa r l ETE Contar T fof a E A M seus Contra Fm A aa E ros Saa T Peepy ne a M vos Consiga M SFTrT rreore Use the Gating Controllers section of the screen to assign Mic Inputs to a gating group Use Internal gating groups radio buttons 1 4 to control mic inputs connected to the unit currently selected in the Site Pane Use Global gating groups radio buttons A F to control mic inputs connected to the current unit as well as all units connected to the E Bus Press the Configure button to display and modify individual channel Gating configurations using the Channel Properties Configuration screen Internal Gating Groups internal Gating Groups Group Name Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 First Mic Priority F J iw z Wax E kics Ja Ja la la Last Mic Mode Jodi o
22. Expardion Audio RA From E gt BEBE EJI 5 7 R ok Mi mi a 4 rl 1 4 1 e il ey al a la 0 10 u EE laa Me A From Exp T A dialog prompts you for the distance of the microphone to the talker Select a value and press OK to apply the object to the channel Microphone Distance Talker to Microphone Distance Distance Feet o o A microphone icon appears next to the channel indicating that the channel is using an AV device object configuration ERR E 3 AW Devices Objects A Microphone 5 Tabletop de Asco T ATA TA h Acho T ATHA Tals RX Expandion Audio RX F Click on the microphone icon to view object properties and enter a serial number in the AV Devices Properties dialog 189 AY Device Properties To view detailed information about an AV device s configuration settings or to create a custom AV device use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab In addition to using AV devices you can drag and drop Channel Objects in the Unit Tab and the Channel Tab to instantly apply a saved configuration to a channel You can save channel objects for all CONVERGE channel types including Mic Input Line Input Telco VolP Rx Telco VolP Tx Output Processing and Fader channels For example you can configure NOM mute and gain settings for Output 1 on the Channel tab as shown below ee ee e a a LEG ran Two A co FG Mcnsspore BEREZE R
23. Inputs L Line Inputs M Telco Rx or Telco Tx Microphone Inputs O Outputs P Processing R Telco Rx T Telco Tx Mute mode O Off 1 On 2 Toggle Type DID Command Channel Group Mode la y o mute vi vi y o v Export Object Export PIO as Mute Pin 1 Port 4 Export Cancel The control object now appears in the objects pane as shown below The object is now available for drag and drop configuration 188 AV Devices ClearOne provides numerous pre configured AV devices with settings that optimize the performance of the device for a typical baseline room These devices are available in the AV Devices tab of the Objects Pane as shown below Click a device type in the AV Device Tree to show the available devices of that type S Audio T ATBATR A Audio TATESIA 5 Audio TEPSE1P S Audio TESS A BeyerD MPC22 A BeyerD MPCBSY E A BeyerD MPCBEV E 5 ClearOne Mes 5 Clock Audio CSi A Clock Audio C52 A Clock Audio C53 To apply an AV device to a channel drag the object onto the channel in the Unit or Channel tabs For example to apply a Crown PCC130 tabletop microphone to Mic Line Input 1 select the object from the AV Devices tree and drag it onto the channel i MIC Line utput AV Devices Objects A Microphone S Tabletop A fucks T ATOATA gt Mucho T ATSA Oukpui 8 Speaker 5 D MPORSY Pres Taleo TX A i Expansi n Adie TX A ClearOne Mic
24. NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring a fader channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a fader channel configuration right click in the fader section of the screen surrounded by an orange rectangle From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes 155 Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Fader 1 as Fader Channel Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as
25. Site Sitel Unit CONVERGEBSOTA 0 Devic Converge BBOTA Unit Properties Device ID 0 Meter Typ Channel O Output Post Gain le Front Panel Mode Froni Panel Pin To add a unit to a Site right click in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site View pane or select the unit type you want to add from the Add menu on the Menu Bar as shown below KA Connect Modes Services Hi Beamforming Microphone Array CONNECT AYB CONNECT CobraNet Converge 840T Converge 880 Converge 880T Converge 880TA Converge 8i Converge SR1212 Converge SR1212A Converge TH20 Converge YH20 The Unit Properties window appears Unit Properties settings are described in the following sections The Unit ID and MAC Address for the selected unit are automatically displayed at the top of the Info section of the tab When connected the firmware version dictionary version and DSP date versions are displayed in the Versions section at the bottom of the tab when connected These settings cannot be modified 65 Device Name Enter a descriptive name in the Device Name field Device names are used as network identifier on NetBIOS networks They must start with a letter and can contain both letters and numbers with a maximum length of 15 cd 3 characters No special characters are allowed except for Device ID Select a Device ID from the Device ID drop down list Device IDs ensure that Console synchronizes
26. Virtual Ref 4 Mone AEC requires a physical output reference to track output gain changes Therefore when using virtual AEC PA Adapt references you must use output gain tracking to provide level information to the AEC process Use the Output Gain Tracking section of the screen shown above to specify the level source for each virtual reference that you define Virtual AEC PA Adapt reference sources are defined in a special section of the Matrix shown below highlighted in white PA ri Per d PA Viri Pat 2 u PAYA Ret 3 E La 163 Use the white cross point area to select the outputs for each virtual reference source you want to define In the example above Output 7 is connected to the room amplifier This audio includes microphones that cannot be included in the AEC reference so Output 7 should not be used directly as the AEC reference source Instead use a Virtual Reference and route any inputs that you want cancelled to that reference This typically would include Telco VoIP Rx audio and audio from a video codec Input 5 above which in this example are combined to create Virtual Reference 1 NOTE If the channels selected for a virtual reference use Processing or Faders you should select the processing or fader channel as the virtual reference source This provides the AEC process with the most accurate reference for the signal thereby providing faster convergence and more accurate AEC performance Expansion Bu
27. Warning Uploading the firmware will cause all of the units to be upgraded and then rebooted Do you want to continue The upload begins and the Firmware Loader displays progress in the Upload column of the firmware file table and in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window as shown below 226 Select Firmware File WARNING Uploading firmware may cause units to default Firmware File C Program Files 86 ClearOne Converge 4 Firmware Converge mdo ne Firmware File Version 4 0 0 24 Date 03 06 2013 Upload Firmware Cancel CONVERGES80TAB6 Upload 30 In addition the LED indicators on the status bar in Console turn purple to indicate the firmware load is in progress as shown below sou 770027 POPS0mS sr Ome i Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String H0 CONVERGE880TAB6 EN Microphone Eala DVD CD Hst Video Codec H a VCR H E Sound Card Site View Tree View wami fof er II on Loudspeaker Pres Gain NC alos 1 RX Converge 880TA Mode Configuration Site Data Error BN Unit Data Error BN Connected UU LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES8OTAB6 Devic When the firmware load is complete the unit reboots The unit now has the selected firmware file loaded If you experience problems with firmware loads please contact ClearOne Technical Support 227 The 4 X versions of CONVERGE Console offer significa
28. disable lt vad_thresh gt vad threshold 20 to 10 lt vad_noise_match gt vad noise matching 0 none 1 level lt g72264 priority gt g 722 64kbps codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g72256 priority gt g 722 56kbps codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g72248 priority gt g 722 48kbps codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g711ulaw_priority gt g 711ulaw codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g711alaw_priority gt g 711Alaw codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g729ab_priority gt g 729A B codec priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g7231_63_priority gt g 723 1 high rate priority 1 lowest to 255 highest lt g7231_53_priority gt g 723 1 low rate priority 1 lowest to 255 highest 353 lt vlan enable gt 1 to 4096 enable with this VLANID O disable VLAN lt vlan_priority gt priority of vlan packets range 0 7 lt qos_precedence gt set quality of service precedence range 0 8 O 0x0 1 0x8 2 0x10 3 Ox18 4 0x20 5 0x28 6 0x30 7 0X38 8 allows a custom value to be specified by qos custom dscp See qos custom dscp below lt qos_custom_dscp gt A custom value of QOS precedence range 0 0x39 See qos precedence above lt auto_answer gt 1 enable 0 disable lt rtp_base_port gt range 1024 to 65535 lt user_domain index n gt default to use the current domain name proxy to use the proxy address Fully qualified domain name
29. the ratio of the two levels Expansion Bus Consists of two RJ 45 connectors the Link In and Link Out ports on the rear panel of all Converge Pro models The Expansion Bus allows multiple Converge Pro devices to be linked together using CAT 5 twisted pair cable Expansion Bus Reference The Expansion Bus Reference allows you to reference an output on another Converge Pro device in a site for Echo Cancellation and PA Adaption Filter A device that passes and blocks audio signals based on user definable requirements of the system All Pass A filter that provides only phase shift or phase delay without appreciably changing the magnitude characteristic The filter produces a flat amplitude response It is useful for matching the delay of two processing channels with different delays High Pass A filter that passes high signal frequencies while attenuating low frequencies High Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies above a designated frequency The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB octave rate The gain or loss above the corner frequency is adjustable to 15dB Low Pass A filter that passes low frequencies while attenuating high frequencies Low Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies below a designated frequency The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB octave rate The gain or loss below the c
30. 1 105 Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel When you add afilter it appears in the Active Filter drop down list and on the active filter graph You can configure up to four active filters per input channel The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filters Remaining Press the Remove Filter button to remove the filter currently selected in the Active Filter drop down list Removing a filter increments the Filters Remaining by one Press the Table View button to toggle the display between graph view and table view Table view displays filter settings in table format for all filters configured for the input channel Clicking on a row in table view selects the filter displays the current settings tor that filter and allows you to edit the values in the setting fields Changes made in the setting fields are immediately reflected in the table Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Filter AGCIALC Gating Active Filter Type Frequency Gain Bandwidth Q 3 PEQ y reo y 3997 85 2 43 2085 mi 0 05 a Bypass 199 08 2 29 18 03 0 08 962 35 2 99 8 010 168 3997 85 2 43 28 85 0 05 i Remaining Table View Bypass All Remove Filter 1 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview e AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise
31. Command Form Details DEVICE CONFCANCEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 s CONFCOMPLETE Completes a Conference Call Bridge This command bridges two calls into a 3 way call There is no query for this command Command Form Details DEVICE CONFCOMPLETE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 306 CONFSTART Initiates a 3 Way Conference Call This command dials a 3 party to initiate a bridged conferenced call Command Form Details DEVICE CONFSTART lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 Value String 45 1 44 Characters of 0 9 and plus NULL Null to query in text HOLD Places a Call on Hold This command places the current call on hold State tracking is provided by the CALLSTATUS command Command Form Details DEVICE HOLD lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z MULTILNEN VoIP Multi Line Enable This command sets reports an environmental variable which selects if the VoIP operates in single line mode or multi line mode This comm
32. Defaut W Unit Data Defaut BN NotConnected MEME atao Last Preset 0 Ste Stew Unt CONVERGESEOTA O Devia ID A The Center Pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls for selected line input channel as shown above Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path The meters and configuration controls for line inputs are explained in the following sections Line 5 Input 5 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced 119 36 dBu The Pre Gain Meter shows the line input level before gain adjustments NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters The Gain Slider adjusts the line input volume level The MIN MAX fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings and to report min max gain settings via serial commands You can also set the gain in 5dB increments using the Up Down buttons or enter a value directly in the field The Post Gain Meter shows the input level after gain adjustments hite Ss Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off AGC A Clicking the AGC Automatic Gain Control button displays the Channel Property Configuration dialog for the selected input channel as shown below 120 Channel Property Configuration Input 5 AGC Enable
33. Gain Adjustment 256 GATE Gate Status 256 242 GHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust wamama nn 256 GMODE Gating MOde manaa sun 257 GPIOSTATUS General Purpose Status 257 GRATIO Gate Ratio Adjust 257 GREPORT GateRepolt waaaaaa nee eens 257 GRPSEL Gating Group Select 258 HDAEC Enables Disables HD AEC mode 258 HDAECMODE Set Report HD AEC mode 258 HDDREFSEL1 Reference Select for Mono Channel Acoustic Echo Cancellation Block 258 HDDREFSEL2 Reference Select for Stereo Channel Acoustic Echo Cancellation Block 258 HDNLP Non Linear Processing AdjUSt 259 HOLD gt PlacesaCallonHoOld 297 HOOKD Hook Flash Duration 259 HOOK Hook Flash 0 0 nee en eens 259 LABEL wae IA eens IIIA 259 LCDCONTRAST LCD Contrast 259 LMO Last Mic On Mode aoaaa 260 LOCALNUM gt LocalNumber 260 LOCBLD
34. Have your Network Administrator modify these settings e Provisioning Provides the VH20 with access to data and network resources by receiving authorization and privileges via resource management e Use local settings The unit uses local settings provided by the server e Use DHCP TFTP User provides settings for the VH20 to gain access to the network e TFTP from DHCP TFTP settings are received from the server 71 e TFTP Server User manually enters the IP address of the TFTP Server e VLAN Virtual LAN A LAN configured through software rather than hardware Toggling this setting activates the flexibility a VLAN can provide SIP configurations e VLAN Priority Establishes the priority of the ID data coming from this specific unit e VLAN ID Provides the ID number to the specific unit Audio Stream The Audio Stream tab contains user configurable settings for the audio stream encryption QOS and Codec details Do not change these settings unless you have detailed knowledge of their purpose they could dramatically effect call quality and performance Converge VH20 Unit Properties lt New Unit gt General Comm SIP Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dia Plan gt RTPARTCP RTP Base Port s0000 B Y RTCP Enable QoS Description Precedence Express Forwarding Custom Current DSCP Yalue 028 E 0x0 Ox3F J SRTP Cipher aes CTR w MAC Hmac SHA180 v KDR Offer 24 D 0 24 SR
35. Ln zio e g dino e t pda Ganda o g pdng a i papo g pipio duanag Z dwann r g due pao t duanag lego xo a e ogo o e dol poto e y 301 gt e oL e 101 A poe oL que 01 x 1301 loteo a y 5593019 nto lt no mote ol S wigo wao zwo D m a Output Level 20 m D ch 30 This display is identical to that shown on the Channel Tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrik apply globally to the channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Beamforming Configuration is used to define the mode and pickup zones of the selected Beamforming Microphone Array Click on the Beam Forming Configure button on the Channel control of a selected Beamforming Microphone Array Unit Channel Matrix AEG Reference Wace Pre Gain Beam Former 1 BF hic 1 Beam Pornindg Configure 2 20 dBu BF tific 1 0 EF a lu Beamforming Microphone Orientation Shown below is a configuration with Ceiling Mount as the selected mode It displays the zones where the microphones in the array pick up audio when the microphone array is mounted fr
36. No to exit Console without saving changes or Cancel to abort the exit and return to Console For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Site File Overview e Print Reports e Create a New Site e Connect To A Site e Unit Properties 201 PRINT REPORTS The Print Reports option on the File menu allows you to print a configuration properties report for a Site or Unit To print a site or unit report click on the File menu select Print then select Print Site Report or Print Unit Report as shown below File view Add Connec New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save s Site Properties a Print Site Report 1 Board Room cwg gt 2 Sitel cvg 3 Sitel cvg Exit The Report window appears as shown below Unit Report z o a _ Save as PDF Page 10f2 Page Width Full Page 100 Print First Next Last Converge Unit Report Unit Properties 30 Converge840T 03 Slave 10 101 24 111 a us 57600 Hardware Microphone Channels AEC Settings Noise Automatic Gain Gating 2 Cancelation Adapt Coarse Fine 5 Max Response Thres Hold Off Decay Chair Ambient Adapt O Channel Name Gain Gain uwi NLP Reference NC Depth Type Gain Target Time hold Type Ratio Time Attn Rate Man Mode Level 30 1 Input 56 0 0 Soft Outputs DO 648 of Auto 15 0 30 12 Medium O Adaptive 2 Input2 56 0 0 Bsoft Outputs O 648 off Auto 15 0 30 12 Medium
37. Noise Cancellation Filter AGC Automatic Gain Control ALC Automatic Level Control shown above bring up the Channel Property Configuration screen shown below Channel Property Configuration Input 1 fe Enable Acoustic Echo Canceller AEC Enable Push to Tak Mode Hon lnesr Processing NLF Pre an PTT Threshold l Aggressive PA Adept and AEC Reference Ax Ebus Ref 1 F Son Off Echo Return Loss Enhancemerd ERLE LI The Channel Property Configuration screen is used to configure Mic Input Line Input and Processing channels The tabs available in this screen change depending on the type of channel selected in the Tree View pane of Console B6 aibu In addition to the configuration controls available in the Channel pane there are meters showing signal levels in real time at each stage of signal processing The meters shown change with the type of channel selected For example the meters for Mic Input channels are shown below Pre Gain Gain m Post Gain Post Process Post Gate E Coarse EELEE aL non NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters The channel routing matrix of the Channel pane shows the associated Matrix row and routing configuration for the channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane The channel routing matrix
38. Null to query in text 304 KTE Telco Enable This command selects reports the hook status This command can be used to replace the TE command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XTE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text 305 CALL CONTROL SERIAL COMMANDS CALLSTATUS Report the Status of VoIP Channels This command gives the status of the VolP channels This status can be queried and will be sent asynchronously This command status may NOT be set Command Form Details DEVICE CALLSTATUS lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Line gt Status Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Line Unsigned Short 2 VolP Line Number f Number Status Unsigned Short 4 Status for Channel Status Definition 0x0001 IDLE 0x0002 DIAL TONE 0x0004 RING_BUSY 0x0008 CONNECTED 0x0010 LOCAL HOLD LHOLD 0x0020 REMOTE HOLD RHOLD R 0x0040 LOCAL REMOTE HOLD LRHOLD 0x0080 CONFERENCED 0x0100 CONFERENCED LHOLD 0x0200 CONFERENCED RHOLD 0x0400 CONFERENCED LRHOLD 0x0800 INCOMING_CALL 0x0000 NO CALL STATUS CONFCANCEL Cancels a Conference Call Bridge This command cancels the 3 Way conference initialization and terminates the call with the 3rd party There is no query for this command
39. Output Output 1 ca Output 2 Output 1 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker TH ip Telco Tx ip Telco TX Processing Q Process A Q Process B B Process C Q Process D MH Fader H Fader 1 ML Fader 2 Mi i gt bapej zaapeg E dapey fo g ssaadd 9 ssasuud o q said o Output Level gt 20 gt a a yeni gt gt a la Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default Wi NotConnected MM MMMM site Board Room Unit ConvergeS40T 03 Device ID 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AGC ALC tab selected as shown below Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Fiter AGC ALC Gating A 18 Ta Response Time 100 2080 4060 6040 8020 10000 o no a cae all 2000 ms Bi Threshold RMS 107 Use the AGC ALC radio buttons to select Off ALC or AGC The default is Off ALC is performed automatically there are no user configurable settings for ALC NOTE AGC occurs after gain and filter settings in the audio signal path The configuration controls for AGC are described in the following sections Maximum Gain Slider Set the Target Level first then set the Maximum Gain that you want the AGC to apply to the signal Maximum Gain is set using an RMS Root Mean Square level which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time Maximum Gain range is O to
40. PA Noise Gate Threshold This command sets the Noise Gate Threshold that will be used when in the manual mode This represents the level at which the noise gate will activate Command Form DEVICE PANGT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 100 00 to 0 00 Null to query in text dB PAPOL Polarity Switch This command changes audio signal polarity on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PAPOL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 O Normal 1 Reverse ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text PARST PA Reset This command resets the power supplies on an individual power amplifier circuits There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE PARST lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Zero PASME PA Sound Mask Enable This command enables the sound mask signal on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PASME lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 231J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Voice Mode 1 Wideband Mode Null to query in text 283
41. PASML PA Sound Mask Level This command selects reports the sound mask level on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASML lt Channel gt lt Group gt Amplitude Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Amplitude Signed Short 2 60 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text PASMM PA Sound Mask Mode This command selects reports the sound mask mode on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASMM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Voice Mode 1 Wideband Mode Null to query in text PASMT PA Sound Mask Timer This command selects reports the timer on sound mask signal on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASMT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J 5 Value Unsigned Short 2 O 1440 24 hours Mi Inutes Null to query in text PATO PA Thermal Overload This indicates if a thermal overload condition is occurring on one of the power amplifier channels This is Read Only and is automatically generated if a overload occurs Command Form DEVICE PATO Bitmap Argument Type Size Values Units Bitmap Hexa 4 Of OF 06 Of 04 03 OF 01 oo lla pE Fan IC Temp Overload nteger Intake Temp Overload Outlet Temp rerload Bits 03 31 unus
42. Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress There are 32 presets available on every Converge Pro device Preset Mask Defines whether a Preset executes on a low or high contact closure signal on the rear panel of the unit Preset Mode Preset mode is used to create presets and is accessed from the Console toolbar Processing Blocks Processing blocks enable you to configure filters delay compression and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue A single input or group of inputs can be routed through a processing block and then routed to an output or multiple outputs There are four processing blocks available for the 840T and eight for the 880 and 81 A D for 840T A H for 880 and 81 See also Filters Delay Compression and Matrix Q Quality Factor lt is the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth Q reflects an inverse relationship to the bandwidth and is adjustable from 02 1 to 40 1 360 Ratio The amount of compression applied to the output signal compared with the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level See also Compressor Compression and Threshold Release Time Release is a parameter which determines how quickly compression is released after the input signal drops below the specified threshold See also Compressor Compression and Ratio Reverberation A diffused acoustic energy field fed and mainta
43. Processing A ee 30 ABI Process A au li in iin This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane You can change the label name of the channel in the label entry box You can also change channel configuration settings For example for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Podium Mic changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console 150 One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring a processing channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a processing channel configuration right click in the processing section of the screen surrounded by an orange rectangle From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below 33 Export as object Apply Eo all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel
44. Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min max levels The Post Gain level meter displays the post gain signal level in dB Limiter The Limiter limits the output level to the Telco side to comply with Telco system requirements Note that the meter is only a graphic it does not show limiter activity Not used in VoIP settings Output Level Meter Output Level Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present 140 All inputs from Exp O and from Exp S are selected as cross points and the first four inputs are gated by default Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Faste Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE
45. When initialization is complete ClearOne CONVERGE Model Number appears on the LCD panel along with the device type device ID device name IP address and firmware revision level as shown below Model DeviceType ID Name IP Address Firmware Level To access the LCD menu press the Select button The CONVERGE Menu appears as shown below Front Panel Lock Using Console you can create a PIN code and lock the front panel to prevent unauthorized access to LCD menu functions When the lock feature is enabled and the front panel is unlocked it will automatically re lock after 3 minutes of inactivity See the Unit Properties topic for instructions on how to enable the lock feature For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics Macros Presets Controls and Connections Console Configuration Mode Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Processing Settings Output Settings LCD Channels Menu LCD Settings Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Device IDs Unit Properties 41 LCD CHANNELS MENU The LCD Channels Menu allows you to adjust the gain level and turn mute on or off for all channels Accessing the Channels Menu To access the Channels menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Channels and press the Select button The Channels menu appears as shown below Channels menu options i e channel
46. When initially configuring output channels ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Mic Gating Gating Tab Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Optimizing Gain Structure 144 PROCESSING SETTINGS Processing Settings enable you to configure filters delay compression and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue There are four processing blocks available for the 840T A D and eight for the 880 8801 880TA 8i SR 1212 A H and SR 1212A A H With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired processing block on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane _ Converge Console BBO1tal cvp Fle View Add Connect Modes Services Help Saa TREE C O on INJ Ge Convergets0TA00 Process H Mode Configuration Ske Data Default B Unk Data Defaur ME Not Connected MMM MM Ste Urt ComergessOTADO Device ID 0 The center pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls for selected processing block as shown above The meters and configuration controls for processing blocks are explained in the following sections Processing A Process A i Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are g
47. ambient level reference automatically This means that the gate threshold level automatically increases or decreases based on background noise The default is On Manual When Adaptive Ambient is set to Manual the input will use the fixed ambient level you specify in the Ambient Level field as its gating reference Auto Gating Processing Functions Chairman Override Provides gating priority for this mic input over any other mic input within the same gating control mixer group When a mic with Chairman Override enabled gates on all mics which do not have Chairman Override enabled will gate off The default is Off PA Adaptive Mode Uses the audio level on a specified output as the new ambient level when audio is present at the power amplifier This prevents loudspeaker audio from gating on the mic while still allowing people in the room to gate on microphones when they speak provided that their voices are louder than the loudspeaker audio For example you might decide to play background music from a CD player during a presentation PA Adaptive Mode allows you to use the output routed from the CD player as the ambient reference to prevent the CD player s audio from gating on microphones The default is on PA Adapt and AEC Reference When PA Adaptive Mode is selected you must define the output that will be used as the reference source for PA adaptation and Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC Select a source in the PA Adapt and AEC Reference drop do
48. applications Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt 0 56dqB in 7dB increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mi
49. e 8 PA Reference Buses Network e 10 100 Auto Switching PC and Network Port e HTTP Server e Telnet Client e SNMP Agent e SNTP Client e DNS e DHCP RS 232 e DB 9 e 9 6k 115k baud e 8 1 0 e Hardware Flow Control USB e 2 0 Compatible e Type B connector GPIO e DB 25 female A B e Inputs Active Low e Outputs Open Collector 40Vdc 40 mA Power e 100 240VAC 50 60 Hz e 300 Watts maximum Environmental e Operating temperature e 32 122 degrees F Humidity e 15 to 80 Mechanical e Dimensions 2RU e 3 5 H x 17 25 W x 15 92 D e Weight lt 30 Ibs Compliance e EMC FCC Part 15 Class A e EMI EN55024 e Safety IEC60950 CSA CCC e Class 2 Wiring Required 332 CONVERGE PRO 840T Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features e Number of Open Microphones NOM e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Last Mic Mode e Maximum of Mics Mode e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features e 29x30 matrix e 8 analog in out e 1 speaker out amplified e 12 expansion bus in ou
50. e Configuration Mode Overview e Preset Mode Overview 54 SITE FILE OVERVIEW Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more units for a specific application or venue Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices using your PC Site files are a powerful tool for creating a library of configuration files for specific applications and room types For example you can create a baseline site file for divided rooms that specifies mic gating output crosspoints AEC and AGC ALC store it on your hard drive and use the file for other similar installations This approach allows you to standardize settings across venues NOTE All units ship with a default site configuration file Site files also enable you to create users set passwords set unit master slave control status set up email notification and configure time local parameters as described in the Site Properties topic To open a Site file select the File menu in Console Converge Console Board Room cvg DER Fie view Add Connect Modes Services Help Aa 7T olet RA POBSARSHE Ou AA ClearOne PEN unit channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Board Room gt re ea arr AAA Current Unit Telco Rx 1 12 20 20 Objects 30 Converge840T 03 Telco PA aeo Site View Tree view Bing Ind m Dial Tone Level gt E S 30 Converges40T 0
51. e Mute If you are configuring a Line or User button enter a name for it in the Line or User Name field optional The key selected determines the commands available in the Command drop down lists in the Command section of the screen Command Associated with Function Wokume Type DD Commnard Channel Group Fale Target Press 3 Converge 8407 fo RAMe at lr 9 ho E Command AA SS eS dl 7 3 a For example the commands available for the volume buttons include GAIN MACRO and RAMP When you select a command the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above For more information on the command editor see Command Editor in the Control Tab topic Select the Type DID device ID and Command from the drop down lists After selecting a command and configuring its parameters press the Apply button to save the button programming To clear a command press the Clear button 222 For some commands such as MACRO the Status section of the command editor becomes active Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State LED on and Inactive State LED off rows of the Status section Command Associated with Function User Defined Button Typa DO Corema Macro Marne Press fz Converge B40T 0 MACRO hi Command type Name DD Command Macro Mar Rakata 3 Converge aaot lo macro P Type ih Co
52. fe Je fe Je fe fe fe fe fe fer te le le e E X a am O Converge 880TA E TOQTMONWpP ZIPTACTNIXS lt ICANDODO AO HTL Mode Configuration Site Data Default W Unit Data Default W NotConnected MMMM MMMM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES80TA 0 Devic y The File menu appears as shown below File View Add Connect Modes Services New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Site Properties Print 1 Executive Conference Room cpd 2 Training Room cpd 3 Board Room cpd Exit File menu options are explained in the following sections 200 The File menu site options allow you to Create a New Site open a saved site with Open Site or close the current site with Close Site The File menu save options allow you to Save and Save As a site file Print allows you to create view print and save Site and Unit configuration reports The File menu recent file list displays the last four Site Files opened The File menu Exit option closes Console lo close the current Site without exiting Console use the Close Site option If you are Connected to a Site a Confirm dialog appears when you select Exit as shown below Confirm Site is Connected wd Close Site Press Yes to confirm the exit or No to return to Console Clicking Yes brings up another Confirm dialog as shown below Confirm y Save Changes to Site File Sitel Click Yes to save changes to the Site File
53. lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Channel 2 See 4 G in Groups and Channels Null to query in text HDAEC Enables Disables HD AEC mode This command enables the HD AEC Mode of a Beamforming Microphone Array Command Form DEVICE HDAEC lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 29 V Value Unsigned 2 0 Off Short 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to Query in Text HDAECMODE Set Report HD AEC mode This command sets the HD AEC Mode of a Beamforming Microphone Array as Mono or Stereo Command Form DEVICE HDAECMODE lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Unsigned 1 29 V i Short Value Unsigned 2 1 Mono One reference per Beamforming Mic Short 2 Stereo Iwo references per Beamforming Mic Null to Query in Text HDDREFSEL1 Reference Select for Mono Channel Acoustic Echo Cancellation Block This command Sets Reports Reference for Mono AEC Block Command Form DEVICE HDREFSEL1 lt Channel gt lt Group gt Ref Group Ref Channel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 29 V Reference Group 1 8 A Null to query in text ji Group Reference Channel 1 See Groups and Channels ji Channel HDDREFSEL2 Reference Select for
54. o EXD Input 11 oy Converge 880TA l ITO MOWE 22 ACTNXS lt ICANDOTVO The Center Pane displays the screen for the selected Console Tab As shown above the default screen is Unit Tab 53 Objects Pane The Object Pane contains the AV Devices tab which allows you to select from a list of pre configured device settings and apply them instantly to a channel and the Objects tab which allows you to select from a list of custom channel objects and instantly apply them to a specific channel type AV Devices and channel Objects are stored in the Database Status Bar Mode Configuration SiteDats Good Mi Uit Daa Good M Connected BERBER RRR Ste Shel Unk Converged40T 03 Device ID 4 The Status Bar displays the current Console Mode as well as connection status site information and unit information The LEDs in the Status Bar indicate current status as follows e Clear no LEDs illuminated Not connected e Yellow Connecting pending e Green Connected e Red Off line e Purple Current with error Console Modes Console has two modes Configuration Mode and Preset Mode Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for your unit s Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them instantly to CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit s For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e LCD Programming e Site Properties
55. of current gt DAA OVL status gt DAA DOD status gt DAA OPD status gt Not used For the network check the box will report if no IP address is set If it is set the box will ping the gateway The message will say the ping failed if it is not returned in 5 s Otherwise the message will report how many seconds it took to return the ping 294 TAMODE Telco Adapt Mode This command selects reports the Telco adapt mode Command Form DEVICE TAMODE lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 O Auto 1 Burst Null to query in text TE Telco Enable This command selects reports the hook status Command Form DEVICE TE lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0n f 2 Toggle Null to query in text TELCOLVLCTRL Telco RX Level Control Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of Telco Rx level control Command Form DEVICE TELCOLVLCTRL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 NEO Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text TELOVER Telco Current Overload This command reports that the Telco circuitry has experienced a current ove
56. 10 Watts 4 Q Impedance e THD Noise lt 0 5 Telco Line e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telco Set e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telephone Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB e THD N lt 0 3 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz e SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation e Tail Time 31 ms e Null 55 dB nominal Telephone Noise Cancellation e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length CONVERGE PRO 840T continued Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity e Hardware flow control on default off USB e Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA ov
57. 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30W Typical Dimensions L x D x H e 11 25 10 25 x 1 15 e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 bs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 880 Converge Pro 880 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer 328 CONVERGE PRO 880T Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features e Number of Open Microphones NOM e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Last Mic Mode e Maximum of Mics Mode e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features e 37x38 matrix e 12 analog in out e 12 expansion bus in out e 8 assignable processing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out e 1 10W speaker amplifier e 1 telco input 1 telco output Assignable Processing Blocks e
58. 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 Loop Drop ADCLIP Audio Clipping 2 Call Progress 3 Loop Drop Call Progress Null to query in text This command reports the channels that are currently clipping their audio signals This command is read only This command is implemented only for inputs Command Form DEVICE ADCLIP Values Argument Type Value Bit Map of Inputs Size 2 Bit Map of Outputs Bit Map of Processors Bit Map of Faders Bit Map of Telco 1 248 Values XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX gt Input 1 Isb to 12 msb gt Reserved Null to query in text KA KAKA XXKXK XXKK gt Reserved XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX gt Output 1 Isb to 13 msb gt Processor A Isb to H msb gt Reserved XXXX XXXX gt Faders 1 Isb to 4 msb gt Reserved XXXX gt Telco RX gt Telco TX gt Reserved KAKA ADPRESENT Audio Presence This command displays the channels that currently have valid audio signals present This command is read only Command Form DEVICE ADPRESENT Values Argument Type Size Value Bit Map of 2 Inputs Bit Map of 2 Outputs Bit Map of 2 Processors Bit Map of 1 Faders Bit Map of Telco 1 Values XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A gt Input 1 Isb to 12 msb Deseas gt Reserved Null to query in text XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX P ATE cede gt Output 1 lsb to 13 msb gt Reserved XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX eae gt Processor A
59. 4 60 00 20 00 dB Frequency Unsigned Float 4 Type 1 2 O Null in text qe Type 3 20 00 20000 00 SIGGENEN Signal Generator Enable This command selects reports of the signal generator activation Command Form DEVICE SIGGENEN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text SIGGENSWEEP Signal Generator Sweep This command starts the signal generator with a tone and does a sweep If Repeat is 0 the signal generator will turn off after the sweep If Repeat is 1 the signal generator will turn off after signal generator timeout To stop the sweep send a SIGGENEN command with a O During the sweep the box will send out updated SIGGEN commands Command Form DEVICE SIGGENSWEEP lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Amplitude gt lt Start Frequency gt lt End Frequency gt lt Increment Frequency gt lt Rate gt lt Repeat gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 3 7 I M L Amplitude Signed Float 2 60 00 20 00 dB Start Unsigned Float 4 20 00 20000 00 Hz Frequency End Unsigned Float 4 20 00 20000 00 must be greater than the qe Frequency start Increment Unsigned Float 4 1 00 20000 00 Eis Frequency Rate Unsigned Integer 2 10 2000 ms Hz Repeat Unsigned Integer 2 0 repeat off ji 1 repeat on SIGTOUT Signal Generator Time Out Sets the signal generator time out for t
60. 43 NOM Mute Gain 1490 ZETACTN lt XS lt CANDODVO trots ret 000 Debug console tabs are described in the following sections Meter View Tab Mode Configuration Site Default W Unit Data Default MN NotConnected MMMM MMMM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES80TA 0 Devic The Meter View tab provides eight user configurable level meters for monitoring signal levels on any channel in a site 230 Debug Console Meter view Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Mask Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Joo convergesRa ca 00 Comvergesra ce om Converge TRACE Meter Type c ripun Pre Gain gt Meter Type Meler Input Pre Gain i input Pre Gain A hic 1 Gate MA pic Cate A Mc 3 Gate A Mica Gate A Mc 5 Gate MA Mc 6 Gale a hc Gale hcg Gate Meler 5 Und a hic 3 Gate El Mic 4 Gato Wie 5 Gate Ml Whe 6 Gate ho Y Gate u Mc 8 Ome Meter 6 Uni 00 CorvergeSRA Ca H hc 1 Gate A Me 2 Gate hc 3 Gabe Wie 4 Gote A MS Gabe A hic 6 Gate hac 2 Gale A Mt 3 Gale hic 4 Gate A hic 5 Gale Mc 6 Gate ul be Y Gate T Mic 7 Gate a hic Gate i Mic 8 Gale BE de 5 00 ConvergsSRA C8 Meter T Mater T i input Pre Gain 00 input Pre Gain gt fi 61 f 3 5 To configure a meter select the Unit Meter Type and Channel using the drop down lists Meter view provides a useful diagnostic to
61. 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive LVD IEC 60950 1 2001 346 safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment Telecom Telecom Terminal Equipment Converge Pro 840T 8 Converge Pro TH20 Only ETSI ES 203 021 1 2 and 3 Access and Terminals AT Harmonized basic attachment requirements for Terminals for connection to analogue interfaces of the Telephone Net works Update of the technical contents of TBR 021 EN 301 437 TBR 015 TBR 017 Part 1 General aspects Part 2 Basic transmission and protection of the network from harm Part 3 Basic Interworking with the Public Telephone Networks RoHS 2002 95 EC Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE 8 WEEE 2002 96 EC Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE We herein certify that the products listed above are in compliance with the EU directive 2002 95 EC and EU directive 2002 96 EC We the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Date of Issue August 4 2009 Legal Representative in Europe s Tracy Bathurst SSS Signature Tracy Bathurst CTO 347 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE Conformity of the eguipment with the guidelines below is attested by the CE mark EC Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s Name ClearOne Communications Manufacturer s Address Edgewater Corporate Park South To
62. A 48 Output I Mic E GA Telco Tx Input 1 Processing A np Auto Denct Sit ha L De 1 pil Ra Input 2 MM Fader Ta Input 3 a NC jeta ALC Mute EN Input 4 B ZA MA U E Line Input 5 X Input 6 K ois 8 amp Telco Rx 9 Line E Telco Rx D YAna q ssaamg o dapey Zaapes r gaapeg o Pape 8 Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E Telco Tx Ub Telco TX Processing BD Process 4 B Process B D Process a Process D fh Fader 143 Fader 1 ML Fader 2 v MT a Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default MN Not Connected MMMM MMMM Site Board Room Unit ConvergeS40T 03 Device ID 0 55 The File menu appears Select Open Site as shown below wile View Odd Connec Mew Site Close Site Save Save s Site Properties Print 1 Board Room cpod 2 Sitel cpd 3 Sibel cod Exit The Open dialog appears as shown below Look irc C My Documents ee 2 AdobestockPhotes ss iTunes Music My Recent Documents GA Snagit Catalog Desktop Update Firmuare_fles Opdater a ha Board Room cvy wa Shel cod wa 5te2 cpd w Ste4 cpd My Documents F ra ff oI Fier oftype Converge Site fle cpd _ Caneel Es Locate the site file you want to open and click Open Console opens the site file and it appears in the Site Selection drop down li
63. AGC aximum Gain Target Level RMS 185 4060 5040 ogzi 10000 Select the Enable AGC checkbox to enable AGC or deselect it to disable AGC For AGC configuration details see AGC Configuration Settings The channel routing matrix shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel line input 5 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box E Input E ndo r cdo e t pamo sanda o g pdng do gado oo dla Z dudan e E OLEO es t duenod HL oyal a o dt op 0 dq 01 bot op 0 y deg al gt g g oy 0 8 keg oy nte op e nee oy Mm dey ol S xo Liga Ziq 01 ra ego podegay y eg oL 1301 loteo a EEE y asand gt g saa L mdma To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Chrl C Paste CE 121 The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Proce
64. AlM dels RS 232 POM sa sepie a choi weed bn amp Be eae a eek a Ga aa aa bh Aa 315 CONMECINO Witt TENG AAA 654 5 IKI AA A eee 315 All Models RS 232POFft umwana 315 APPENDIX B DEFAULT PINOUTS 317 CON II PONS ecards der rr sas 317 ARI PP IIIA KIAINA aa 324 APPENDIX C FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE 325 TABLE OF CONTENTS continued APPENDIX D SPECIFICATIONS 327 Sa jo PrO G60 IA AI UAE IIIA AA KAENI 327 Wa aa li a eh ww ii tt cti ando 329 Converge Pro SOU 4444444444046 oe eee bee ee ee pe a ae a iba 331 Converge Pro 840T wamanamwna muwa a nawa nawa 333 a FIC Ol RA 395 CONVERGE PAG ol COMUMUCO ina AA WAA ARA AAA aa Sane 336 COVES FiO M20 sars EIA AI ee ia A rs 337 CONEJO POMO sesir oe prae Fore Fes oe RS ADAGE ER EGA PEAR RA HERG Sy FQ dS SEES 338 Converge SR 1212 6 ee eee eee ee bene teen eee nanma nuna 339 Converge SAI ie awe aaa ask eee oo AI ee es ed ate ae he eR AAA 341 Beamforming Microphone Array aaa eee ee 342 APPENDIX E COMPLIANCE 344 PCC Part 15 CES009 COMPIANCS i04db0 e500 weed ede Smad cansada nadando renace SED 344 FUG Pall Ge COMPIANOS 02 250 pocas suse es tebe E he ek asar 344 Electrical Safety AQVISON sin sees cee aa aa RRO eRe dd ee dm ee eR ERS 345 IC COMPLIANCE 200 eee eee eee nae 345 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE 242244 244 06 44604a Ske he eb yoo dad de ee eed Pee 346 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE i kissd se cd ae e od do rn
65. Audio RX oo o aL O Tam D P Processing RX Process A Process B Process C Process D Process E Process F Process G Process H Converge 880TA E 3 TOQTMODOP SECA NI ANDIOTO Pointing to a processing channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree view ae na ofu JLT LR set the desired Gain settings for the processing channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle Del Delay Comp Compression and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Channel Label or number or letter of the channel next to the matrix 79 Fader Channel Settings NOTE The CONVERGE Pro 880TA and CONVERGE SR 1212A do not have fader settings M MIC Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mute Pres 0 Output Input 1 BE o as d gmi 0 da E Output 1 Input 2 BE o as he g m 0 da E Output 2 Input 3 BE o as he g m W Output 3 Input 4 BE o as D QQ me E Output 4 L Line Pres Gain Mute AGC W Output 5 InputS oa a 5 0 d3 E Output 6 Input6 Jn 4 4 6 0 de EE Output 7 Input ja 4 4 7 ads EE Output amp Input 8 SmE 8 1000 R Telco RX Pres Ga
66. Cancellation e Mic Gating Mic Input Settings 106 AGC ALC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL TAB AGC ALC enables AGC or ALC and allows you to configure AGC settings for the selected input channel Either AGC or ALC can be enabled you cannot use them both at the same time AGC keeps an input signal at a target gain level that you select and is generally used for Line Input channels ALC automatically keeps an input signal at a constant level and is generally used to keep speech levels constant on Mic Input channels With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press either the AGC or ALC button located just below the Post Gain meter Converge Console Board Room cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Ee E TITC CR 2S M0 MEN On Me ClearOne Unit f Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Board Room i Post Gain Post Process gt Current Unit ze E 20 20 30 Converge840T 03 amp amp Line Site View Tree View 3 y G Telco Rx 840 30 Converges40T 0 A al ka Output amp Mic G3 Telco Tx A m 86 dEl gt 30 dB 30 dB me 30dB fel Processing Q Input 2 P J M Fader Ra Input 3 Q Input 4 E AS Line a Input 5 Input 6 cated N a y Non Gated ee Pre nec Hgg Telco Rx A crosspoint Gy Telco RX
67. Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 toggle Null to query in text AARINGS Number of Rings to Auto Answer On This command selects reports the setting of the number of rings to auto answer Command Form DEVICE AARINGS lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 2 4 Null to query in text ACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication This command selects reports the status of the audible connect disconnect indication Command Form DEVICE ACONN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text 247 ACONNLVL Audible Connect Discon nect Level This command selects reports the audible connect disconnect indicator s level Command Form DEVICE ACONNLVL lt Cha nnel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 Null to query in text ag AD Auto Disconnect Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of auto disconnect Command Form DEVICE AD lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1
68. Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below 33 Export as object Apply Eo all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Telco Tx 1 as Teleo Line Out Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below co i Telco Line Out E 18 Processing l Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration 143 Optimizing Output Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for output channels ensures optimal audio performance
69. Command Form DEVICE PTTTHRESHOLD lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Float 2 100 to 0 dB Null to query in text PUSHTOTALK Push to Talk This command selects reports the setting of push to talk for a microphone Command Form DEVICE PUSHTOTALK lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text RAMP Ramp Gain Adjustment This command starts stops the gain ramp for an input output or assignable processing block There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE RAMP lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Rate gt Target Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 taaa 112 16 1 2320 0d 0 04 PERT RKR ZDU Rate Signed Integer 1 50 50 If value 0 the ramp will stop If value lt 0 the gain will ramp down wore If value gt O the gain will ramp up Target signed Integer 1 65 20 If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary the ramp will use dB the channel s maximum and minimum for a target REDIAL Redial the Last Number This command redials the last number There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE REDIAL lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Gr
70. Connect units in daisy chain fashion as shown below using the 18 straight through patch cable included with each unit Part 830 150 004 For larger distances between units use CAT 5 twisted pair cable with RJ 45 connectors The maximum cable length between connected units is 200 feet 61 meters Converge Pro 840T Converge Pro 880 O Link In VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC ZA ORRIN FREQUENCY 50H Pc Rez CONTROL STATUS P IA N ji a om KA je EE 112 LINKOUT gt Audio and Control Buses The E bus allows audio routing between source devices and destination devices on the E bus network The E bus contains 18 independent digital audio buses labeled Z which can route mic or line inputs in any combination across the E bus network The E bus also contains four PA adapt acoustic echo cancellation reference buses six global gating buses and one control bus S Z Buses These eight buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the network These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required I R Buses These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOMcount and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses By default all microphones are routed to the O bus
71. Console 1 0 4 and 1 1 5 are NOT compatible with Console 2 0 Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re created Databases created with the 2 0 x release are compatible with the 3 0 x release The Database Tab enables you to create modify and save AV devices channel objects and advanced objects AV devices allow you to save pre defined configurations for a particular type of device such as a ceiling microphone Channel objects allow you to save pre defined configurations for a channel Advanced objects allow you to save matrix macro control and preset objects for advanced configuration and automation tasks Using AV devices and channel objects you can create standardized configurations for particular room types and equipment and quickly configure a venue See Drag amp Drop Configuration tor more information To access the Database select the Database Tab from the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Board Room cvg SEE File view Add Connect Modes Services Help SOO Fe ee 23 O0SSERSHW OF 1 Me ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database F Board Room AY Devices Objects Current Unit ji 30 Converge840T 03 ReadOnly AV Devices Site View Tree View mnt io TATSSIR Devi f Ju hone tego Ceiling a Pe FX Ceiling 538 30 Converged40T 0 A Manutactu udio T Made 1853R rice 239 00 A ER Mic
72. E ad OER ORES EASE ESS a ES esses es 16 Operating REGUIFGMEINNS rsrs riera eae bos peed oh EEK Se AAA Ae ee eo oe oes 17 System Reguirements amaaoonawunn 17 IA ASAREE AA WA WA AA ee ee Ai IA Aa 18 Controls and Connections anaaaaaaanna 28 CHAPTER 2 EXPANSION BUS 8 LCD PROGRAMMING 36 o AS 36 DICC eee ts pops yaaa Oe Wa Wa a ia a de e a oF LCD Programming OvervieW IIIA eee eee tenet tte teens 39 LCD Channels Wc AA Aa See tee edhe teed a tet a ek op bw A ae hn he a 42 PCB Sina MEN ued eed he arar Wa E be a ee Eee ca AO A EEE 43 LCD Macros Menu manannaananwwnnanaana na 45 LOD Proset MI 244484444446 oe ee AA AAA era os 46 CHAPTER 3 CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING 4 Installing CONVERGE CONSOIE ec aa odo be be ee ada ede ds 47 CONVERGE CONGO MENS coa torero ded bd oS SAS EGS Eke Rae S edad RAER 50 Site File OvemvieW onana naww e ees 35 Donl enoi ie i PESEE ESEETO TEPE EE E E AA IAA 58 Site PTOPEMIBS mnanaa nana www 59 MA IA ID aaa ai aaa 64 CONVERGE Pro VH20 olle PropeniGS esersidarrans rro READ RAE e 69 Beamforming Microphone Array Site Properties 73 Configuration Mode Overview o o o amana wana manaa nn es MOTA IIIA UE ER edd odode dod RRRARARRAA HAA RAE EERE RA 76 MM TAO ca
73. Echo Return Loss Enhance ment Not SR 1212 SR 1212A ERL ERLE Not SR 1212 SR 12124 AGC Pre AGC peak level meter Post AGC peak level meter Ambient 240 Beam forming Mic Array Input level Level post gain adjustment but pre filter N A Level post gate gated level Echo Return Loss Echo Return Loss Enhance ment ER ere N A N A N A N A Input level Post Gain level N A N A N A N A N A AGC Pre AGC peak level meter Post AGC peak level meter N A METER TYPE DEFINITIONS TABLE Input level Post Gain level N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Level Position for Post Limiter level N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Input Level Post Gain level Level after Gain Stage N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Level Post gain Adjust ment N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Line Inputs Outputs Telco TX Telco Rx Post Gain level Level into Compressor Level Post Compressor Level Post Gain Stage N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Power Amp Input Level Post NOM Output Level Post Gain Feedback Max Auto Gain Compressor Attenuation Level Pre Compressor Level Post Compressor Adaptive Gain Level of Adaptive Gain Noise Floor Level Post Mute Gain Pre EQ N A N A
74. Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command CONVERGE Pro 840T The successor to the industry leading XAP 400 The 840T provides the same rich feature set as the 8801 complete with a built in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications For large venues the 8407 also provides industry leading expansion capabilities via ClearOne s expansion bus technology Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set
75. Fader Settings 91 CHANNEL TAB OVERVIEW The Channel section of Console makes the full set configuration controls available for a given channel from input to processing to output The type of channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane determines the contents of the Channel pane in the center of Console The channels available in the Tree View tab are e Mic Input Channels e Line Input Channels e Telco VoIP Rx Channel e Output Channels e Telco VoIP Tx Channel e Processing Channels e Fader Channels Accessing Channel Tab Selecting a channel in the Tree View tab displays the Channel Tab for that channel For example the channel tab for a mic channel is shown below Converge Console BE0tal ceg Sou TT OG 13 SORRUMES One Mode Configuration She Data Delat W Unk Dota Oefauk MN Not Connected MMMM MIM Ste Urt CorvergeG80TA00 Device ID 0 Channel Configuration Controls As shown above the configuration settings for a channel are displayed as controls buttons sliders check boxes selection lists text entry boxes in the Channel pane Use the text entry boxes to assign custom names Use the drop down lists to select from a list of configuration values Use the sliders to set a discrete value for channel configuration parameters Preu uu Some buttons such as the PPWR Phantom Power button shown above toggle features on and off 92 Other buttons including AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC
76. G H CONVERGE PRO 880TA lt gt MENU ESC SELECT W TELCO J S SN ff SN cup raur 12345678 j A 42341 ew 0060600000 ya gt 9 Se hW 4 Nz 46000000 CONVERGE Pro 840T Front Panel B C Ol gt 3 j 28 CONVERGE Pro 8i Front Panel CONVERGE Pro TH20 Front Panel CONVERGE Pro VH20 Front Panel a C ClearOne MENU eS CONVERGE Pro SR1212 Front Panel 29 CONVERGE Pro SR1212A Front Panel A B C D EF G H CONVERGE SR 1212A gt CONVERGE Pro Front Panel Control Descriptions A USB Type B Port Provides convenient front panel connectivity for laptops and PCs Microphone On LEDs Indicate microphone gate status and mute state LCD Display Shows model number unit name IP address firmware version menu pages menu options configuration settings and parameter values Menu Dial Navigates the CONVERGE Pro LCD programming menu and enables you to modify basic configuration settings ESC Button Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display Select Button Displays the CONVERGE Pro LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option LED Bar Meter Displays the audio level of a selected input output processing or fader channel Default meters 880 Output 12 8801 Output 12 840T Output 8 8i Mic 1 TH20 Telco Tx VH20 VoIP Tx SR1212 Output 12 e AMP Fault Indicator LEDs 880TA SR
77. IN LINE OUT AA i n 2 x i eJoJoJeJe o000000000000 y 0000 y 200000000000 elelelelele e e o eee A 3 LINK OUT 11 CONVERGE Pro VH20 Rear Panel 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A 0000000000000 FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz 7 0900000000000 RS 232 CONTROL STATUS A LINE IN LINE OUT i2 T OCO ES y y 0000 A ooo0oo000000000 oejejejeoejeje o LEE TE TE JE TE zon r LINK OUT CONVERGE Pro SR1212 Rear Panel LINK IN VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A MIC LINE 2 1 3 LINE OUT FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz 1 1 zi 3 4 0000000000000 A KA 000000000000 ejelelel elejelelele ele LES TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE TE a CONTROL STATUS A EIN LINE OUT 9 O e he 9 1 10 MA AZ y I ojofoJeJe O Ce 0000000000000 y oJoJoJe y o00000000000 ojeojejoejejejoejoejejejoejoj oe ee ee WA WA amp WA WA WA KAKAA KAKA KA AA AA IAA WAA o o o oH o COC COCO O LINK OUT 1 4 5 1 6 1 1 8 pos 6 UR 1 8 CONVERGE Pro SR1212A Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 Mfoooooocooooooo 000000000000 Ai oooooooooo0o00o 000000000000 10 12 32 CONVERGE Pro Rear Panel Connectors 1 AC Power IEC connector 100 240VAC auto adjusting 50 60Hz A This equipment must be connected to an AC mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection The third prong of this connector ground is an important safety feature Do not attempt to disable this ground connection by using a
78. Immunity EN 61000 4 5 2005 Lightning Surge Immunity EN 61000 4 6 2006 Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000 4 11 2004 Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions 348 Safety 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive LVD EN 60065 2002 Audio video and similar electronic apparatus Safety requirements ROHS 2002 95 EC amp 2005 618 EC Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE amp WEEE 2002 96 EC Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE herein certify that the products listed above are in compliance with the EU directive 2002 95 EC and EU directive 2002 96 EC the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Date of Issue February 13 2009 Legal Representative in Europe s Greg A LeClaire Signature Greg A LeClaire CFO 349 NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANCE In the event of main power failure Converge Converge Pro eguipment will become inoperable with regard to making telephone calls All persons using Converge Converge Pro eguipment for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law which reguires that at least one party to the conversation be aware that the conversation is being recorded In addition the principles enumerated in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of any personal information collected the purpose of this collection
79. On Integer 1 See 14 C in Groups and Channels f Macro Mute Off Integer 1 See 14 C in Groups and Channels f Macro BFLED Beamforming Mic LED Mode This command sets reports the mode of the Mute Button LEDs on a Beamforming Mic Command Form DEVICE BFLED Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Integer 4 O OFF Always not lit 1 Steady Red when Muted Steady Blue when Un Muted Default 2 Blinking Red when Muted Steady Blue when Un Muted Null to Query in text 253 CALLDUR Call Duration This command returns current call duration If no call is active this command returns 0 At the time of call termination this command will automatically be sent out to report call duration This command is read only Command Form DEVICE CALLDUR lt Channel gt lt Duration gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 Duration String 8 String of format HR MN SS CALLERID Reports Caller ID Information This command reports Caller Identification Information This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE CALLERID lt Channel gt lt Number gt lt Argument gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 chars Label String 16 1 16 chars CGROUP Compressor Group Select This command selects report
80. Paste Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB Note that the level to the nearest dB is displayed in the cross point for the channel on the Matrix NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel For example clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below 116 oo CAE 08000000800 A sosa aaa Ss a SS a a aaa a 52522300 mtmmm momo mo mom mmmo so A A A A 22227 OHO aM ACH SK ENT CRO ES eo M i A Gain 7 Output Level E 20 E 5 eee 00de gt This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You can change the channel Label name of the output channel in the label entry field toggle NOM constant gain on or off toggle Mute on or off and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings ma
81. Reference Buses Network e 10 100 Auto Switching PC and Network Port e HTTP Server e Telnet Client e SNMP Agent e SNTP Client e DNS e DHCP RS 232 e DB 9 e 9 6k 115k baud e 8 1 0 e Hardware Flow Control USB e 2 0 Compatible e Type B connector GPIO e DB 25 female A B e Inputs Active Low Outputs Open Collector 40Vdc 40 mA Power e 100 240VAC 50 60 Hz e 300 Watts maximum Environmental e Operating temperature e 32 122 degrees F Humidity e 15 to 80 Mechanical e Dimensions 2RU e 3 5 Hx 17 25 W x 15 92 D e Weight lt 30 lbs Compliance e EMC FCC Part 15 Class A e EMI EN55024 e Safety IEC60950 CSA CCC e Class 2 Wiring Required BEAMFORMING MICROPHONE ARRAY Audio Performance Acoustic Characteristics e 24 microphones e Auto voice tracking e Polar Pattern Custom e Frequency Response 150Hz 16kHz e Signal to Noise Ratio gt 70 dB e AEC Tail time 128 ms e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB adjustable Auto Mixer Parameters Number of Open Microphones NOM e First mic priority mode e Last mic mode e Maximum number of mics mode e Ambient level e Gate threshold adjust e Off attenuation adjust e Hold time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Parameters e 1 Channel In e 18 Expansion Bus in out Beamforming Mic Array Configurations e Echo cancellation on off e Noise cancellation on off e Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ ALC on off e Gain adju
82. SERIAL COMMAND INDEX AA Auto Answer Enable Disable 237 AAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode 237 AARINGS Number of Rings to Auto Answer On 237 ACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication 237 ACONNLVL Audible Connect Disconnect Level 238 AD Auto Disconnect Enable Disable 238 ADCLIP Audio Clipping o EEEE 238 ADPRESENT Audio Presence 239 AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable Disable 239 AGC Automatic Gain Control 239 AGCSET Automatic Gain Control Adjust 240 AMBLVL Ambient Level AOJUSI ao 240 AMXDUET Use AMX Duet Discovery 0 0 00 0 240 AUDIOMASTER Expansion Bus Audio Master Mode 240 AV Adaptive Volume eee nent en ene ne 240 AVG Adaptive Volume GAIN 241 AVR Adaptive Volume Reference 241 AVRT Adaptive Volume Ratio 0 een eens 241 AVT Adaptive Volume Threshold
83. Settings M MIC Line Fres Gain AES HC Mute Gate Mute i Pres 0 Output Input 1 m M8 Output 1 Input 2 ma MA Output z Input 3 ma E Output 3 Input 4 Output 4 L Line Pres MA Output 5 Imputs ME C Input 3 Output 7 Input E HN Output 8 mui Me E Speaker R Telco RX Pres Gain Mute Mc HomM Mute Gain Pres T Telco TX TelcoR Woe 1 1 Y 00 Mi Teko Tx Pointing to an output channel on the right side of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white on the left side of the screen shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree View E F Output 1 Set the desired Gain settings for the output channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Channel Label or number or letter of the channel next to the matrix 78 Processing Channel Settings M MIC Line 0 Output Input 1 BN Output 1 Input 2 E Output 2 Input 3 tput 3 Input 4 E Output 4 Input 5 W Output 5 Input 6 E E NOM Mute Gain Pres TM Telco TX 1 3 0 0 a8 W Telco TX pansion Audio TX i NE Telco RX 1 ion
84. Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel gt ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt QO 56dB in 7dB increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications gt A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16
85. Stereo Channel Acoustic Echo Cancellation Block This command Sets Reports Reference for Stereo AEC Block Command Form DEVICE HDREFSEL2 lt Channel gt lt Group gt Ref Group Ref Channel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 29 V Reference Group 1 8 A Null to query in text Group Reference Channel 1 See Groups and Channels ji Channel 268 HDNLP Non Linear Processing Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the Non linear processing for each microphone channel This command can be used to replace the NLP command for the M group Command Form DEVICE HDNLP lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value 2 0 Off 1 Soft 2 Medium 3 Aggressive Null to query in text HOOK Hook Flash This command sends a hook flash There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE HOOK lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 a HOOKD Hook Flash Duration This command selects reports the hook flash duration Command Form DEVICE HOOKD lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 50 2000 Multiples of 10 Ms only Ms Null to query in text LA
86. TH20 VH20 Mic Array X TRANSSTART UID X X X X X X X X X X VE X VER X X X X X X X X X X XAA X X X X X XAAMB X X X X X X X X XAARINGS X X X X X XACONN X X X X X XACONNLVL X X X X X XACALLDUR X X X X X XACALLERID X X X X X XAMBLVL X X X X X X X X XCALLDUR X X X X X XCALLERID X X X X X XCGROUP X X X X X X X XCHAIRO X X X X X X X X XCOMPRESS X X X X X X X XCOMPSEL X X X X X X X XDECAY X X X X X X X X XDELAY X X X X X X X XDELAYSEL X X X X X X X XDIAL X X X X X XDTMFLVL X X X X X XDTONETLVL X X X X X XGHOLD X X X X X X X X XGMODE X X X X X X X X XGOVER X X X X X X X X XGRATIO X X X X X X X X XGRPSEL X X X X X X X X XHOOK X X X X X XHOOKD X X X X X XLOCALNUM X X X X X XOFFA X X X X X X X X XPBDIAL X X X X X XREDIAL X X X X X XRING X X X X X XRINGEREN X X X X X XRINGERLVL X X X X X XRINGERSEL X X X X X XRINGERTEST X X X X X XSLVL X X X X X X X X XSPEEDDIAL X X X X X XTE X X X X X XTELCOLVLCTRL X X X X X 314 ALL MODELS RS 232 PORT CONNECTING WITH TELNET Users can connect to any unit via RS 232 and telnet Available telnet commands are the same as those used in the Serial Command section of this appendix How to Connect with Telnet Use the telnet client of your choice Telnet uses port 23 The user name and password are the same as used by Console The default username is clearone and the default password is converge These are not case sensitive The telnet session will time out afte
87. THD N lt 0 3 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz e SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telephone Noise Cancellation e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Telco Line Echo Cancellation e Tail Time 31 ms e Null 55 dB nominal Telco Line e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telco Set e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB e Rs 150 0 e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range 100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Line Inputs 1 2 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Line Outputs 1 2 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 kQ e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e Category 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length between any two Converge Converge Pro devices Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors 337 RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 2
88. Tab Overview AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control e Mic Gating e Gating Tab e Matrix Tab e Drag Drop Configuration e Database Tab e Mic Input Settings e Output Settings 123 TELCO VOIP RX SETTINGS Telco VoIP Rx Settings enable you to customize telephone receive channel settings using the Channel tab With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the Telco VolP Rx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane _ Converge Console 8E0tal cvp Fie View Add Connect Modes Services Help Boa FT ce se ANI 41 9 Site Selection Current Unit Hd Converged Am de Configuration Ske Data Delak W Unt Data Defauk M Not Conected MMM Ste Lea CormenpsGa0TAD0 Device ID 0 Cc Converge Console 3 0 1 Untitled 1 cnv lt New gt File View Add Connect Modes Services Help SO FU Ce 25 0BR 0aM20 0129 Site Selection al ages a Unit Channel Matrix AEC pe Gating fo Current Unit E0 CONVERGEVH20 0 Site View Tree View l E0 CONVERGEVH20 0 E WA VoIP Tx AS Line T E x A e VoIP Rx a W Voip RX E Output E WolP Tx a Yoip TX Mode Configuration Site Data Default W Unit Data Defaut MN NotConnected MMM MRR MM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGEYH20 0 Device ID 0 y 124 As shown above the center pane displays a signal flow diagram for the Telco VolP Rx channel real time peak level meters as well as a
89. The user definable pins provide control via contact closure and status via open collector functions in the unit There are two user definable pins on the B port of every unit The number of user definable pins on the A port varies by model as summarized in the following table User Definable Pins User Definable Pins Control Status Port A Control Status Port B 880 16 2 880T 16 2 880TA 16 2 840T 20 2 8i 16 2 TH20 24 2 VH20 24 2 SR 1212 16 2 SR 1212A 16 2 Default Pin Assignments For default pin assignments for Control Status ports by model refer to Appendix B Control Status Ports Control Status A and B ports are female DB25 connectors used for General Purpose Input Output GPIO interactions between CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices and external control devices such as wall switches and push to talk microphones Control programming enables external control devices and controller software to access the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and running presets For more information on Control Status Port A and B and other physical connections see Controls and Connections Control Status Pin Programming Use the following procedure to program user definable pins 1 In the Control Status Pin Select section of the screen select port A or B from the Control Port drop down list Control Status Pin Select Control Status A Control Port a Selecte
90. all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a Telco VoIP Rx channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below 132 Export Object Export Telco Rx 1 az Telco Line Irl Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects EET Gy Telco Tx Processing c 80 Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects refer to the Table of Contents for these topics e AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration Optimizing gain structure for inout channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance When configuring the Telco VoIP Rx channel ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Channel Tab Overview e NC Noise Cancellation e Mic Gating e Gating Tab AGC ALC A
91. allows you attenuate the signal from 0 to 60dB it also allows you to add gain to the signal from O to 12dB Decay Rate Determines how fast a mic input channel gates off after the specified Hold time expires slow medium fast The default is medium Default Meter The input output level meter displayed on the front panel LED meter All Converge Pro meters are peak level meters Delay Delay calculates the amount of signal delay based on the distance between audio source and audience and the temperature Introducing an appropriate amount of delay can maintain acoustical alignment and proper sound imaging in a room regardless of speaker location This setting can also compensate for propagation delay caused by signal processing such as analog to digital conversion Delay is set in the Channel Property Configuration window for Processing channels See also Processing Blocks Device ID A number which identifies the unit when multiple units of the same device type are connected via the Expansion Bus All Converge Pro units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Device Type A number which identifies the type of unit Converge Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 7 TH20 2 03 840T 3 0 7 8i A DA DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite DHCP enables a host server to 357 dynamically assign IP addresses subnet masks default gateways and oth
92. and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware The 2 X to 4 X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade 5 Units are fully upgraded 6 Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel En 325 DON Remove any 1 X 2 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 3 X units Re connect to the 3 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units The units will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware Units are fully upgraded Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel The units have been upgraded Reconnect all expansion bus cables if needed to complete the stack of units Oa eee aS TO All CONVERGE Pro units in the site must be running firmware 4 X to be compatible with the Beamforming Microphone Array Follow the appropriate procedure above to update the firmware on the CONVERGE Pro units Connect the expansion bus cable between the CONVERGE Pro unit and the Beamforming Microphone Array Connect the CONVERGE Pro units with CONVERGE Console Open the firmware uploader screen Browse for the bf mic mdo file Download the Beamforming Microphone Array firmware The Beamforming Microphone Array s will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware Units are fully upgraded 326 APPENDIX D SPECIFICATIONS CONVERGE PRO 880 Audio Perfo
93. authority to operate the equipment FCC PART 68 COMPLIANCE US FBIBROOBCONVPRO Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 0B ac This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules Requirements adopted by ACTA On the mixer unit of this equipment contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX If requested this information must be provided to your telephone company The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENs for the calling area The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make cha
94. be used to replace the CGROUP command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCGROUP lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 23 PJ Value Unsigned Short 2 0 None 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 i 4 Group 4 Null to query in text 298 XCOMPRESS Compressor Adjust This command controls reports the signal compression setting on a Channel This command can be used to replace the COMPRESS command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCOMPRESS lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J P Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text XCOMPSEL Compressor Enable This command enables signal compression on a Channel This command can be used to replace the COMPSEL command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCOMPSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J P Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 Un ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text XDECAY Decay Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the decay rate This command can be used to replace the DECAY command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XDECAY lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channe
95. by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On 134 The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level To change the value use the slider or selector box Range is from 65 to 200B in 5dB increments The default is OdB Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels Output Lewel 20 Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present The channel routing matrix shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Output 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box gt Process A ico Process B Ez You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to set a parameter as cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu 135 Cross Point Enter
96. channel routing matrix that displays the audio routing configuration for the channel Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path The following sections describe how to use these controls in order from left to right and top to bottom as they appear in the signal flow to configure the Telco receive channel settings for your installation Telco Fix 1 Telee Rx Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Labels are shown throughout Console wherever the channel is referenced Hing Ind Suto Denct i HC ClearEffect ALC hte The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure settings for the Telco VoIP Rx channel With the exception of the Mute ClearEffect and ALC buttons which toggle their respective functions and have no user configurable settings clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window as shown below Channel Property Configuration Telco RX NC Telco Settings Telco Meters The window contains three tabs NC Noise Cancellation Telco Settings and Telco Meters which are described in the following sections 125 NC Noise Cancellation Tab Select the Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the dB setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity The attenuation depth can be
97. configuration for the channel Configuration settings for the Telco VolP Tx channel are displayed as controls buttons sliders etc which are located at the appropriate stage in the signal flow The following sections describe how to use these controls to configure Telco transmit settings for your installation Channel Label Telco Tx 1 Teic TH Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced Dialer Button Dialer The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer shown below allowing you to place calls to establish a conference call with a remote location see Dialer for more information on using the dialer and its features NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level Non Ss Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On Mute Button o mute Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off 139 The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level To change the value use the slider or selector box Range is from 65 to 20dB in 50B increments The default is OdB Min Max Limits
98. connected control devices and are used to prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels 359 Mixer Mode The matrix mixer in Console has two settings master and slave Mixer mode is configured in the Unit Properties window See also Matrix Mixer and Unit Properties Mute A condition in which an audio signal is attenuated below the audible threshold NLP Non Linear Processing NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments NLP has four settings Soft 6dB Medium 12dB Aggressive 18dB and Off NLP settings are found in the Channel Properties Configuration window for Mic Input channels Noise Cancellation A process which removes ambient noise from a signal NTP Network Time Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite NTP is used for clock synchronization between devices on IP based networks NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Gain Mode Adjusts the output level to maintain a specified gain level based on the number of mics gated on and routed to an output I R Buses These ten audio buses are used for routing microphone audio between Converge Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOM count and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses See also S Z Buses and PA Adapt AEC Reference Bus Off Attenuation The amount of level reduction a microphone is given when the microphone is not gated on PA Ada
99. controlled CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices pass command strings to external devices through the RS 232 port To create command strings press the String tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Board Room cvg Fie view Add Connect Modes Services Help BOG F7 7o00 23 ENB 912 n ClearOne Site Selection Unt Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Command 0 AA SOS Command 1 ai Current Unit 30 Converge840T 03 Site View Tree View I Mic amp Input 1 Ra Input 2 amp Input 3 Input 4 E AS Line Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Gp Telco Rx 8 Telco RX e Output a SO Command 2 AA Command 3 Command 4 E SOS Command 5 Eo ISO Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E Telco Tx Ub Telco TX p Processing Q Process A Process B Command 6 ES Command 7 a A AEAEKEKEK lt E E E E K K K K Y Process a Process D RRR Fader im Fader 1 ML Fader 2 v jiji amp Mode Configuration Site Data Good E Unit Data Good connected BERR ARANA Site Board Room Unit Converges40T 03 Device ID 0 You can create up to eight serial command strings limit 80 characters each on the String screen The following sections explain how to create and run command strings The following c
100. extenions gt lt DIGITMAP MATCH 9 MIN _DIGITS 8 MAX _DIGITS 43 STRIP_FIRST DIGITS 1 ADD_PREFIX AFTER _STRIP DIAL STRING amp sipgateway com gt lt Outside dialing gt lt DIGITMAP MATCH 0 MIN DIGITS 1 MAX DIGITS 1 STRIP_ FIRST DIGITS 0 ADD PREFIX_ AFTER _STRIP DIAL STRING operator sipproxy com gt lt Operator gt lt C1DIALPLAN gt NOTE All tokens associated with the SYSCONFIG and DIGITMAP MUST appear on separate single lines in the actual configuration file NOTE Although the dial plan configuration file may appear to be well formed XML it MUST adhere to the format defined above The DIALTIME token defines the total time in milliseconds allowed to enter the dialed digits before the phone will play a re order tone The FIRST_DIGIT_WAIT token defines the time in milliseconds the phone will wait after going off hook to enter the first digit before the a re order tone is played The INTER_DIGIT_WAIT token defines the time in milliseconds the phone will wait after the first digit is entered before another digit must be entered before the number is dialed The TERMINATION _DIGIT token defines the termination digit to be entered if the maximum number of digits have not yet been entered and the number is to be dialed before the INTER_DIGIT_WAIT timer is still active The MATCH token defines the digits which MUST be matched when the user begins entering digits for th
101. ignore execution state Execute the preset and set the execution state to off When an execution flag is set to on the associated preset cannot be executed Conversely when it is set to off the preset can be executed To query the current execution flag state for a preset use the PRESET command with the preset number and no other arguments Preset Control Masking In traditional room combining applications one preset is created and executed for each room configuration This can cause volume levels mute states and other channel configuration settings to reset for all room sections when a preset is executed In addition conferences in progress in unaffected room sections lose any custom settings and the participants hear unnecessary pops and clicks Console eliminates these shortcomings through Preset Control Masking which provides the following advantages e Automatic preset masking control when room dividers are wired to Control port B pins e Manual preset masking control via serial commands e Volume levels and mute states are reset only in sections that change Unaffected room sections do not lose custom settings e Participants in unaffected room sections do not hear pops and clicks To use preset control masking click on the Preset Mask Control Status B boxes located in the Site Pane while Console is in preset mode to set the pin states H High L Low required to trigger preset execution You can use a pin state or combinatio
102. label appears in Console One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Mic 1 az Podium Mic Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below For more information on using audio devices and channel objects see the Table of Contents for the following topics AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration 137 TELCO VOIP TX SETTINGS Telco VoIP Tx S
103. not selected in the matrix are grayed out making them unavailable for preset configuration changes In addition only output channels that have a cross point set in the matrix tab will be available in the preset When you click a check box in the Use in preset row the row becomes active and you can change its routing gating AEC PA Adapt reference and other settings All changes will be saved in the preset and executed when the preset is ran Channels that are not selected remain unchanged after preset execution ES Qa Genre a gt Ex gt RE Ha 3 1 TH SEEE Pers OEE a E E _ 2 In the example above Input 1 and Input 3 are selected for use in the preset and routed to Output 1 with gating enabled and a cross point level adjustment of zero Cross points are also set for Output 1 on the Process A and Fader 1 channels For AEC PA Adapt reference changes in a preset you can also select channels in the Use in preset row as shown below Note that only the channels selected and cross pointed in the matrix are available and that they are selected by default 194 4 a si KATA TITA TITI TI TIA TA Creating Presets Use the following procedure to create presets 1 Press the Preset Mode button on the Button Bar to put Console into preset mode 4 Select the channels you want to include in the preset using the Use in preset check boxes in the matrix 195 5 Setthe output channel cross points that
104. number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENSs for the calling area The REN for this product is listed above Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the companies inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by ClearOne Communications Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas 345 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE Conformity of the eguipment with the guidelines below is attested by the CE mark EC Declaration of Conformity
105. ode Configurabon Ste Data Defaut Uta Defaut W Notcomected BEDAS E Last Maco O The AEC PA Adapt Reference screen appears in the center pane of Console AEC PA Adapt reference configuration is explained in the following sections AEC References PA Adapt Reference Input 1 Input 1 Ebus Ref 1 Output 12 Input 2 Input 2 Output 1 Output 12 Input 3 Input 3 Virtual Ref 1 Output 12 Input 4 Input 4 Output 12 Speaker 162 Use the drop down lists to select an AEC PA Adapt reference for each input channel as required for your application As shown above you can select any of the following as a reference source in the AEC PA Adapt References section of the screen e Output channels 880 880T 880TA 840T TH20 SR 1212 SR 1212A e Expansion bus channels e Speaker outputs 880T 880TA 840T only e Virtual references 880 880T 840T TH20 VH20 SR 1212 SR 1212A a D A f Motril AA aa WA 03 Jirti tS IN E ff UA Neria rar Lat virtual AEU F A Ada p lt NCIC Virtual AEC PA Adapt References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers left and right providing audio combined audio video conferencing and audio video teleconferencing In these and other multiple output applications using virtual AEC PA Adapt references improves AEC performance Output Gain Tracking Virtual Ref 1 Output 7 Virtual Ref 2 Output a Virtual Ref 3 Mone
106. ohm e THD Noise lt 02 e Dynamic Range gt 105 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 db re 20dBu Y 20 kHz channel to channel Audio Mixer Parameters Number of Open Microphones e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Maximum of Mics e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate e Chairman Override e 96 Total Microphones per site e 6 Global Gating Groups e 4 Internal Gating Groups Matrix Mixing Parameters e 8 Microphone Analog Inputs e 4 Analog Line Inputs e 8 Analog Line Outputs e 4 Power Amplifier Outputs e 18 Expansion Bus in out e 8 Processing Blocks Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All Pass Low Pass Low shelving High shelving PEQ Notch Crossovers e Compressor e Delay up to 250 msec Power Amplifier Output Processing e Feedback Elimination w ring cancellation e 10 band EQ filter e 4 node filter bank for crossover e Delay Block e Compressor Limiter e Noise Gate for Hiss Control e Sound Masking Generator per channel e Adaptive Volume Control e Multi Channel Control Microphone Processing e 4 node filter bank e AGC ALC Power Amplifier e Channels 4 e Amplifier Output 35 Watt into 8 ohm 341 e Impedence Selectable 80hm 70V 100 V e THD Noise lt 2 1 3 Power e Crosstalk lt 68dB Expansion Bus e Connection CAT 5 RJ45 e Mix Minus Structure e 18 Audio Buses e 6 Gating Buses e 8 PA
107. otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Rs 150 O e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range 100 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Line Inputs 1 2 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Line Outputs 1 2 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 kQ e Nominal Level O dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e Category 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length between any two CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors 338 RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e CONVERGE Console Network e Remote Management amp Configuratio
108. press the Gate button located just below the Post Process meter Converge Console Board Room cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Ses FT ole Site Selection Board Room y Current Unit 30 Converge840T 03 Site View Tree View E 530 30 Converges40T 0 A ER Mic M amp Input 2 AR Input 3 Ss Input 4 Mp Line NG Input 5 Input 6 Bre E o Telco Rx Gp Telco RX 8 Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E wm Telco Tx Fata Telco TX E a Processing Q Process A BD Process B B Process C Q Process D HL Fader ML Fader 1 fie Fader 2 Mi Y tr 24 POSSE 019 es ClearOne Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database m Post Process gt m Post Gate amp Line Telco Rx 48 Output ES Telco Tx 0 Processing ia Fader Input 1 5 cated Non Gated Pre aec 0 Crosspoint Dutput 1 Output 1 y ndo zando e pido t nano 5indmo o o g pidyng o pdno o a TA ER E EA E EA a EEA P ini E E E ET 9 253909 O ssa9Wd g s5390 43pe Cape Output Level gt 20 Mode Configuration Site Data Default W Unit Data Default W Not Connected MMMM RRM site Board Room Unit Converge840T 03 Device ID 0 Use the radio buttons to select Auto Gating Manual On or Manual Off wh
109. serial port up to 115 200 bps Dual DB 25 control status GPIO General Purpose Input Output Ports Mini phoenix audio input output connectors color coded by channel type Differential inputs and outputs Feature Enhancements CONVERGE Pro feature enhancements include ClearOne s next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation up to eight discrete digital signal processors DSPs improve full duplex performance and remove echo in the most difficult acoustic environments New PTT Push to Talk microphone compatibility provides greater design and configuration flexibility e Advanced noise cancellation reduces background noise caused by fans HVAC systems and other relatively constant background noise sources Up to eight independent signal processing blocks each with 15 user configurable filters including all pass low pass high pass low shelving high shelving and parametric delay and compression ClearOne s unparalleled processing power enables you to use all of these features simultaneously in any combination allowing you to create optimized audio configurations for every environment and application Enhanced expansion bus E bus capabilities connect up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together and use up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines in a single CONVERGE Pro installation Increased distance between units up to 200 feet 60 96 meters Graphical user configurable routing matrix allows you to route any input channel to any
110. set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB The default is 6dB The default for NC is off Channel Property Configuration Telco RX pay LI a gt You can use noise cancellation on all types of input channels See NC Noise Cancellation for more information Telco Settings Tab Channel Property Configuration Telco RX NC Telco Settings Telco Meters Telco Settings Auto Answer Auto Disconnect C 4 Rings e Loop Drop Call Progress 3 Rings Call Progress 2 Rings Loop Drop Disabled C Off Telco Adaption Hook Flash 50 440 830 1220 1610 l 1 1 y 11 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 l Burst 250 ms E e Auto DTMF Level JV Audible Ringer Indication V Audible Hook Indication 212 008 Bi Ringer Cadence C Standard e Custom Min On Time h 00 msec Min Off Time eo msec y Settings available on the Telco Settings Tab include Auto Answer Set the number of rings before the unit connects an incoming call or disable the function The default is Disabled 126 Auto Disconnect Select the auto disconnect mode to control when the unit disconnects a connected call Modes include Loop Drop Call Progress Call Progress and Loop Drop and Off The default is Loop Drop Call Progress Not used in VolP Settings Ring Type Select from three different ring tones Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 To t
111. status are displayed in the LCD section of the dialer window 2 12 2007 1 47 17 PH idle AA ADS Y e e Placing and Ending Calls To place a call select a number from the Phonebook section of the dialer window or manually enter a number then press the ON OFF hook button You can also access the Phonebook by pressing the PHONEBOOK bution To end a call press the ON OFF hook button To redial a number press the REDIAL button Using Line Features Use the FLASH button to access Telco and PBX line features Muting Use the MUTE Tx and MUTE Rx buttons to mute the transmit and receive signals respectively when a call is in progress Renulling the Line During conference calls line conditions and other factors can cause divergence in the automatic Telephone Echo Cancellation TEC adaptation process If side tone occurs during a conference call press the RE NULL button to send a short burst of white noise over the line and initiate TEC readaptation Not supported in VoIP functionality NOTE Renulling the line sends a burst of white noise that will be audible on the far end of the telephone line For more information please see the Table of Contents for these related topics e Connect To A Site e Services Menu Overview e Telco VoIP Rx Settings e Telco VoIP Tx Settings e Phonebook e Telephone Echo Cancellation 212 PHONEBOOK The Phonebook allows you to store telephone numbers and make speed dial assignme
112. tape recorders IV sets radios computers and microwave ovens if placed in close proximity Class 2 Wiring IS REQUIRED for these devices Wiring and install should only be performed by qualified personnel For CONVERGE Pro products that include a telephone circuit Underwriters Laboratories UL requires these safety notifications Caution To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication Line Cord e When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following e Do not use this product near water for example near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak e Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual Do not dispose of batteries in a fire They may explode Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Use only in non tropical DONOT OPEN locations AVIS RISQUE DE CHOC WARNING TO THE LIGHTNING ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR THE EXCLAMATION Except 880TA and SR1 D4 2A FLASHANDARROW caution TO REDUCE THE POINT WITHIN THE PR
113. telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command CONVERGE Pro 8i An input only expansion box for the CONVERGE Pro platform The 8i delivers new economical configuration flexibility It can be added to 880 840T and TH20 systems for additional microphone and line inputs allowing customers to match the number of inputs and outputs required for specific conferencing and sound reinforcement installations Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Economical Mic Line only mixer for large configurations where additional output channels are not required Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt O 56dB in 7dB increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with S
114. text RXBSTEN Receive Boost Enable This command selects reports the receive boost status Command Form DEVICE RXBSTEN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text SERECHO Serial Echo This command selects reports the serial echo of the RS 232 port Command Form DEVICE SERECHO Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text NOTE The unit will return the updated state of the last selection in the same form as the command SFTYMUTE Safety Mute This command selects reports the state of the safety mute Safety mute holds all outputs in a muted state lt used for syncing to a site document to avoid feedback or blown speakers until the unit is in a settled state Command Form DEVICE SFTYMUTE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Channel 4 O off 1 on 2 toggle i Null to query in text 290 SIGGEN Signal Generator This command selects reports of the signal generator activation Command Form DEVICE SIGGEN Channel Group Type Amplitude Frequency Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels f Null to query in text Group Group 1 1 3 7 I M L Type Unsigned Integer 2 1 Pink Noise 2 White Noise 3 Tone Amplitude Signed Float
115. the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu To apply a preset object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics Configuration Mode LCD Presets Menu Controls and Connections Expansion Bus Overview Unit Tab Channel Tab Matrix Tab AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab Gating Tab Control Tab Macro Tab String Tab Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration 199 FILE MENU OVERVIEW File Menu allows youto use Site Files and Print Reports Accessing the File Menu In Console select File from the menu bar The File menu appears as shown below Soa FTC 2S M0BRa AA 41 9 Site Selection Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Stet M MIC Line Pres Gam _ AEC NC Mute Gate NOM Mute i 0 Output WA e IAA HO CONVERGE880TA 0 3 3 9 Site Vi Tree View ek iew TE 6 E N Microphone H DVD CD Et Video Codec le sms VCR H 6 Sound Card guy Amplifier an T Powers en i e Loudspeaker W PowerAmp 2 3 os W PowerAmp3 4 9 3 WA GEA E PowerAmp 4 NOM Mute i Gain 1 3 hs ddi Eb 0000046 0 0 ds Pres Gain NC Wos 4 81 RX ZITACTN lt XSICANDOVO Clo Clo coo CCC ClO C00 0 0 y y y S00000000000000050050502 le Je e
116. the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that output channel as shown below EN 5 be La ndo E o a gt o E Z papio r g ndo t papio 5 pipio e g papio e E papo ando oo duyana l Z duanag ra g duanag e t duang w1 oga awo dot 01 poto o u gol g g o oE Lot op a tol lt aigal m tgo wog ol aego zigol m pos pode o yo aL Tidy ol pote oy pode o y ssa Gi u 3 Q 5 a 5 it mm Pr rre om ch This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You can change the label name of the output channel in the Output entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to the output processing or fader channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture
117. to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Processing 4 as Process Channel Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below For more information on using AV devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration 151 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Drag amp Drop Configuration 152 FADER SETTINGS NOTE The CONVERGE Pro 880TA and CONVERGE SR 1212A do not have fader settings Fader Settings allow you to set configuration parameters for fader channels using the Channel tab Fader channels are internal sub bus channels similar to Processing channels that provide additional sub bus mixes to control volume settings within a site With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired fader channel on the Tree View tab i
118. to query in text FEN Feedback Elimination Nodes This command reports the total number of filter nodes fixed and dynamic currently being used for the feedback cancellation This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE FEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 Total Nodes ALWAYS NULL IN TEXT FER Feedback Elimination Node Reset This command resets both the fiked and dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator There is no guery associated with this command Command Form DEVICE FER lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 Zero 263 FERNG Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination Mode This command enables disables the Ring Elimination Mode on the feedback eliminator Command Form DEVICE FERNG lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved Zero 2 FES Feedback Elimination Setup Values Units See GroupAndChannels 23 J O Off 1 0n 2 Toggle Null to query in text This command reset the feedback eliminator and initiates an automatic training cycle When the automatic setup is complete the FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete command will be issued There is no query associated with this command C
119. to specify a domain name lt tls_cert_update index n gt 1 always update the tls filename and data 2 if the file name is not present then request the file data lt tls_private_cert index n gt file name of private key to load lt tls_local_cert index n gt file name of local certificate to load lt tls_ca_cert index n gt comma seperated list of up to 5 CA certificate filenames to be loaded lt rtcp_enable gt 1 enable 0 disable lt srtp_enable gt 1 enable 0 disable lt srtp_cipher gt 1 AES CM 128 2 FS 128 lt srtp_mac gt 1 HMAC_SHA1_80 2 HMAC_SHA1_32 lt strp_kdr gt set KDR offer range 0 24 lt srtcp_enable gt 1 enable O disable 354 The Dial Plan Configuration File The dial plan configuration file defines rules for gathering digits when dialing a phone number and also defines the mapping of the gathered digits to a specific target A sample dial plan is defined below lt C1DIALPLAN gt lt SYSCONFIG DIALTIME 120000 FIRST DIGIT WAIT 30000 INTER DIGIT WAIT 30000 TERMINATION DIGIT 3 gt lt DIGITMAP MATCH 911 MIN_DIGITS 3 MAX _DIGITS 3 STRIP FIRST DIGITS 0 ADD _PREFIX_ AFTER _STRIP DIAL STRING amp sipgateway com gt lt 911 Emergency gt lt DIGITMAP MATCH amp MIN_DIGITS 4 MAX _DIGITS 4 STRIP FIRST DIGITS 0 ADD_PREFIX_ AFTER _STRIP DIAL STRING amp sipproxy com gt lt Enterprise
120. types include e Mics Inputs Outputs Process Faders Telco VoIP Tx Telco VoIP Rx Pwr Amp After you select an option a list of all available channels of that type is displayed Use the Menu Dial to select the channel you want to configure and press the Select button The Channels display appears Channel Display The channel display is identical for every channel type with the exception of the channel ID and channel label which both vary depending on the channel selected As shown below the display includes a peak level meter a peak dB reading a gain level adjustment box and a mute selector 42 Setting Channel Gain and Mute The procedure for setting gain and mute is the same for all channel types Use the Menu Dial to highlight Gain or Mute Press the Select button Select the desired value using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to set the selected value Press the Esc button to return to the Channels menu ae SN NOTE When mute is set to on for a mic input channel the Microphone On LED for that channel illuminates red on the front panel For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Channels Menu LCD Settings Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Controls and Connections Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Output Settings Process Settings Fader Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Pwr Amp LCD SETTINGS MENU
121. want the sweep to continue in cycles NOTE Use auto sweep to test the frequency response of a room and speakers and to identify distortion or rattles produced by the speakers or speaker housings Auto sweep moves the frequency of the signal generator from a low frequency to a high frequency at the specified rate The Frequency slide control and readout reflect progress while the sweep is in progress Sweep range is 20Hz 20kHz increment range is 1Hz 20kHz and the rate range is 10ms 2000ms The default rate is 100ms 3 Press the Signal On button to generate the tone test signal or press the Auto Sweep button to initiate an auto Sweep System Checks enable you to test network connections telephone connections microphones and output channels for all units in a site Running system checks can help identify component failures within the system using the tests you select on the System Check Config tab described in the next section Debug Console Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Mashing Una HO ConvergeS20TA00 7 Test Result Report Network Telephone Ws 1 Maz Wee 3 ee 4 Ma 5 Mic 6 Me Y Mic E The test LEDs indicate test results as follows e Red Test fails e Yellow Test not enabled in System Check Config e Green Test passes 233 System Check Config Tab The System Check Config tab allows you to select and configure the diagnostic tests run on
122. want to customize the settings Do not change these settings unless directed to do so All Values are in milliseconds unless otherwise noted Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Timers e Use SIP Session Timers Refer Timeout 2000 sec a Retransmission Timer T1 500 me Retransmission Timer T2 4000 me Retransmission Timer T4 5000 ms Session Expires Timer 1500 sec Min SE Timer 1800 sec Register Timeout 3600 sec e Use SIP Session Times This box is checked by default Removing the check will disable all timers e Refer Timeout Number of ms the server waits for a reply e Retransmission Timers Refers to three Timers e T1 Sets the round trip time for a packet e T2 Sets the retransmit time from a non invite request REFER BYE etc and INVITE resonses e T4 Sets the total time a given message can be on the network Session Expires Timer Value is listed in Seconds Default time before the current session expires due to inactivity This value MUST be greater than the Min SE Timer value e Min SE Timer Value is listed in Seconds Minimum Session Timer Register Timeout Value is listed in Seconds The period of time a given device is registered on the network Network Provisioning Use local settings e Use DHCPTFTP i TETP from DHCP TFTP Server oooo WLAN VLAN Priority JO WLAN ID 1 1 4094 The Network tab allows the user to set basic network settings
123. with the meter will display real time level of fader group on the CONVERGE Pro 840T unit DID 0 223 The element selected determines the commands available in the Command drop down lists in the Command section of the screen Command Associated with Function Mute Type DID Command Macro Name Press la Converge 840T v fo v MACRO Gain 12dB Command Type DID Command Release 3 Converge 5407 0 Y lt NONE gt Y ammang Channel Group Mode Active State z vale Bor Jf Sim ITE vi vi vi ree Apply Status Type ommend Channel Group Mode Inactive State 3 Converge 8407 y a JTE Ar AF fo al Clear For example the commands available for the mute buttons include MACRO and MUTE When you select a command the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above For more information on the command editor see Command Editor in the Contro Tab topic Select the Type DID device ID and Command from the drop down lists After selecting a command and configuring its parameters press the Apply button to save the button programming To clear a command press the Clear button For some commands such as MACRO the Status section of the command editor becomes active Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State LED on and Inactive State LED off rows of the Status section Command Associated with Function User Defi
124. 006 a o 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 21 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Telephone Cable 12 P N 830 000 012 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 CONVERGE PRO si 12345678 ClearOne METER 30 10 4 0 4 8412 1 Converge Pro 8i P N 910 151 810 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Software 8 Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 Installation 8 Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 22 CONVERGE PRO TH20 1 Converge Pro TH20 P N 910 151 820 Tos 1 Software amp Documentation CD 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 800 151 881 P N 680 000 001 O 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Black P N 673 017 006 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Green P N 673 017 016 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006
125. 007 1223000 P User Intisted Disconnect 4 2 2007 1 33 39 PH Logan altempt faded 411 2007 UZA Logn attempt laded 512007 23 21 PH 1130 PHONEBOOFADD 1 Tezi ji To print the event log press the Print button To clear the event log press the Clear button and answer Yes to the confirmation dialog that appears For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Services Menu e Event Scheduler 220 WEB BUILDER Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management and mixing features for access through a web portal integrated into the firmware The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft s Internet Explorer requires IE version 5 5 or later and Sun Microsystems Java Runtime Environment version 6 0 or higher User Console allows you to configure basic call functions including on off hook redial volume and mute for up to two units Control Console allows you to perform basic channel and mixing configuration tasks for all units Accessing Web Builder To access the web builder select Web Builder from the Services menu or press the Web Builder a button on the Console Button Bar AZ Converge Console 4 0 30 Untitled pla File View Add Connect Services Help ZOW FTE 33 PORSRRaes Ou 2 n A ClearOne Site Selection Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database
126. 0T TH20 VH20 Mic Array X X X X X X X MLINE MMAX X X X X X X X MODEL X X X X X X X X X MTRX X X X X X X X X X X MTRXCLEAR X X X X X X X X X MTRXLVL X X X X X X X X X MTRXTYPE X X X X X X X MULTILNEN X MULTILNSTAT X MUTE X X X X X X X X X X NAME X X X X X X X X X X NCD X X X X X X X X NCSEL X X X X X X X X NLP X X X X X X NOM X X X X X X X X NTPSRV X X X X X X X X X NULL X X X X X OFFA X X X X X X X PAA X X X X X X X PACEN X X PAENERGY X X PAEQEN X X PAEQRST X X PAEQSET X X PAFLT X X PAIMPED X X PALEN X X PALT X X PANGAT X X PANGEN X X PANGF X X PANGM X X PANGT X X PAPOL X X PARST X X PASME X X PASML X X PASSM X X PASMT X X PATO X X PBDIAL X X X X X PHONEBOOKADD X X X X X PHONEBOOKCNT X X X X X PHONEBOOKDEL X X X X X PHONEBOOKREAD X X X X X 312 COMMAND NAME PP PRESET PRGSTRING PROKYSTAT PTTTHRESHOLD PUSHTOTALK RAMP REDIAL REFSEL REFSET RESET RING RINGEREN RINGERLVL RINGERSEL RINGERTEST RINGMOD RINGOFF RINGON RKBOOST RKBSTEN SERECHO SFTYMUTE SIGGEN SIGGENEN SIGGENSWEEP SIGTOUT SLVL SMTPSRV SNMPMNGRIP SNMPMNGRPORT SNMPREADCOMM SNMPWRITECOMM SPEEDDIAL STRING SYSCHECKS SYSRESULT TAMODE TE TELCOLVLCTRL TELOVER TIMELOCALE TOUT TRANSCANCEL TRANSCOMPLETE 313 DEVICE do Pro ge ge Pro 8i 880TA 880T 840T TH20 VH20 X X X X X X DEVICE Beam Pro Pro Pro Pro Pro COMMAND NAME Pro 8i 880TA forming 880 880T 840T
127. 0rQ 10 Command Form DEVICE FEB lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 Values Units See GroupAndChannels 23 J 0 5 1 10 Default O 5 Null to query in text FEDR Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node Reset This command will reset only the dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE FEDR lt CHANNEL gt lt GROUP gt Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved Zero 2 FEF Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter Values Units See GroupAndChannels 23 J Value 0 16 Nodes Null to query in text This command sets the number of fixed filter to use in the feedback eliminator The fixed filters number will be used during the initialization phase when gain is increased until feedback occurs A fixed filter will be set at the feedback point during the initialization Command Form DEVICE FEF lt CHANNEL gt lt GROUP gt VALUE Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved Unsigned Short 2 Values Units See GroupAndChannels 23 J Zero FEG Feedback Elimination Auto Gain Max This command sets the target gain for auto setup in feedback cancellation Command Form DEVICE FEG lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved Unsigned Short 2 262 Values Units See GroupA
128. 1212A Indicates amplifier faults 1 4 indicates clip 5 indicates thermal overload 6 indicates fault gt 7 indicates fan on off e Telco VoIP Tx Rx Indicators 840T TH20 VH20 Indicates transmit and receive activity during Telco VoIP calls Amplifier On Off Switch 880TA SR1212A Turns power to the amplifiers on or off NOTE 880TA SR1212A This does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains To disconnect unit power from the mains disconnect the unit s power cord from the mains socket To reconnect power plug the unit s power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines Telco On Off Button amp LEDs This button connects disconnects the communications line attached to the device while the LEDs indicate the connection status of the attached line 8401 TH20 VH20 VoIP only 8801 88014 30 CONVERGE Pro Rear Panels CONVERGE Pro 880 Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz LINK OUT VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz LINK OUT 10 CONVERGE Pro 840T Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz LINK OUT 10 CONVERGE Pro 8i Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz mig LINK OUT 31 12 CONVERGE Pro TH20 Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz O 9000000000000 y 000000000000 TELCO AAA LINE SET A RS 232 CONTROL STATUS L B L LINE
129. 1212A is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound reinforcement and room combining applications In addition to improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration the SR1212 offers industry leading expansion capabilities to accommodate virtually any size venue Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt O 56dB in 7dB increments Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual gating groups 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing prese
130. 18 to 28 85 Bandwidth Available for Notch and PEQ filters only Use the Bandwidth selector box to set the difference between the upper and lower points of a filter s audio passband Bandwidth is the inverse of Q and the two parameters are linked Hence changing the bandwidth value also changes the Q value The range is 05 to 5 00 octaves Bypass Available for all filter types Use the Bypass checkbox to bypass the currently selected active filter This feature allows you to configure different filters and save them for future use without having to recreate them 104 Press the Phase button to display the phase relationship of the graphed freguency response appears as a grey line on the active filter graph The phase scale appears on the right vertical axis of the graph Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Fitter AGCIALC Gating Active Filter Type Frequency Gain Bandwidth Q PEQ 13997 85 2 43 28 85 0 05 Bypass i Remaining a Table View Bypass All Remove Filter 1 Press the Bypass All button to bypass all filters for the selected input channel The filters are grayed out in graph view and the bypass status is shown as on in table view Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Filter AGCIALC Gating Active Filter Type Frequency Bandwidth Gain Q w PEQ w 3997 85 211243 0885 100 Y zi i l Remaining i Table View Bypass All Remove Filter
131. 18dB in 1dB steps The default value is 6dB Target Level Slider Target Level RMS sets dB level for AGC to maintain Target Level range is from 30 to 20dB in 1dB steps The default target level is OdB Active Gain Meter The Active Gain Meter displays the gain adjustment being applied to the channel by AGC Response Time Slider Response Time sets the amount of time in milliseconds over which the level is averaged before AGC is activated or deactivated Threshold Slider Threshold sets the dB level at which AGC engages The Threshold is set using an RMS Root Mean Square level which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time NOTE Setting the Threshold above the background noise level will prevent AGC from amplifying background noise For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Channel Tab Overview e AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation e NC Noise Cancellation e Mic Gating e Filters e Line Input Settings e Mic Input Settings 108 MIC GATING The Gate button on the Channel tab enables you to configure gating control for individual Mic Input channels and assign them to Gating Groups There are two types of gating for Mic Input channels Auto Gating and Manual Gating For more information about Gating Groups see the Gating Tab section With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and
132. 2 FEDR Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node Reset 252 FE Feedback Elimination Enable 252 FEF Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter 252 FEG Feedback Elimination Auto Gain Max 252 FEGL Feedback Elimination Gain Level 253 FELD Feedback Elimination Lock Depth 253 FEM Feedback Elimination Mode 253 FEN Feedback EliminationNodes 253 FER Feedback Elimination Node Reset 253 FERNG Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination Mode 254 FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete 254 FES Feedback Elimination Setup 254 FILTER Filter Adjust 255 FILTSEL Filter Select 255 FLOW Flow Control u 256 FMP First Mic Priority Mode 256 GAIN
133. 2 a5 m gt Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default MM Not Connected MMM MMMM Site Board Room Unit Converges40T 03 Device ID 0 The center pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls for the selected mic input channel as shown above Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path The meters and configuration controls for mic input channels are explained in the following sections wic 1 Input 1 i Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced PPW eee The PPWR Phantom Power button toggles phantom power on and off Phantom power is an auxiliary power source used to power certain types of microphones Phantom power voltage is 24VDC The default is On 113 Pre Gain The Pre Gain meter displays the mic input level before gain adjustments Meter range is determined by the Coarse Gain Slider in the Gain section of the screen as described below NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters The Coarse and Fine gain sliders are used to match the level settings between mic inputs and to adjust the volume level for a given mic input channel The Min Max fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings and to report min max gain settings via serial comma
134. 293 XPBDIAL Dial a PB Entry by Name 293 XREDIAL Dial the last number again 293 XRINGEREN Audible Ring Enable 293 XRINGERLVL Audible Ring Level 294 XRINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection 294 XRINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test 294 XRING Ring Indication 293 XSLVL Speech Level Control 294 XSPEEDDIAL Speed Dialing 294 XTE Telco Enable wao 295 246 SERIAL COMMANDS Serial commands are shown in bold followed by the command form and argument details AA Auto Answer Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of auto answer Command Form DEVICE AA lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text AAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode This command selects reports the setting of adaptive ambient Command Form DEVICE AAMB lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units
135. 32 port e DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H e 17 29 XxX 10 25 xX 1 75 e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 820 Converge Pro TH20 Telephone Hybrid for Converge Pro 880 880T 840T 8i and Converge SR 1212 CONVERGE PRO VH20 VolP Features e VoIP Features e SIP V2 RFC 3261 and compananion RFC s e Codec Support G 711u gt G 711A G 722 wideband audio G 729 723 1 Security Features e Full Security Capability with TLS AES SRTP Noise Cancellation e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Audio Performance e Conditions Unless
136. 70 100V speaker lead connects to amplifiers channel 1 70V or 100V terminals Channel 1 GND or Common speaker lead connects to amplifiers channel 1 GND terminal Repeat this procedure for each channel v F SN ees QS ME ian Poa Ww Y S ME ian A ING A ING A CHNL 1 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 CHNL 1 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND INARADBAAAAAA ADO LAANA II a a a a f f o a o a a GND 100V 34 Refer to the following diagrams and descriptions for Beamforming Microphone Array controls and connectors Beamforming Microphone Array Controls The Beamforming Microphone Array is controlled mainly through CONVERGE Console except for mute buttons on the device that toggle the microphone array mute on and off The mute buttons illuminate red when the microphone array is muted and blue when the array is unmuted This action can also be software controlled through CONVERGE Console Mute Buttons Beamforming Microphone Array Connections LINKIN and LINK OUT E bus Connections For Future USB Audio Input Support l Power Over Device ID Ethernet Selector Connector 1 Link In and Link Out Ports Two RJ 45 E bus expansion bus connectors are used to connect multiple CONVERGE Pro units or to daisy chain Beamforming Microphone arrays together to create a site 3 arrays per CONVERGE Pro unit are supported and u
137. AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MA M MIC Line Pres i AEC NC Mute Gate NOM Mute i 0 Output Current Unit Inti Ml 9 9 m1 E HO CONVERGE880TA 0 imputa m2 2 Input 3 3 Site View Tree View Input4 all O Input 5 ca Input 6 ES Input 7 i E N Microphone Ewe DVD CD wit Video Codec Hams VCR H E Sound Card am Amplifier i e Loudspeaker iii atam L Jo P T R i RRRRRREE Pres Gain Mute NC mps i Audio RX 0 ZITACTN lt XSICANDODO 7 i gt III it 000 000 m E ry 17 ee Converge 880TA TO m MOODP ZIMA UNI Muu Mode Configuration Site Default W Unit Data Default MN NotConnected Ua LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic In Console click View on the menu bar The View menu appears as shown below EEN Add Connect Mod Site View e Unit View Channel View Matrix View AEC Reference Builder Macro Builder Gating Builder Control Builder Command Strings Event Scheduler Database Builder SIP Properties A bullet indicates the view currently displayed in Console 203 View Menu Options Options available on the View menu include Site View Unit View Channel View Matrix View AEC Reference Builder Macro Builder Gating Builder Control Builder Command Strings Event Scheduler Database Builder 204 ADD MENU The Add Menu allows you to
138. ATION PROGRAMMER S INTERFACE TYPE AND DEVICE IDS CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 F VH20 E 0 F 840T 3 0 B 8i A 0 B 8801 D 0 B 880TA H 0 B Sa 212 G 0 B SR 1212A 0 B Beamforming N 0 F Mic Array CONVENTIONS This guide uses the following typographic conventions to describe CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro serial command syntax lt X gt Parameters enclosed in lt gt indicate a mandatory parameter X Parameters enclosed in indicate an optional parameter 1 8 Parameters separated by a indicate a range of allowable values 4 7 9 Parameters separated by a indicate a list of allowable values EREF Words in UPPERCASE bold indicate command text Device Indicates the device type and device number on the Expansion Bus lt is composed of a device type character and a device ID character COMMAND FORM DESCRIPTION The structure of serial commands is as follows lt Device Type gt lt Device ID gt lt Command gt Values lt Carriage Return gt indicates the start of a command line the Carriage Return terminates a command NOTE Serial commands can be either UPPERCASE or lowercase Return values are always in UPPERCASE In order for a command to be recognized by the RS 232 serial port the command must be terminated by a carriage return For example a command to disable mute for Mic Input 5 on a CONVERGE Pro 880 with a Device ID of 2 would ha
139. AamoNs 4129 ClearOne Site Selection Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Sitet Wine Pres Gain NOM Mute i Current Unit a eo 1 9 9 H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 20 E Microphone 3 Esj alls DVD CD Site View Tree View i g eae 000004 aaa Amplifier Loudspeaker Pres Gain Mute NC anc 4 9 1 RX Converge 880TA Mode Configuration Site Data Default Unit Data Default Mot Connected ANUAI Last Macro 0 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic The Console window consists of the components described in the following sections 50 Menu Bar Menus available on the Menu Bar include e Site File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Opens the context sensitive help system provides software and firmware version information Button Bar Zoe iia au au amas da A ClearOne Controls on the Button Bar include Create Site Open Site Save Site Connect Disconnect Configuration Mode Preset Mode Execute Preset Run Macro Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Debug Console Web Builder E U Oe PB Rae Rada Firmware Loader VH20 Unit Properties This button is only active when Console is connected to a VH20 Safety Mute Toggles Safety Mute on and off Safety Mute holds all outputs in a muted state Signal Generator LED Flashes green when the signal generator for any unit
140. BEL Label This selects reports the label of the specific channel or the unit Command Form DEVICE LABEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt In Out Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 123 456 78 12 lo 1416 14 20 20 20 A L3 0 M G FE L A Fs 6 TR By Z D U V Input Output to Unsigned Integer 2 Groups all but 6 0 Matrix Groups 6 O output 1 input Label String 20 1 20 characters CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text LCDCONTRAST LCD Contrast This command selects reports the LCD Contrast Setting Command Form DEVICE LCDCONTRAST Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 O lightest 63 darkest Null to query in text 269 LMO Last Mic On Mode This command selects reports last Mic on mode Command Form DEVICE LMO lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 G Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 8 Mic 1 8 to be the last mic OxFF in text Last Mic to stay on Null to query in text LOCALNUM Local Number This command sets or reports back the current value of the local number Command Form DEVICE LOCALNUM lt Channel gt Number Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 Chars of 0 9 4 y Null to query in text LOCBLDG Loc
141. Beam N BEEN ae a fom ch om me 880 880T 840T TH20 VH20 Mic Array AA X X X X AAMB X X X X X X X AARINGS X X X X ACONN X X X X ACONNLVL X X X X AD X X X X ADCLIP X X X X X X X X X ADPRESENT X X X X X X X X X AEC X X X X X AGC X X X X X X X X X AGCSET X X X X X X X X X AMBLVL X X X X X X X AMXDUET X X X X X X X X X AV X X X X X X X X AVG X X AVR X X AVRT X X AVT X X AUDIOMASTER X X X X X X X X X BAUD X X X X X X X X X BFLED X BFMODE X BFMUTEMACRO X BFZONE X CALLDUR X X X X CALLERID X X X X CALLSTATUS X CGROUP X X X X X X X CHAIRO X X X X X X X CLEAREFFECT X X X X CLOCK X X X X X X X X X COMPDLY X X COMPDLYEN X X COMPRESS X X X X X X X COMPSEL X X X X X X X CONFCANCEL x CONFCOMPLETE X CONFSTART X COUNTRY X X X X X CTRLMASTER X X X X X X X X X 309 DEVICE Beam ae ajae a a ee a nm 880T 840T TH20 VH20 Mic Array DECAY X X X X X X X DEFAULT X X X X X X X X X X DELAY X X X X X X X DELAYSEL X X X X X X X DEVICENAME X X X X X X X X X DEVICESUBTYPE X X X X X X X X X DEVICETYPE X X X X X X X X X DFLTM X X X X X X X DIAG X X DIAL X X X X X DID X X X X X X X X X X DTMFLVL X X X X DTONELVL X X X X DUPDATE X X X X X X X X DVER X X X X X X X X X X ENETADDR X X X X X X X X X ENETDHCP X X X X X X X X X ENETDNS X X X X X X X X X ENETDNSA X X X X X X X X X ENETDNSA2 X X X X X X X X X ENETDOMAIN X X X X X X X X X ENETGATE X X X X X X X X X ENETQOSVAL X ENETQOSDSCP X ENETSUBN X X X X X X X X X ENETVLAN X ENETVLA
142. CTP NEGOTIATE y CNM VAD Y DTMF Relay VAD Noise Matching None Payload 97 Level 96 127 Codec Priority G 722 64 Kbps G 722 56 Kbps yA xl Select a codec on the left and press the updown arrow 6 7231 5 3 Kbps to change its priority W sp Proxy 1 Registration Disabled o E W SIP Proxy 2 Registration Disabled _ Cancel e RTP RTCP e RTP Base Port Port set to transmit RTP data e RTCP Enable Check this box to enable RTCP e QOS Quality of Service QOS is a method in which certain high demand VoIP Video etc applications are allowed to maintain a minimum standard of service across a network to avoid unacceptable delays dropouts or service interruptions during their communications by determining which packets have priority over others e Description Precedence This drop down consists of several options e Express Forwarding Default Best Effort e Class 1 e Class 2 e Class 3 e Class 4 e Control 6 e Control 7 e Custom Selecting this option enables Custom Current DSCP Value Adjust values to fit QOS needs 72 e SRTP Enabling this setting activates encryption on the VH20 e Cipher This drop down selects the cipher to be used e Null e AES CTR e AES F8 e MAC e Null e HMAC SHA180 e HMAC SHA132 e KDR Offer 0 24 e SRCTP e Negotiate e Enable e Disable e VAD Enables comfort noise which simulates background noise found in analog phon
143. ClearOne A CONVERGE PRO 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i TH20 VH20 CONVERGE SR 1212 SR 1212TA Beamforming Microphone Array Professional Conferencing Systems INSTALLATION amp OPERATION MANUAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT Telephone 1 800 283 5936 1 801 974 3760 Fax 1 801 977 0087 Email tech support clearone com Web www clearone com CONVERGE PRO 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i TH20 VH20 CONVERGE SR 1212 SR 1212TA Beamforming Microphone Array INSTALLATION amp OPERATION MANUAL CLEARONE PART NO 800 151 880 REVISION 4 2 March 2013 2013 ClearOne All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice Other product names may be registered trademarks of their respective owners who do not necessarily endorse ClearOne or ClearOne s products in the United States and or other countries ClearOne Document 800 151 880 Revision 4 2 March 28 2011 Adobe Flash Copyright and Trademark Notice Adobe Flash Player Copyright 1996 2013 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved Adobe and Flash are either trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States and or other countries TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 CONVERGE Pro Product Family Overview ooo o ooooooo mnanaa a aa 1 Mpornant sae ION AA oe Rs as AA AAA 5 Customer Service and Support mamanananawann 16 Waranty iNO MaA ra 80 eh ak eae ee ae be e
144. DEVICE DELAY lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 541P Value Unsigned Float 2 0 00 250 00 Null to query in text DELAYSEL Delay Select This command selects reports the delay activation of an assignable processing channel Command Form DEVICE DELAYSEL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 1P Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text DEVICENAME Argument Identification Label This selects reports the Device Argument identification label of the specific channel COMMAND FORM DEVICE DEVICENAME lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 7 l O M L Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Label String 12 1 12 characters CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text 257 Units Units Units DEVICESUBTYPE Sets the Subtype of a Connected Device This command enables disables or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output Command Form DEVICE DEVICESUBTYPE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 211 0 M 0 Value Unsigned Integer 2 NULL to query in text DEVICETYPE Sets the Type of a Connected Device This command enables disabl
145. E J 1 k ii P TE p E EEES o r ri KI KILI LE pa Da pa DD Pm de Converge A toda Confic A Aa She D e i Default E Unit D 1 Default a Hot Co naded Last Oo Last Pres ra Ste Ont Unk GE may AO Der tp a a a Using Drag and Drop Configuration Drag and drop configuration is a three step process for all object types 1 Create an object 2 Store it in the Database 3 Drag the object from the Objects pane onto a channel or screen area as appropriate for the object type The following sections describe creating and applying objects in Console 187 With the exception of custom AV devices which can only be created using the Database Tab all objects can be created by right clicking on a screen and using the shortcut menu that appears For example to capture the currently displayed control pin programming as a control port object right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu see below Control Status Pin Select Control Status A xport as Object Clear All Control Port Ja gt Selected Pin hi Control Pin Control Pin State Active Low Command 30 MUTE 1R 1 Inactive High Command 30 MUTE 1RO Command Editor Command Description Argument Description Sets the Mute for an Input Output Processor Channel Group F Faders
146. E C TCP Listen Port koo E TLS Listen Port 5061 S 061 E Private Key Browse Local Cert Browse _ Export Certificates _ Export Certificates W SIP Proxy 1 Registration Disabled o EA W SIP Proxy 2 Registration Disabled ok Cancel Five tabs contain most of the configuration settings required to customize the CONVERGE Pro VH20 Do not modify these settings unless you have in depth knowledge of VolP SIP and Network functions setup and 69 protocols Also be sure you have sufficient network privileges and access reguired to make reguired changes to your network during setup lf you are unsure contact your Network Administrator before proceeding Proxy The Proxy tab consists of 6 sections Phone Number Local Phone Number Display Name Hostname CONVERGEVH20 0 Proxy 1 Proxy 2 J SIP Authentication Authorization User actin Authorization Password clearane Y SIP Proxy Registration User Domain Detaut Proxy IP Address MEL Proxy Port 5060 za Outbound Proxy Proxy IP Address URL Proxy Port soso SIP Transport f UDP Listen Port 5060 powo E E TEP Listen Port poo E TLS Listen Port 061 Private Key Browse Local Cert Browse _ Export Certificates Certificates Phone Number e Displays the local phone number assigned to the specific unit This number is usually obtained t
147. E bus All models support up to 255 macros with an average of 150 command lines each In the unlikely event that you exceed Console s memory capacity a warning appears indicating the command line at which memory is exceeded To access macros press the Macro Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Board Room cvg DER Fie view Add Connect Modes Services Help Aal Te cf EAN ET Oa n A ClearOne Site Selection Unt Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Mood Ram AA Macros Objects Current Unit 30 Converge8407 03 Macro Selection Macro Macro Description hi v Clear Change Name Command Editor Site View Tree View Command Description Argument Description No command specified Not valid RH Telco R lla ih at Type DID Command RH Telco RX ie vil y lt onE gt Output 1 Output 2 lt NONE gt Add Insert Delete Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E Telco Tx Ub Telco TX Processing Q Process A B Process B D Process a Process D fh Fader fie Fader 1 ML Fader 2 Mi Ron Record MT Eo Mode Configuration Site Data Good E Unit Data Good fi Connected AAA AAA Site Board Room Unit Converges40T 03 Device ID 0 Macro Command List Line Number Line Type ID Command There are two ways to cre
148. EL EE RE app Hel njej afol Output 1 To save the object right click anywhere in the signal flow diagram and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu Enter a descriptive object name in the Export Object dialog and click Export to save the object to the database Export Object Export Quiput 1 as High Gain Dutpud You can now drag and drop the object onto any channel of the same type to instantly apply the object s configuration settings to the channel 190 NOTE To apply the current channel settings to ALL channels of the same type without saving an object in the database select Apply to all from the shortcut menu when right clicking on the signal flow diagram Menu option not available for Telco VolP Rx or Telco VoIP Tx channels Gail To view detailed information about an AV device s configuration settings or to create a custom AV device use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab Advanced Configuration Objects For advanced configuration tasks Console allows you to create and apply Matrix Objects Control Objects Macro Objects and Preset Objects as described in the following sections Matrix Objects Matrix Objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly re configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configura
149. ERGESSOTABI rom Exp Q pisq E rom Exp R o Exp BE 10 CONVERGESRA 4D From Exp S S Joao Exp 5 BF NO BF MIC 00 From Exp U U TEPU From Exp Y V Job PoPa x te rom Exp x i rom Exp NI O EXP E o EXp OEXD J To Exp J K To Exp K L Tebot Exp L M xp N To Exp N oo x Del Comp Mute Processing TX Process 4 Process B Process Process D F Fader RX Fader 1 Fader 2 Fader 3 Fader 4 RON DODF Z2ECACTN lt KSECOCAMADVO Converge 840T Mode Configuratior Site Data Default lll Unit Data Default fll Not Connected MMMM MMMM LastMacro O LastPreset 0 ite Sitel Unit CONVERGES40T 98 De y NOTE The Unit tab shown above is for an 880AT with the Tree View tab selected in the Site Pane All units that are connected and belong to the site also appear in the Tree View tab The Unit tab display for other CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit types will vary from that shown depending on the number of inputs outputs Telco connections etc for the model selected The graphical elements shown in the block diagram of the Unit tab provide shortcuts to the basic configuration settings for each channel type For full configuration control of a channel use the Channel tab For all channels in the Unit tab display the blue Pres Audio Presence LEDs illuminate to indicate the presence of audio on the channel For Mic Inout Channels the green Gate LEDs illuminate to indicate
150. ETDOMAIN Ethernet Domain Argument This command selects reports the Domain Argument of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDOMAIN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 64 Null to query in text ENETGATE Ethernet Default Gateway Address This command selects reports the default gateway of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETGATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETSUBN Ethernet Subnet Mask This command selects reports the Subnet mask of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETSUBN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text 260 ENETVLAN Enable VLAN Tagging This command enables disables VLAN tagging Valid on VH20 ONLY Change requires reboot to become effective Command Form DEVICE ENETVLAN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned 4 O VLAN Tagging Off Integer 1 VLAN Tagging On 2 Toggle Null to query in text ENETVLANID VLAN ID This command set reports VLAN Tag ID for all Ethernet packets including SIP Valid on VH20 ONLY Change requires reboot to become effective Command Form DEVICE ENETVLANID Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned 4 1 4094 f Integer Null to query in text ENETVLANPRI VLAN Priority This command sets reports the VLAN Tagging Priority for all IP packets Va
151. EVENT FIRE OR HEADIWTHINTHE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Nia a ELECTRICAL SHOCK WARNING SIGN ORBACK NO Ms VER ALERTING YOU OF HAZARD DO NOT ALERTINGYOUOF SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE IMPORTANT DANGEROUS REFER SERVICING TO INSTRUCTIONS EXPOSE THIS VOLTAGE INSIDE ACCOMPANYING U titud i QUALIFIED SERVICE Aa dah se only at altitudes o PRODUCT TO RAIN THE PRODUCT PERSONNEL 2000 meters or less OR MOISTURE SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM BACK OF PRODUCT Save These Instructions CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS CONVERGE Pro 880TA The 880TA stands as the new flagship of the CONVERGE Pro line Re designed re tooled with added power and functionality the 880TA also provides industry leading expansion capabilities Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel gt ClearEffect wide band emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Custom ring cadence detect Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Enhanced Feedback Canceller Multichannel Control on each amplifier Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Im
152. Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the dB setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity The cancellation depth can also be set using the arrow buttons or by entering a value directly in the field The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB The default is 6dB The default NC is Off For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Channel Tab Overview e AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation e AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control e Mic Gating e Filters e Mic Input Settings e Telco VoIP Rx Settings TH20 VH20 840T 880 880T 880TA 101 FILTERS Filters enable you to shape the audio signals from Mic Input channels for improved audio guality There are four configurable filter types available All Pass High Pass Low Pass e Notch PEQ Parametric Equalizer With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the Filter button located just below the Post Gain meter Converge Console Board Room cvg SEE File View Add Connect Modes Services Help EOE FTO Ce ZS ENESENN On Ms ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Y A Bai Post Process Current Unit 30 Conver
153. Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn e Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley e Compressor e Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks e Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration e Input Gain Adjust e Mic or Line Level e Phantom Power on off e Echo Cancellation on off e Noise Cancellation on off e Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ e Mute on off e Chairman Override on off 329 e AGC on off e Automatic Level Control on off e Auto Gate Manual gate e Adaptive Ambient on off e Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to O dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment e Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu e Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation e Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e vNominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 O e Nominal Level O dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Amplifier Output e Binding Post Connection e 10 Watts 4 Q Impedance e THD Noise lt 0 5 Telco Line e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extens
154. G Location Building 260 LOCCITY Location City 260 LOCCNTRY Location COUNtry mmeaao 260 LOCCOMP Location Company waaaanoamwaaaa 261 LOCREGION Location Region 261 LOCROOM Location RoOom 261 LOCSITENAME Location Site Argument 261 LOCSTATE Location State 261 LOGMASK Device Log Mask ouuu aaau 262 SE A 262 LVLREPORTEN Level ReportEnable 263 LVLREPORT Level Report 00 00 00 cee teen 262 MACRO Macro Execution Reporting 263 MANUFACTURER Manufacturer Identification Label 263 MAX Maximum Gain Setting 263 MCGAIN Multi Channel Gain 264 MCMINMAX Multi Channel Min and max Gain Setting 264 MC Mulfti ChannelMode una 264 MCMUTE Multi Channel Min and Max Gain Setting
155. Isb to H gt Reserved XXXX XXXX gt Faders 1 Isb to 4 msb gt Reserved XXXX XXXX gt Telco RX gt Telco TX sis gt Reserved AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of Acoustic Echo Canceller Command Form DEVICE AEC lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Integer 2 AGC Automatic Gain Control This command selects reports the setting of automatic gain control Command Form DEVICE AGC lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Integer 2 249 Values Units See Groups and Channels 3 M O Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text Values Units See Groups and Channels 1 3 7 M D 0 Off T On i 2 Toggle Null to query in text AGCSET Automatic Gain Control Adjust This command selects reports the settings of the Automatic Gain Control Command Form DEVICE AGCSET lt Channel gt lt Group gt Threshold Target Attack Gain Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 3 7 1 ML Threshold Signed Integer 1 50 0 Null to query in text os Target Signed Integer 1 30 20 dB Response Unsigned Float 2 0 10 10 00 S Time Gain Unsigned Float 2 0 00 18 00 dB AMBLVL Ambient Level Adjust This command selec
156. MP read community string Command Form DEVICE SNMPREADCOMM Value Argument Type Size Values Value String 30 Read Community validation string GET data Null to query in text defaults to public SNMPWRITECOMM SNMP Write Community String This command selects reports the SNMP Write Community String Command Form DEVICE SNMPWRITECOMM Value Argument Type Size Values Value string 30 Write Community validation string SET data Null to query in text Default private 292 Units Units Units Units Units SPEEDDIAL Speed Dial a Number This command dials a speed dial number Command Form DEVICE SPEEDDIAL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 20 Null to query in text STRING String Execution This command sends the specified string out the serial port Command Form DEVICE STRING ID Argument Type Size Values Units ID Unsigned Integer 4 0 7 Null to query last string in text SYSCHECKS System Checks Initiates the system checks There is no query for this command The System Check integer bits determine which tests are run Each bit set generates a separate SYSRESULT response COMMAND FORM DEVICE SYSCHECKS lt System Check gt Argument Type Size Values System Hexadecimal 4 1514131211 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Check Integer E Network Telephone Mic 1 Mi
157. MTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command 10 CONVERGE Pro TH20 The successor to the industry leading XAP TH2 the TH20 enables conference call functionality for CONVERGE Pro installations through the addition of a telephone interface The TH20 expansion bus allows you to link up to 16 TH20 units together for industry leading conferencing capability lt also adds t
158. Manufacturer s Name ClearOne Communications Manufacturer s Address Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 salt Lake City Utah 84116 U S A EU Representative Name EU Representative Address ClearOne Communications Ltd Atlantic House Imperial Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OTD United Kingdom Model Converge Pro 880 81 880T 840T TH20 VH20 Converge SR 1212 Product Standard s to which Conformity of the Council Directive s is declared EMC 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive EN 55022 2006 Emissions EN 61000 3 2 2004 EN 61000 3 3 2002 EN 55024 1998 Immunity A1 A2 EN 61000 4 2 2001 EN 61000 4 3 2006 EN 61000 4 4 2004 EN 61000 4 5 2005 EN 61000 4 6 2006 EN 61000 4 8 1993 EN 61000 4 11 2004 Information technology equipment Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Part 3 Limits Section 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions Section 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and methods of measurements Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Radiated RF Immunity Electrical Fast Transients Immunity Lightning Surge Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions Safety
159. Mic Sources Only 5 Pre AEC Mic Sources Only 6 Routing Prohibited Cross point is off and may not be turned on Null to query in text MTRXCLEAR Clear Matrix Clears the ENTIRE matrix for the unit There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE MTRXCLEAR No Arguments MTRXLVL Matrix Attenuation Adjust This command selects reports the matrix level at the cross point Command Form DEVICE MTRXLVL lt Src Ch gt lt Src Gp gt lt Dest Ch gt lt Dest Gp gt Value A R Argument Type Size Values Units Source Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Source Group Group 1 1 3 By 6 A 121725 2 f M PE LRERK UV Destination Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Destination Group Group 1 2 Os Oy 12 16 25 26 i md OPER TKD Value Signed Float 4 99 00 99 00 Null to query in text ER Absol Rel 0 A Absolute R Relative a Null Relative NOTE Values indicate entry range only Actual internal range of the matrix attenuation is from 60 to 12dB and absolute values are limited to the internal gain range 277 MTRXTYPE Select Pre AEC Gated or Non Gated Routing This command selects whether the Pre AEC routing is Gated or Non Gated Command Form DEVICE MTRXTYP lt Type gt Argument Type Size Values Units Type Integer 4 0 Gated Default 1 Non Gated 2 Toggle Null to query in text MUTE Mute This command selects reports the setting of mute on a chann
160. Mode 273 PANGT PA Noise Gate Threshold 273 PAPOL Polarity Switch 200 0 EEEE 213 PARST PA Reset mnanauananua 279 PASME PA Sound Mask Enable 273 PASML PA Sound Mask Level 274 PASMM PA Sound Mask Mode 274 PASMT PA Sound Mask Timer 274 PATO PA Thermal Overload 274 PBDIAL DialaPBEntrybyArgument 274 PHONEBOOKADD Adds an Entry to the Phonebook 275 PHONEBOOKCNT Counts EntriesinthePhonebook 275 PHONEBOOKDEL Deletes an Entry in the Phonebocok 215 PHONEBOOKREAD Queries the Phonebook by Indez 275 PP Phantom Power 215 PRESET Preset Ekecution Reporting 276 PRGSTRING Program String 276 PROXYSTAT Proxy Registration Status 276 PROXYTYPE Set Get Prox
161. NID X ENETVLANPRI X EREF X X X X X X X X X EVENT X X X X X X X X X FE X X FEB X X FEDR X X FEF X X FEG X X FEGL X X FELD X X FEM X X FEN X X FER X X FERNG X X FES X X FESC X X FILTER X X X X X X X X FILTSEL X X X X X X X X X 310 DEVICE Beam Pro Pro Pro ad Ko ad ke COMMAND NAME Pro 8i 880TA forming 880 880T 840T TH20 VH20 Mic Array X X X X X X X X X FLOW FMP X X X X X X X GAIN X X X X X X X X X X GATE X X X X X X X X GHOLD X X X X X X X GMODE X X X X X X X GOVER X X X X X X X GPIOSTSTATUS X X X X X X X X X GRATIO X X X X X X X GREPORT X X X X X X X X X X GRPSEL X X X X X X X HDAEC X HDAECMODE X HDNLP X X X X X X HDREFSELI X HDREFSEL2 X HOLD X HOOK X X X X HOOKD X X X X LABEL X X X X X X X X X X LCDCONTRAST X X X X X X X X X LMO X X X X X X X X LOCALNUM X X X X LOCBLDG X X X X X X X X X X LOCCITY X X X X X X X X X X LOCCNTRY X X X X X X X X X X LOCCOMP X X X X X X X X X X LOCREGION X X X X X X X X X X LOCROOM X X X X X X X X X X LOCSITENAME X X X X X X X X X LOCSTATE X X X X X X X X X X LOGMASK X X X X X X X X X LVL X X X X X X X X X X LVLREPORT X X X X X X X X X X LVLREPORTEN X X X X X X X X X X MACRO X X X X X X X X X MANUFACTURER X X X X X X X X X MAX X X X X X X X X X MC X X MCGAIN X X MCMINMAX X X MCMUTE X X MCRAMP X X MIN X X X X X X X X X X MINMAX X X X X X X X X X X 311 DEVICE Beam Pro Pro Pro ad ke Pro COMMAND NAME Pro 8i 880TA forming 880 880T 84
162. O Adaptive 3 Input3 56 0 0 Soft Outputs O dB off Auto 15 030 12 Medium O Adaptive 30 4 Input4 56 00 Hsoft Outputs O 648 off Auto 15 0 30 12 Medium O Adaptive Input Channels 5 Automatic Gain E 5 Channel Name i Mute A Target Max Gain Threshold Response Time 0 D 0 0 8 Inputs Telco Rx Channels Noise Telco Settings Rx Cancelation 5 Boost Rx Clear Auto Auto Ring Telco Hook DTMF Audible Ring Audible Hook dial Tone Channel Name EnabledBoost Effect ALC Mute Gain NC Depth Answer Disconnect Type Adaption Flash Level Ring Level Hook Level Level 1 Telco RX a o oo O 6 disabled LD CP 1 Auto 250 Output Channels E ENEE Name 1 Output 1 2 Output2 3 Dutput 3 4 Dutput4 5 Dutput5 6 Outout6 7 Output 8 Outputs 9 Speaker T 222223539995 DO 00 00000 8 20 2007 2 23 19 PM Page 1 of 2 The report button bar provides buttons for viewing and printing the document as well as saving the report to a PDF file When you are finished viewing the report click Close to close the report window and return to Console For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Site Properties e Unit Properties 202 VIEW MENU OVERVIEW The View Menu provides an alternate navigation method for viewing the screens displayed by clicking on the Console Tabs Accessing the View Menu Ele View fed Connect Modes Services Fea FTice SSI MO E E 2 0 ET EE ME A A ClearOne Channel Matrix
163. ONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit Unit Properties enable you to configure general unit settings such as name and telephone country code as well as IP and serial communication settings Properties that apply to all units in a site are configured using Site Properties Accessing Unit Properties To access the Unit Properties window right click the unit you want to configure in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site Pane in Console Ka Converge onsc 4 0 30 Untitled 1 File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Soa FTice 2S TEA YA AA E Channel a ee i H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View 7000006 Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating AEC NC Mute Gate gt ee mi Control String 0 0 43 ao 43 0 0 dB ZITACTN lt ASICANDOTVO Converge 880TA Event Scheduler Gain 0 0 da NOM Mute Gain Pres 1 0 ia Telco TX Database E N Microphone E ells DVD CD Est Video Codec me VCR aj Sound Card Pres 3 Amp W PowerAmp 1 W PowerAmp 2 W PowerAmp 3 E PowerAmp 4 T Telco TX Audio TX o Exp O p F o Exp Q D R D D y 0000000 0000000000 0 0 The Site Unit menu appears Select Unit Properties as shown below Input Ap Copy Unit Paste Unit Rename Channel Add Remove Unit Close Site Channel Routing Unit Properties Site Properties Print Site Report Print Unit Report The Unit Properties wndow appears as shown below 64
164. ORTEN Value Argument Type Size Values Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Turn off reporting but leave current list 1 Turn on reporting 2 Turn off reporting and clear the list Null to query in text MACRO Macro Execution Reporting This command executes a specified macro or reports the last macro executed Command Form DEVICE MACRO Value Argument Type Size Values Value Channel 4 see 14 C in Groups and Channels Null to query last macro ran in text Units Units NOTE The response will indicate successful execution of the macro but it does not guarantee that each command in the macro was executed MANUFACTURER Manufacturer Identification Label This command selects reports the model identification label of the specified channel Command Form DEVICE MANUFACTURER lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Reserved gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 23 1 O M L D Reserved Unsigned 2 0 Integer Label String 16 1 16 characters CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text MAX Maximum Gain Setting Units dB This command changes or reports back the maximum gain setting for an input output or assignable processing block Command Form DEVICE MAX lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 beo yt I2 16 17 29 26 1 O M P L E LRK 4 D U V Value Signed Flo
165. Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output NA NA NA ALL MODELS RS 232 PORT OH oO fee Beam gt BM n ES NOTE To avoid communication errors ClearOne recommends using all nine pins when A eee YAA Au Z MS DCD TXD RXD DTR Ground DSR CTS RTS No connection connecting to the RS 232 port 324 Default Description Preset Mask Bit O Preset Indicator Bit O Preset Mask Bit 1 Preset Indicator Bit 1 Preset Mask Bit 2 Preset Indicator Bit 2 Preset Mask Bit 3 Preset Indicator Bit 3 Preset Mask Bit 4 Preset Indicator Bit 4 Preset Mask Bit 5 Preset Indicator Bit 5 Preset Mask Bit 6 Preset Indicator Bit 6 Preset Mask Bit 7 Preset Indicator Bit 7 Preset Mask Bit 8 Preset Indicator Bit 8 Preset Mask Bit 9 Preset Indicator Bit 9 3 3V 300 mA 3 3V 300 mA Ground A KAA APPENDIX C FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE The 4 X versions of CONVERGE Console offer significant upgrades from previous versions ClearOne strongly encourages users to upgrade all firmware to the latest release version NOTE Before performing any firmware upgrade save the CONVERGE Console site file NOTE When connecting to a CONVERGE Pro site CONVERGE Console checks for firmware software compatibility If a compati
166. Overload 285 NASA 21 ui ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ere ere ee ee es ee ers ee 285 TIMELOCALE Time Locale SettingsS 285 TOUT TimeOutSelect a 286 TRANSCANCEL Cancels a Transferred Call 298 TRANSCOMPLETE Completes a Transferred Call 298 TRANSSTART Initiate an Attended or Unattended Call Transfer 298 130 AAA 286 VER MOISION aaa wh ai Meee ea a Aa patas a 286 VE VolPEnabe man 298 245 XAA Auto Answer Enable Disable 286 XAAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode uo 286 XAARINGS NumberofRingstoAutoAnswerOn 287 XACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication 287 XACONNLVL Audible Connect Disconnect Level 287 XAMBLVL Ambient Level AOJUSt waua 287 XCALLDUR CallDuration 288 XCALLERID Reports Caller ID Information 288 XCGROUP Compressor Group
167. P Processing 10 CONVERGES80 BC F Fader F Fader P Processing F Fader MTT __ Fader_ 30 CONVERGES40T 98 Cua ojo Jr G0 CONVERGEI21287 GO CONVERGE1212 87 HO CONVERGESSOTAB6 10 CONVERGESRA 4D qm Mic 0 Output qm Mic 0 Output my mic 0 Output MAA L Line P P Processing L Line yA J Power Amp L Line YA J Power Amp HO CONVERGESS0TABE P Processing i F Fader R Telco Rx a T Telco Tx P Processing P Processing ua fi Jo IA F Fader P Processing P Processing 10 CONYERGESRA 4D a HF NO BF MIC 00 NO BF MIC 00 NO V Beam Former x gt Mode Configuratior Site Data Default lll Unit Data Default lll Not Connected MAMMA ER LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGEVH20 1A Di The Blue line shows the E Bus connections The E bus In is on the left and the E bus Out is on the right The currently selected unit is highlighted in orange Use the Site pane or select a unit in the blue area to switch to the desired unit Clicking on a button within the unit boundaries will give options for further navigation J 0 Output line Pesa ENA E ier orde Clicking on the number will navigate to the selected Channel View Click on the box label will open the Group View for the channel type UNIT TAB The Unit Tab shows a detailed block diagram for the unit selected in the site p
168. PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical CONVERGE SR 1212 continued Dimensions L x D x H e T729 X11025 AO e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 900 Converge SR 1212 12x12 Digital Matrix Mixer 340 CONVERGE SR 1212A Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed from from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22kHz 1 dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max Gain e Rs 150
169. RATING REGUIREMENTS Power CONVERGE Pro devices automatically accommodate voltages of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 15 W Telephone CONVERGE Pro devices operate on a standard analog telephone line and connect to the telephone system with a standard RJ 11 modular jack If you do not have an RJ 11 jack where you want to install your CONVERGE Pro call your local telephone company for installation CONVERGE Pro 8401 8801 880TA and TH20 can be configured to meet compliance requirements of different countries via the Console software WARNING The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network and that it complies with the country s telco requirements Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause CONVERGE Pro devices to be non compliant Equipment Placement CONVERGE Pro devices are designed for installation in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Environmental CONVERGE Pro devices are designed to operate at ambient unit temperatures between 14 F 10 C and 122 F 50 C SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The CONVERGE Pro Console software minimum system requirements are Supported Operating Systems e Windows XP SP3 e Windows Vista e Windows 7 e Windows 8 Minimum System Requirements e AMD 600 MHz class processor 1 GHz or higher recommended e 1GB RAM Minimum or higher recommended e 300MB hard disk space minimum Additiona
170. Settings Output Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Fader Settings 161 AEC REFERENCE PA ADAPT REFERENCE TAB The AEC Reference 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i TH20 VH20 PA Adapt Reference SR 1212 SR 1212A Tab allows you to establish reference sources for Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC and PA Adaptation AEC uses reference signals as the basis for acoustic echo cancellation An AEC reference is a digital sample of the receive audio signal that is used by the AEC filter model for adaptation and convergence A PA Adapt Reference allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference to prevent an audio signal from gating on microphones without interfering with speech from conference participants You can use both unit and expansion bus audio sources as AEC and PA Adapt references for the Mic Inputs connected to a unit In addition you can define virtual reference sources that combine multiple audio signals into a single AEC PA Adapt reference source Virtual references improve AEC performance in stereo speaker and combined audio video conferencing applications To access AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference select the unit that you want to define references for in the Tree View Tab of the Site Pane then select the AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab from the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Untitled 1 cnv so0a YT EC 33 PHRRbRaes a7 Current Unit HO CONVERGESs0TA 0 Site View Tree View 0000 0 60 3 l D i D
171. System Checks tab Debug Console Una Jiko Convwergest0TADO Use in test Heber Telephone Mei E E Mic 4 bbe 5 Mcg M MeT M Meg PA Temp PA Faut System Check Config settings include e Unit System Check Configuration Specifies the unit in the site that you want to test e Network Select this check box to test the IP configuration and network connectivity for the selected unit e Telephone Select this check box to test Telco VoIP Rx and or Telco VoIP Tx functionality e Mic 1 4 840T Mic 1 8 880 880T 880TA 8i SR 1212 SR 1212A Select the check box es for the mic input channels that you want to test e Unit Specifies the unit that will provide test audio to the speaker e Output Channel Specifies the output channel that will provide test audio to the speaker System Check Configuration VH20 System Check Configuration Unit E CONVERGEWYH20 0 v Use in test Unit Output Channel F Network SIP Proxy Packet Status e Network Select this check box to test the IP configuration and network connectivity for the selected unit e SIP Proxy Select this check box to test the Proxy 1 and 2 registration status e Packet Status Select this check box to the for packet loss select the tests you want to run using the Use in test check boxes and select the unit s and output s with speakers connected using the Unit and Output Channel drop down lists Execu
172. Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCSITENAME Location Site Argument This command sets reports the location of the unit Site name Command Form DEVICE LOCSITENAME Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 64 Characters Null to query in text LOCSTATE Location State This command sets reports the location of the unit State Prefecture string Command Form DEVICE LOCSTATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text 271 LOGMASK Device Log Mask This command sets or reports the device event log mask Command Form DEVICE LOGMASK Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX ELTETE PEE EEL E gt Reset LTEC PEP TEE TPE TET TE gt Errors LLE OE PETE TEE TET TET gt Password Access MEE TELE TEE PEP TEE TPE TET Telco On Off MEET PIFI EEE H gt Dial MEET TELL PEEL PEPE TEE PEEL EE Call Duration MEET LETT TTL PETE TTT AAA System Checks MEET II PETE TET 1111 Firmware Download MEE LETT TTT PETE gt Reserved MTT LTTE 11474714 gt Default MELT LETT PTTL PETE LETT gt Reserved MEET LETT PTTL PETE TEED gt Reserved MEET TELL TITEL 114 TE gt Safety Mute MEET TELL PTTL PETE I gt Macro Execution MEET TELL E EET gt Pre
173. VERGE CONVERGE Pro Installation amp Documentation CD into the CD or DVD ROM drive If the Autorun feature is enabled on the PC the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro Installation window opens automatically Click the CONVERGE Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen to begin installation gt If Autorun is not enabled open My Computer navigate to the drive holding the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro Installation amp Documentation CD Double click on the drive icon and launch setup exe When the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro Installation amp Documentation CD window appears click the CONVERGE Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen The CONVERGE Console Setup Wizard appears Press the Next button and navigate through the License Agreement and Information screens that appear At the Select Installation Folder window choose the directory where you want to install Console Press the Disk Cost button to analyze available and required free space if needed NOTE ClearOne recommends that you use the default directory when installing Console Press the Next button until installation starts Follow the wizard to proceed copy CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro USB drivers onto your system Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to very its compatibility with Windows SP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the corr
174. Y Connecting ANY other devices to the Link In and Link Out ports including ClearOne XAP or PSR1212 products or Power Over Ethernet PoE devices will result in severe equipment damage RS 232 Serial Port Female DB9 connector for connecting to a laptop computer or remote control serial devices Such as AMX and Crestron controllers NOTE CONVERGE Console software cannot connect via the RS 232 port use USB or Ethernet Control Status A and B Ports Iwo female DB25 connectors used for GPIO interactions between CONVERGE Pro devices and external control devices Such as wall switches and push to talk microphones This enables external devices and controller software to access the CONVERGE Pro command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes PC and LAN Ethernet Ports Two RJ 45 10 100Mbps auto sensing Ethernet ports The LAN port connects CONVERGE Pro devices to a network The PC port provides a pass through network connection for use with a standard not crossover patch cable The LEDs adjacent to each port indicate connection status and packet traffic activity 10 Speaker Posts 880T 840T Amplifier Terminal Block 880TA SR1212A e 8801 840T Iwo post banana plug connectors used to connect an external speaker 40 160 Internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier 33 e 880TA SR1212A 8 speaker terminals used to connect an exte
175. Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider 141 In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above an Input Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for the channel as shown below Pre Gain Gain gt Post Gain gt Post E 7 Post see 36 Coarse Fine 0 hic 1 56 Input 1 nee PPWR T PA Adapt and AEC Reference Output Gate a E Process B Telco Tx 1 Telco TA 3 0 E J This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Processing Settings and Fader Settings for more information You can change the label name of the channel in the Telco VoIP Tx entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Podium Mic in the Mic 1 entry box changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console 142 One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects
176. a A ed aaa 348 NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANCE secc rd e dada eed er en 350 JAPANESE COMPLIANCE ss 2242550 dis oe eben d RaRARAREEAEAE 2994 FEAL ERAS RRD 350 APPENDIX F PROVISIONING THE CONVERGE VH20 351 Provisioning The Converge VAZO lt lt cacaca eam aRes ddia kiii HAAR DAR RERERE EERE CRAG RG HERG LEER 351 GLOSSARY 356 A ae CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY OVERVIEW Congratulations You have purchased a ClearOne CONVERGE Pro audio conferencing solution The CONVERGE Pro product family represents a revolutionary advance in state of the art audio technology for large scale conferencing applications ClearOne introduced its first audio conferencing products to the market in 1990 under the brand name Genitner Today ClearOne has over 80 000 installations worldwide in organizations ranging from the Fortune 1 000 to the federal government ClearOne products are used in the most demanding conferencing applications where they consistently deliver industry leading audio quality and unsurpassed reliability ClearOne s proprietary Distributed Echo Cancellation DEC technology forms the foundation of the CONVERGE Pro product family and provides optimal audio quality for today s distributed conferencing environments In addition to DEC other ClearOne innovations including noise cancellation automatic gain and level control advanced microphone gating adaptive ambient and ClearEffect wideband audio emulation pro
177. a particular installation including properties for all units in a site For more information see the Site File Overview topic AR ia a QQ e Accessing Site Properties To access the Site Properties window select the File menu in Console or right click anywhere in the Site View or Tree View panes and select Site Properties from the shortcut menu L Converge Console Sitel cnw File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Bem ES 23 USO Oa AA A ClearOne HMiICILine Gain BEC E bi Current Unit HO CONVERGE f0T 4 0 nini A A l ei ik i Se N s To Exp N pred Processing TA HA Pros A de elo Da Da a Da Da ll el Jl el Jul pl il peal MAA i Trp me werge ls _ ES L Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut ME Unt Data Defaut MN Hot Connected The File menu appears Select Site Properties as shown below 59 wie View Odd Connec Mew Site Open Site Close Site Save Save AS Print b 1 Board Room cwg 2 Sitel cwg 3 Site4 cvg 4 Sikez cg Exit The Site Properties window appears with the General tab selected Site Properties Board Room Fis Fie Hama Board Roomcvg Pai C Progam FlesClearOreConverge Consolat 4222007 20635 Phi Modified SAO 07 11 AM To create a new site select New Site from the File menu or by clicking the New Site button on the Console Button Bar The Site Properties window appears NOTE You must have admini
178. a series of two beeps is injected into the receive channel to indicate that the call has been dropped Ringer Cadence Not used in VoIP Settings e Standard Uses the cadence specified in the Country Code to detect the standard ring cadence per country e Custom Set for distinctive ring cadences When custom is set the Min On and Min Off times must be selected from their respective drop down boxes PBX s can have distinctive ring cadences that are not country specific These times are the minimum values the ring cadence must be for the unit to detect the ring If the ring cadence signal provided by the PBX is greater than the custom settings the unit will detect the ring 127 Telco Meters Tab Not available on the VH20 The Telco Meters tab displays a round trip signal flow diagram for the selected Telco Rx as well as real time level meters for the signal at each stage of processing The settings on this tab cannot be modified Channel Property Configuration Telco RX NC Telco Settings Telco Meters TX Post Gain Matrix RX Post Gain Gain E ERE E 20 20 20 Om 0 6 30 30 50 cos Transmit Input r Transmit e Recy Input gt m Recy Output 20 0 20 20 NOTE When you click the Close button bottom right corner of screen or close the window manually any changes you make in the tabs of the Channel Property Configuration Telco RX screen are automatically saved The Telco met
179. ack Eliminator Clicking Reset clears all settings related to this feature e Reset Dynamic Nodes Clicking Reset only clears dynamic filters Fixed Filters remain in place Status Reports the number of Fixed and Dynamic nodes A total of 16 nodes can be used regardless of type e Node Report Creates a text report listing existing node details 85 86 Feedback Eliminator Settings Y e Filter Settings Filters are applied according to the specifications the user sets gt Number of Fixed Filters Up to 16 Fixed Filters are applied If the specified number of filters are not required they become Dynamic Filters Filter Bandwidth Bandwidth is determined by the specified Q factor A lower Q creates a filter that works across a wider frequency range A higher Q utilizes a narrower range Y Filter Depth Mode e Locked re uses filters A replacement filter with new settings and increased filter depth is applied in place of an existing filter e Unlocked adds a new filter at a specific frequency No filters are replaced so this setting will count against the total number of filters available Mode Settings Voice and Music presets are available to fine tune the feedback eliminator y NOTE Voice Mode is the more aggressive setting y Enable Ringing Elimination Allows the Feedback Cancellation to attempt to suppress ringing NOTE This setting adjusts slowly to eliminate ringing Click Close to clos
180. add units to a site using default configuration settings Accessing the Add Menu File View Add Connect Modes Services Help A A ClearOne Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database M MIC Line i NOM Mute Current Unit Imputi__ REE H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 3 2 Site View Tree View UA i SQ Microphone E wils DVD CD wit Video Codec fm VCR H 6 Sound Card Amplifier a Loudspeaker 000000 ff Converge 880TA Mode Configuration Site Data Default W Unit Data Default MN NotConnected MMMM MMMM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES80TA 0 Devic In Console click Add on the menu bar The Add menu appears as shown below Add Connect Modes Services Hi Beamforming Microphone Array CONNECT AYB CONNECT CobraNet Converge 840T Converge 880 Converge 880T Converge 880TA Converge 8i Converge SR1212 Converge SR1212A Converge TH20 Converge YH20 Adding Units On the Add menu select the model you want to add to the site The Unit Properties dialog appears as shown below 205 Converge 880 Unit Properties lt New Unit gt General Comm Info Unit ID D0000000 MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF Device Name CONYERGE880 0 Device ID 0 Y Audio Master Slave Room n ooo oo Default Meter Meter Type Channel O Output Post Gain v 12 Front Panel Mode Front Panel Pin Unlock 10000 Wersions F
181. al amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual gating groups 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command 14 Daaa fa kwama Ndinmamvrinmala AnA A Kani AAMTALTMINA IV AFARA Jj Aa Array Deamtorming viicropnone Arra Y or bo The Beamforming Microphone Array is the Pro Audio industry s first professional grade microphone array with beamforming and adaptive steering technology and ClearOne s next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation The ultra sleek design fits into any conferencing environment and delivers the clearest audio pickup available with adaptive acoustic processing Acoustic Characteristics 24 microphones Auto voice tracking Polar Pattern Custom Frequency Response 150Hz 16kHz Signal to Noise Ratio gt 70 dB AEC Tail time 128 ms Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB adjustable Auto Mixer Parameters Number of Open Microphones NOM First mic priority mode Last mic mode Maximum number of mics mode Ambient level Gate threshold adjust Off attenuation adjust Hold time Decay rate Matrix Mixing Parameters 1 Channel In 18 Expansion Bus In Out Beamforming Microphone Array Configuration Echo cancellation on off Noise cancellation on off Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ ALC on off Gain adjust Mute on off Auto g
182. al and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off 153 Adjusts output gain level Use the Gain slider to adjust output volume level You can also enter the level directly in the selector box The Post Gain meter reflects the post gain level of the signal in dB Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain scale to create minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min max levels The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Fader 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Fader 1 En E Helal Aal elaela e e ee Jr e ye af ef ef ols 2 af 4 Sa e e aa a aa aaa SRAARSA BEBE EEE EE SRBSBS SRR RF 3 mmmmmmamasmmmmdmnd s Za a A A AA AAA AAA AA AI mW El You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation KA RA Cross Point Enter Copy Ctro Paste Chrl4 To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and se
183. aled This command can be used to replace the DIAL command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XDIAL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Number Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2611 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 E Number String 44 1 44 Chars of 0 9 4 y Null to query in text XDTMFLVL DTMF Tone Level This command selects reports the DTMF tone s level This command can be used to replace the DIMFLVL command for the R group You can t change level during a call Command Form DEVICE XDTMFLVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 I7 20 RZ Value Signed Short 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text 300 KDTONELVL Dial Tone Level This command selects reports the audible dial tone s level This command can be used to replace the DIONELVL command for the R group You can t change level during a call Command Form DEVICE XDTONELVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Signed Short 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text XGHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust This command selects reports the setting of hold time This command can be used to replace the GHOLD command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XGHOLD lt Channel gt lt Gr
184. alue Argument Type Channel Channel Group Group Value Unsigned Integer Size 7 y 2 Values Units See Groups and Channels 3 M i O Off 1 Soft 2 Medium 3 Aggressive Null to query in text NOM Number of Open Microphones Mode This command selects reports the setting of Number of Open Microphones NOM on output channels Command Form DEVICE NOM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Channel Channel Group Group Value Unsigned Integer Size 7 y 2 Values Units See Groups and Channels 2 16 201 0 T K D O Off 1 0n f 2 Toggle Null to query in text NTPSRV NTP Network Time Server Address This command selects reports the IP addresses of the NTP Time Server the unit s NTP client requests time status from Command Form DEVICE NTPSRV Value 1 Value 2 Argument Type Size Value 1 IP Address 4 Value 2 IP Address 4 NULL Null the Telephone Line Values Units Null to query in text This command nulls the telephone line There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE NULL lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved 2 OFFA Off Attenuation Mode Values See Groups and Channels 17 R 0 Units This command selects reports the off attenuation value of a Mic channel Command Form DEVICE OFFA lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned 2 Flo
185. amp up Target Signed Integer 2 65 20 If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary the ramp will use the dB channel s maximum and minimum for a target MIN Minimum Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MIN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2080 12 10 17 29 201 0 OM RL RLR i La DLV Value Signed Float 2 65 00 20 00 Null to query in text ES MINMAX Minimum and Maximum Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MINMAX lt Channel gt lt Group gt Min Max Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 35 7 12 16 17 25 21L Ml FL E TB i K Z D U V Min Signed Float 2 65 00 20 00 Null to query in text GB Max Signed Float 4 65 00 20 00 dB 275 MLINE Mic Line Coarse Gain Setting This command selects reports the setting of coarse gain Command Form DEVICE MLINE lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 0 dB 7 7 dB 14 14 dB 21 210dB 28 28 dB 35 35 dB 41 41 dB 50 50 dB 56 56 dB Null to query in text No other values are valid and accepted MMAX Maximum Number of M
186. and Command Form Details DEVICE TRANSCOMPLETE lt Channe gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 y TRANSSTART Initiate an Attended or Unattended Call Transfer This command initiates a transfer of an established call to a new extension defined by this command Command Form Details DEVICE TRANSSTART lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short ya 0 E Value String 44 1 44 Characters of 0 9 7 and Null to query in text VE VolP Enable This command selects toggles the hook status This command is used to replace the XTE command for the Z group when VolP multi line is enabled See MULTILNEN and MULTILNSTAT State tracking is provided by the CALLSTATUS command Command Form Details DEVICE VE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 2 Reserved Zero 2 Zero 308 SERIAL COMMAND SUPPORT TABLE The following table shows serial command support by CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro device type Note that Telco related commands only work on models that have telephone interfaces CONVERGE Pro 880TA 8801 840T TH20 and AEC and NC related commands do not work with CONVERGE SR 1212 and SR 1212A DEVICE
187. and before the currently selected row of the macro The command appears in the Macro Command List ino CT Argument Description i ie Macro Command List an Record sweas swe NOTE When there are multiple commands in the Macro Command List you can drag and drop them to change their execution order You can now add another command repeat steps 4 through 6 or click Save or Save As to save the completed macro Modifying Macros Use the following procedure to edit a macro Select the Macro number to modify from the Macro drop down list Click Change Name to change the macro name optional Double click the command line in the Macro Command List you want to edit Modify the command or its arguments by selecting options from the drop down lists Click Replace to overwrite the old command line with the new changes Click Insert to insert a new command or Delete to delete the currently highlighted command When you are finished making changes click Save or Save As to save the macro ANA Deleting Macros Use the following procedure to delete a macro 1 Click Clear Macro to delete the entire macro 2 Click Delete to delete the selected command line Adding and Inserting Command Lines Use the following procedure to add or insert command lines into the currently selected macro Click Add to place the current command line into the next available row in the command line table 1 Click Ins
188. and requires a reboot of the unit to take effect The current state of operation of the unit can be queried using the MULTILNSTAT command Command Form Details DEVICE MULTILNEN lt Channe gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Single Line 1 Multi Line i 2 Toggle NULL to Query in Text MULTILNSTAT VoIP Multi Line Status This command reports the current mode of operation of the VolP interface The current state of operation is set once on boot up To change the state of operation single multi line use the MULTILNEN command and reboot the unit This command is query only Command Form Details DEVICE MULTILNSTAT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Single Line 1 Multi Line E NULL to Query in Text 307 TRANSCANCEL Cancels a Transferred Call This command interrupts stops a transfer There is no guery for this command Command Form Details DEVICE TRANSCANCEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 26 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 5 TRANSCOMPLETE Completes a Transferred Call This command completes concludes a transfer after the transfer has been initiated There is no query for this comm
189. ane The diagram shows the path of the audio signal based on the current unit configuration and provides a graphical explanation of each stage of audio processing Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode When you load a site file Console displays the Unit tab by default as shown below To switch to the Unit tab from any other tab click the Unit tab on the Tab Bar 76 Converge Console 4 0 20 File View Add Connect Modes Services Help T 7 7 100123408 M2 N 921 9 A ClearOne Site Selection Site Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Database ga oy Gain AEC NC Mute Gate ES a 0 Output ones E Current Unit Input 2 AA e p rT pi 30 CONVERGE840T 98 Microphone Input 3 ma Output 3 ls DVD CD Site View Tree View Input ld A Output 4 P L Line Pres BN Output 5 Video Codec DO CONVERGESS0T 95 Input S WE 3 Output 6 e ms VCR E Sound Card MA Output 7 e EO CONVERGEWH20 14 oo ia CONVERGETH20 21 PEZ E Peery pie ii Ez en Input 8 _ An AI 8 Speaker _ _ _ Loudspeaker T LA R Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC MATRIX T Telco TX S55 10 CONVERGES80 BC Telco RX alos 1 Telco TX ____ a Expansion Audio RX Ls eins Audio TX From Exp O o Exp O rom Exp rom Exp rom Exp rom Exp From Exp rom Exp rom Exp P Processing RX GO CONVERGE1212 87 SURA E TEST BE HO CONY
190. ange Range Range Range Range Inputs 1 8 1 12 Outputs O 112 ee ee ES N A oe 1 8 1212 1 2 N A amp Mic Input M 1 8 N A 1 4 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 N A N A pr V N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A pd J N A N A N A N A N A 1 4 1 4 N A N A Gating Group G 1 4 A F N A 1 4 A F 1 4 A F 1 4 A F 1 4 A F 1 4 A F N A A F Processing P A F N A A D A F A F A F A F N A N A Expansion Bus Audio E O Z I N O Z EN O Z IN O Z EN O Z I N O Z IN O Z I N O Z IN O Z EN Channels Line Inputs L 9 12 1 2 5 8 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 12 1 2 N A Expansion E A 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 Channels GPIO Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N A Matrix X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fader F 1 4 N A 1 4 N A 1 4 N A N A N A N A Presets S 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 1 32 N A Macros C 1 255 1 255 1 255 1 255 1 255 1 255 1 255 1 255 N A Transmit T N A 1 1 N A 1 1 N A N A N A Receive R N A 1 1 N A 1 1 N A N A N A oa B 1 4 N A 1 4 N A 1 4 1 4 N A N A N A Timed Events Q 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 N A Web W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N A da delia H N A N A N A N A N A 1 4 1 4 N A N A VoIP Transmit K N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 N A VoIP Receive Z N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 N A USB Transmit D N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A USB Receive U N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 239 Input level Level post gain adjustment but pre filter Level post filter but pre gate non gated level Level post gate gated level Echo Return Loss Not SR I2I2 on 1212A
191. annel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 SIP Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text COUNTRY Country Selection This command sets reports the country for telco compliance purposes Command Form DEVICE COUNTRY Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 US Canada 2 Europe 3 Mexico 4 Australia 5 South Africa 6 Japan 7 Brazil 8 South Korea 9 China 10 Singapore 11 Taiwan 12 New Zealand 13 India 14 Hong Kong 15 Malaysia 16 Argentina Null to query in text CTRLMASTER Control Master Mode This command reports the mode of the unit for SNMP control Command Form DEVICE CTRLMASTER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 Master 2 Slave Null to query in text 256 DECAY Decay Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the decay rate Command Form DEVICE DECAY lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 Slow 2 Medium 3 Fast Null to query in text DEFAULT Default The Unit sets the unit to factory defaults There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE DEFAULT No Arguments DELAY Delay Adjust This command selects reports the setting of delay time Command Form
192. annels on the specified unit e STRING Runs a command string e SYSCHECKS Runs system diagnostics To schedule a single event select Single Event and set the desired Start Date Time in the Time Scheduler section of the screen Time Scheduler Start Dale Time i Single Everi nm Ki PEN tanar2008 SS E To schedule a recurring event select Event Recurrence set the recurrence interval using the Recur Every fields and select either Maximum of Times or End Date Time to specify the number of repetitions or time period for event execution respectively NOTE Clicking on the arrow button next to a date entry field in the Time Scheduler section of the screen displays a calendar for date selection Click the Apply button to schedule the event The event appears in the Scheduled Events List Scheduled Events Event ID a ao BA oh de ddr Clear Al Events Add additional events as required by repeating steps 1 through 4 To clear a single event highlight the event and press Clear To clear all scheduled events press the Clear All Events button Answer Yes in the Warning dialog that appears NOTE Events can also be viewed and scheduled via the Management page of the Web Portal For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Macro Tab Preset Mode Overview Safety Mute String Tab System Checks Web Builder 178 DATABASE TAB NOTE Objects and Devices created in
193. another mic gates on The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all other mics gate off Off gates all mics off when no audio is present All allows all mics to gate on at the same time 170 Global Gating Groups Global Gating Groupe 2 ZZ Sa E A Aa First bic Priority f YA for fon fon ow x fon r fon I Global gating groups control mic inputs connected to all units linked together through the Expansion Bus Configure Global Gating Group settings as follows e Enter aname in the Group Name field optional e Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature default or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off NOTE ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant s voice First Mic Priority allows more than one microphone to gate on at same time but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source It does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group If First Mic Priority is disabled two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks e Select the Max of Mics from the drop down list the default is 4 This sets the maximum number of microphones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group Again the maximum number
194. any other CONVERGE unit When you open the unit properties screen on the Beamforming Microphone Array there is a Beamforming tab When the Unit Properties is opened and the Beamforming tab is selected there are several different configuration features available 73 Mute On Macro Mute Off Macro ES 0 0 NOTE Mute On Off macros are designed to call macros from the specified Macro Mute Unit when the mute buttons are toggled on the Beam Forming device If the mute On Off macros are set to 0 then all Beam Forming mics are mute unmuted Mute LED Mode Mode a e Select the Macro to turn on the mute e Select the Macro to turn off the mute Note If no macro is selected all connected Beamforming Microphone Arrays will toggle the mute when a Beamforming Microphone Array mute button is pressed Set the Mute Mode LED to Off to turn off the LED s on the Beamforming Microphone Array e Set the Mute Mode LED to Steady to turn the Beamforming Microphone Array s LED to solid blue when not muted and solid red when muted e Set the Mute Mode LED to Blinking to turn the Beamforming Microphone Array s LED to solid blue when not muted and blinking red when muted e Select the Show Beamforming Microphone Array warning to show a warning when a Beamforming Microphone Array is added For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e LCD Programming Overview e LCD Settings Me
195. assignable processing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn e Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley e Compressor e Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks e Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration e Input Gain Adjust Mic or Line Level e Phantom Power on off e Echo Cancellation on off e Noise Cancellation on off e Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off 335 Auto Gate Manual gate e Adaptive Ambient on off e Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment e Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu e Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation e Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Netw
196. at 279 Values Units See Groups and Channels 3 M 0 00 60 00 Null to query in text PAA PA Adaptive Mode This command selects reports PA adaptive mode for the specified Mic Command Form DEVICE PAA lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text PACEN PA Softclipper Enable This command changes enables the softclipper function on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PACEN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 O Off Short 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text PAENERGY PA Energy saver mode This command switches the 36 volt rails off and on for the power amplifier It is intended to be used for a low power or energy saving mode Command Form DEVICE PAENERGY Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 O Energy Saver Mode OFF Power Amp On Short 1 Energy Saver Mode ON Power Amp Off Null to query in text PAEQEN PA EQ Filter Enable This command enables the EQ filter on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Gr
197. at a 65 00 20 00 Null to query in text 273 Units dB MC Multi Channel Mode This command groups audio controls for channels Audio Controls include Gain Ramp Gain and Mute Command Form DEVICE MC lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Channel Group Multi Channel Group Bitmap Type Channel Group Group Hexadecimal Integer Size Values Units 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 1 128 No text group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now See GroupAndChannels dB 4 4 13 12 11 10 02 05 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 01 00 ja Charmel 1 Charmel Channel 3 Channel 4 31 30 15 1 Tp to waximim mmber of charmels per group MCGAIN Multi Channel Gain This command that groups adjusts reports audio gain of the grouped channels Command Form DEVICE MCGAIN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Absol Rel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel f Group divided by 2 Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Unsigned 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel Integer See GroupAndChannels Group Value String 4 99 90 99 90 dB Null to query in text Absol 0 A Absolute Rel R Relative Null Relative MCMINMAX Multi Channel Min and max Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MCMINMAX lt Channel gt lt Group
198. ate macros in Console the Macro Recorder which records screen selections and the Macro Editor which allows you to create command lines The Macro Editor is also used to modify macros created using the Macro Recorder Use the following procedure to record a macro using Macro Recorder 1 Click the Record button at the bottom of the Macro screen The Macro dialog appears Macro 2 Select the macro number from the Macro to Record drop down list then click Start 3 The Macro Record dialog appears shown below 165 In the Console make the routing and input output configuration changes such as gain adjustments mute etc that you want to include in the macro 5 Click Stop in the Macro Record dialog to end macro recording 6 The macro Command Editor appears with a list of the commands captured Command Editor Channet 1 6 for an Converge 880 i and 1 4 for an 8407 Ret Groupe E 0 E This command selecta which culpa or Ca expansion bus reference ls used for a Mic Input as a reference for power amp z Rei Channei based on Ret Group and device type 0 72 rt m a a Rel Group Reil Chn o am pont pete topos Macro Command List Ag Aga Ana AgS Arge Arg 1 3 0 Nom 1 o 2 3 0 MUTE 2 M 0 7 Click Save to save the macro You can use the Macro Editor to modify recorded macros as described in the next section Macro Editor Creating Macros Use the following procedure to create a
199. ate manual gate 15 CUSTOMER SERVICE AND SUPPORT ClearOne is committed to providing best in class customer service and support If you need assistance installing configuring or operating your CONVERGE Pro system or if you have questions about ClearOne products or services please contact us at one of the locations listed below ClearOne also welcomes your comments and suggestions ClearOne on the Web Corporate Website www clearone com sales Email sales clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com North America Worldwide Headquarters ClearOne Communications Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 salt Lake City Utah 84116 USA Telephone 801 975 7200 Fax 801 977 0087 Toll Free 800 945 7730 Tech Support 800 283 5936 Latin America Telephone 801 974 3621 sales Email global clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com EMEA Telephone 44 0 1189 036 053 sales Email global clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com Asia Pacific Japan Oceania Telephone 852 3590 053 sales Email global clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com WARRANTY INFORMATION ClearOne Communications Inc warrants that this CONVERGE Pro product is free of defects in both material and workmanship For complete warranty information including length coverage and limitations visit http Awww clearone com support policies warranty 16 OPE
200. ation Building This command sets reports the location of the unit Building string Command Form DEVICE LOCBLDG Value Argument Type Size Values Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCCITY Location City This command sets reports the location of the unit City string Command Form DEVICE LOCCITY Value Argument Type Size Values Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCCNTRY Location Country This command sets reports the location country of the unit Command Form DEVICE LOCCNTRY Value Argument Type Size Values Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text 270 Units Units Units Units Units LOCCOMP Location Company This command sets reports the location of the unit Company string Command Form DEVICE LOCCOMP Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCREGION Location Region This command sets reports the location of the unit Region string Command Form DEVICE LOCREGION Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCROOM Location Room This command sets reports the location of the unit Room string Command Form DEVICE LOCROOM Value Argument
201. ation this command will automatically be sent out reporting the duration This command can be used to replace the CALLDUR command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XCALLERID lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Number gt lt Name gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Number String 44 1 44 Characters Name String 44 1 44 Characters KCALLERID Reports Caller ID Information This command reports Caller Identification Information This command can be used to replace the CALLERID command for the R group This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE XCALLDUR lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Duration gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1720 FZ Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 Duration String 8 String of format HR MN SS XCHAIRO Chairman Override Mode This command selects reports the setting of chairman override This command can be used to replace the CHAIRO command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XCHAIRO lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text XCGROUP Compressor Group This command sets the compressor group for synchronized operation of the compressor This command can
202. ay and DNS TERL Telco Echo Return Loss The TERL meter shows the coupling between the transmit signal and the input to the telephone echo canceller It is the ratio of the two levels TERLE Telco Echo Return Loss Enhancement The TERLE meter shows the loss through the telephone echo cancellation process It is the ratio of the two levels Threshold The upper or lower level at which a signal processing begins or terminates Unit Properties Unit Properties define properties for a specific Converge Pro unit Unit Properties enable you to configure unit settings such as name and telephone country code as well as IP and serial communication settings see also Site Properties Virtual AEC Reference Virtual AEC References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers left and right combined audio video conferencing and audio video teleconferencing In these and other multiple output applications using virtual AEC references improves AEC performance Web Builder Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management User Console and mixing features Control Console for access through a web portal integrated into the CONVERGE Pro firmware The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft s Internet Explorer web browser requires IE version 5 5 or later White Noise Acoustical noise with equal energy throughout a given freque
203. b AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Beamforming Microphone Configuration 112 MIC INPUT SETTINGS Mic Input Settings enable you to customize mic input channel settings using the Channel screen With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane Cc Converge Console Board Room cvg SEE File View Add Connect Modes Services Help EOE FTOlCe SRS POBSAERSH On HA ClearOne Site Selection Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database 36 A 20 20 20 Objects Current Unit 30 Converge840T 03 Y Line Site View Tree View 61 F z z y E Telco Rx 840 30 Converges40T 0 A E cal Output amp Mic ES Telco Tx A 36 7 i j 30 7 30 gt 30 3 fe Processing Q Input 2 M Fader AR Input 3 x Input 4 Mp Line a Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 cated gt Non Gated ra npu G Pre aec RR EY Telco Rx crosspoint Gp Telco RX 8 Output Output 1 oe a Output 2 Output 1 M Output Level gt 20 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E tm Telco Tx Fata Telco TX E a Processing Q Process 4 Q Process B B Process C Q Process D MH Fader IL Fader 1 MH Fader
204. bility issue is found the firmware uploader screen will be presented to update the firmware Follow the steps below to update the firmware If you choose not to perform the firmware update close CONVERGE Console and use CONVERGE Manager to select the version of CONVERGE Console that is compatible with the firmware in the CONVERGE Pro If the connected Site contains units that are Version 3 X they must be removed from the expansion bus prior to performing the firmware upgrade Please follow the steps below to upgrade your Firmware Upgrading from 1 X Firmware Steps 1 Remove any 2 X 3 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 1 X units 2 Re connect to the 1 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units 4 The units will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware The 1 X to 4 X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade 5 Reconnect to the stack with Console Download 4 X a second time to the units The units will reboot Units are fully upgraded 7 Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel La O Upgrading from 2 X Firmware Steps 1 Remove any 1 X 3 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 2 X units 2 Re connect to the 2 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units 4 The units will default
205. by the unit This command is read only Command Form DEVICE DVER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 Sent with a Null in text ENETADDR Ethernet Port IP Address This command selects reports the IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETADDR Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text 259 ENETDHCP Ethernet DHCP Selection This command selects reports the use of DHCP of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDHCP Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text ENETDNS Ethernet DNS Selection This command selects reports the use of DNS of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNS Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 O Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text ENETDNSA Ethernet DNS Server Address This command selects reports the DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNSA Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETDNSA2 Ethernet DNS Server Address 2 This command selects reports the alternate DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNSA2 Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text EN
206. c 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Mic 5 Mic 6 Mic 7 Mic 8 ower Amp Temp Check Power Amp Fault Check SIP Proxy Registration Status Packet Loss Statistics All other bits reserved 293 SYSRESULT System Check Result This command reports the results of the system check This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set The System Check integer bits determine which test result will be reported Each test results in a separate SYSRESULT message Argument Type Size Values System Hexadecimal 4 15 14 131211 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Check Integer E Network Telephone Mic 1 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Mic 5 Mic 6 Mic 7 Mic 8 ower Amp Temp Check Power Amp Fault Check SIP Proxy Registration Status Packet Loss Statistics All other bits reserved Status Unsigned 2 O Fail Integer 1 Pass 2 NULL lt Not Tested or Test Disabled in SYSCONFIG gt Message String 40 For the telephone on hook the message will report the line voltage the line current other results and if dial tone is detected For the telephone off hook the message will report the line current other results and if dial tone is detected The bit mask for the other results is XXXK KEKO gt set if switched from CTR21 to FCC because of low current gt set if used DIAL bit while dialing gt set if switch from Low Voltage to Japan because of current gt set if switch from Low Voltage to FCC because
207. command can be used to replace the RING command for the R group This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE XRING lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Unsigned Short 2 O Ring Cycle Ended 1 Ring Cycle Started XRINGEREN Audible Ring Enable This command sends reports the use of an audible ring This command can be used to replace the RINGEREN command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XRINGEREN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 261 2 Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text 303 XRINGERLVL Audible Ring Level This command selects reports the audible ring s level This command can be used to replace the RINGERLVL command for the R group You cannot change this value while the phone is ringing Command Form DEVICE XRINGERLVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Unsigned Short 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text dB XRINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection This command sends reports the audible ring melody This command can be used to replace the RINGERSEL command for the R group You can t change th
208. crophone Array Connect the CONVERGE Pro units with CONVERGE Console Open the firmware uploader screen Browse for the bf mic mdo file Download the Beamforming Microphone Array firmware The Beamforming Microphone Array s will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware Units are fully upgraded oo ie eh a For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Configure Unit Properties e Configuration Mode Overview e Customer Service and Support 229 DEBUG CONSOLE The Debug Console provides five tabs for monitoring system performance testing and troubleshooting audio performance and running system diagnostics e Meter View e Gate View e Signal Generator e System Checks e System Check Config Accessing Debug Console To access the debug console select Debug Console from the Services menu or press the Debug Console al button on the Console Button Bar KE Converge onsole 4 0 30 Untitle File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Soa TT 0012 3 E F ENEE Site Selection Stey WE Pm Current Unit Input1__ HO CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View OME 000004 TA OOWDL 2HTACTNXS lt ICANDOTVO Converge 880TA E Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String NOM Mute 1 2 3 0 4 5 soe SQ Microphone wiis DVD CD Et Video Codec H a VCR H E Sound Card 3 Amp W PowerAmp 1 0 0
209. cts Eh Podium Mic A PTT Microphone 60 48 Output Hg Telco Tx Processing Ce fi Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects refer to the Table of Contents for the following topics e AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration Optimizing Input Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for inout channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance Before configuring an input channel ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Gating Tab Matrix Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Database Tab Line Input Settings Output Settings Beamforming Microphone Configuration 118 LINE INPUT SETTINGS Line Input Settings enable you to customize line input channel settings All settings for a given line input are available on the Channel screen With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired line input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane Converge Console Sitel cnv Seles File View Add Connect Modes Services Help ka Tee 3 IA en Mode Configuration Ske Data
210. d Pi NN Control Pin 2 Select the pin you want to configure from the Selected Pin drop down list Pin 1 is selected by default for Control Port A and Pin 21 is selected by default for Control Port B Control Pin State Active Low Commana sNONE gt O O O O O O OoOO Inactive High Command 173 3 In the Control Pin State section of the screen press the Active Low Command or Inactive High Command button to select the pin state that you want to associate a command with Command Editor Command Description Argumen Descripiion Sets the Mute for an input Output Processor ChanmeliGroup F Faders inputs L Line inputs M Telco Rx or Telco Tx Microphons Inputs O Guiputs P Processing R Teco Fix T Tatoo Tx Mute mode D Gif 1 On 2 Toggle T CAD Coenen Channel ri Moda al SiG jjo 4 Inthe Command Editor section of the screen select the device Type DID and Command from the drop down lists When you select a command its description appears in the Command Description box The parameters associated with the command appear next to the Command drop down list and the valid values or range for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box Control Pin State Active Low Command H MUTE 1R 1 gt nacte righi Command 5 Set parameter values for the command as required then press the Apply button The command appears in the selected Active Inact
211. d in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window Audible Ringer Indication When a call comes in you can hear it ring if Audible Ringer Indication is turned on in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window The ringer level can also be adjusted Audio Routing The process of routing input signals to output channels in the Matrix based on default or user defined cross points See also Matrix Automatic Gain Control AGC Automatically increases or decreases audio gain to maintain a consistent audio level Automatic Gating Automatically gates microphones on or off based on gating parameters set in the Mic Input Channel Configuration window Automatic Level Control ALC ALC can be selected for telco receive and mic input channels ALC keeps soft and loud telephone participants at a consistent level ALC can be turned on or off in the Telco Rx and Mic Input Channel Configuration windows The default is on for Telco Rx and on for mic inputs Bandwidth The difference between the lower and upper end points of an audio band Also the range or differences between the limiting frequencies of a continuous frequency band Baud Rate The number of signal transitions per second or the clock rate of the serial bit stream in hertz Given 7 or 8 bits for data plus start and stop the approximate ASCII character transmission rate is one tenth the baud rate Beamformig Microphone Array The Beamforming Microphone Array uses multiple microphone elements to steer i
212. d refresh the current display for a site Connecting to a site allows you to control and configure the units in that site See Site Setup Overview for more information Accessing the Connect Menu File View Add Connect Modes Help BoalFTTlee ss AE YA Ou 2 Site Selection Channel Control Strin Stet T a NOM Maa Current Unit Inuti 1 _ H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 e E Microphone Site View Tree View I y g ie le DVD CD ee e a a Hw Video Codec 6 a a Ba VCR 72 H 6 Sound Card OutputS _ aa Amplifier Gain__ Pres 1 Amp aa 48 W PowerAmp 1 2 2 Que M PowerAmp 2 3 0 9 9 9 000 E PowerAmp 3 4 0 M PowerAmp4 NOM Mute Gain___ Pres T Telco TX 1 Jaoce W Telco TX 0000046 Pres Gain NC mm oo _ __1 Audio RX 2 o Exp Spee ZITACTN lt XSECANDOVO o 0 J0 0 00 0 00 0000 00 0 0 00 U y uu ip gi mo R COOCOO n Converge 880TA E IOTMOOWP ZZA N lt XS lt CANDODO i T e Mode Configuration Site Default W Unit Data Default MN NotConnected MMMM MMMM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic In Console select Connect from the menu bar The Connect menu appears as shown below Modes Connect Disconnect Connect Menu Options e Connect Connects to a site via USB or IP e Disconnect Disconnects Console from the currently connected site This option is not available if no si
213. d topics e Controls and Connections Expansion Bus Overview e Device IDs e LCD Programming Overview e LCD Macros Menu e Presets Configuration Mode Control Tab e Database Channel Objects Matrix Objects Control Objects e Drag amp Drop Configuration 168 GATING TAB The Gating tab allows you to create gating groups and assign mic inputs to gating groups Gating group assignments combine individual channel gating configurations created using the Channel Properties Configuration screen When inputs are assigned to a gating group the gating information from the assigned inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves The CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro product family excluding the TH20 VH20 features four internal gating groups Internal 1 4 and six global gating groups across the expansion bus Global A F Mic inputs are assigned to Global Group A by default If an input is not assigned to a gating group that mic s gating properties are independent and they have no effect on any gating group When gating groups span two or more units global gating groups the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group NOTE Mic inputs can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time To access gating groups click the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console BE0O 11 cve Boa 7702063308020 On Site Selection ura channel matic AEC Reterence Macro cang Cabo Sting
214. day 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday COMPDLY Compressor Delay This command sets signal compression delay on a Channel for look ahead compression functionality Delay from 0 20 msec Command Form DEVICE COMPDLY lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Integer A 0 20 msec Null to query in text COMPDLYEN Compressor Delay Enable This command enables signal compression delay on a Channel for look ahead compression functionality Command Form DEVICE COMPDLYEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 d Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 0n 2 Toggle Null to query in text 255 COMPRESS Compressor Adjust This command selects reports the settings of the compressor Command Form DEVICE COMPRESS lt Channel gt Threshold Ratio Attack Release Gain Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Threshold Signed Integer 1 60 20 dB Null to query in text Ratio Unsigned Integer 1 1 20 Attack Unsigned Float 2 0 00 100 00 Ms Release Unsigned Integer 2 100 2000 Ms Gain Unsigned Float 4 0 00 20 00 dB COMPSEL Compression Select This command selects reports the compressor activation Command Form DEVICE COMPSEL lt Ch
215. de in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Audio Devices and Channel Objects Channel objects contain all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Ep Export as object Apply Eo all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Mic 1 as Podium Mid Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree pane as shown below 117 Obje
216. duce crystal clear audio that is equivalent to conference participants being in the same room Applications The CONVERGE Pro product family provides scalable conferencing solutions for any size venue Some common applications include Boardrooms Training rooms Courtrooms Multimedia rooms Distance learning Auditoriums Houses of worship sound reinforcement Large meeting venues Models The CONVERGE Pro product family includes the following models CONVERGE Pro 880 CONVERGE Pro 880T CONVERGE Pro 880TA CONVERGE Pro 8401 CONVERGE Pro 1H20 CONVERGE Pro VH20 CONVERGE Pro 8i CONVERGE Pro SR1212 CONVERGE Pro SR1212A Beamforming Microphone Array Common Benefits Each product in the CONVERGE Pro product family offers the following benefits Superior audio quality ClearOne s next generation signal processing algorithms Field proven conferencing technology Flexible configuration and expandability Improved configuration and management software simplified programming Reduced installation times Best in class processing speed ClearOne s world class customer service technical support and field engineering services Common Features The leading edge features common to all products in the CONVERGE Pro family include USB connector on front panel for easy connectivity with a laptop or PC Dual RJ 45 Ethernet ports Dual RJ 45 expansion bus ports TDM Time Division Multiplexed mix minus audio and control buses RS 232
217. e DIGITMAP rule to take effect The MIN_DIGITS token defines the minimum number of digits which MUST be entered once that match rule has been invoked This number must be greater than or equal to the number of digits in the MATCH string The MAX_DIGITS token defines the maximum number of digits which MAY be entered after the match rule has been invoked The completion of the number may be achieved when the maximum number of digits have been entered or the TERMINATION _DIGIT is pressed The MAX_DIGITS parameter MUST be greater than or equal to the MIN_DIGITS parameter The STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS parameter defines the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the complete dial string before it is passed to the underlying stack to be dialed For example if the user entered 1234 and STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS was set to 2 the string passed to the underlying stack for dialing would be 34 The ADD_PREFIX_AFTER_STRIP token defines a set of prefix characters that are to be applied to the beginning of the dial string AFTER the STRIP_FIRST_DIGITS rule has been applied Adding to the previous example if the ADD PREFIK AFTER STRIP were set to 56 and the user entered 1234 the string passed to the underlying stack would be 5634 The DIAL_STRING token defines the address which will be dialed when a number satisfying the MATCH rule is entered The characters amp define a wild card which can be entered to simplify entering multiple rules f
218. e Control Master Unit for SNMP reporting and SMTP email notifications serial Control interactions and Audio Control interactions are not affected by a unit s Control Master designation NOTE All units are Control Slave units by default SNMP In the SNMP section enter the SNMP settings for the site The Control Master nit uses this information to communicate SNMP events including events reported by Control Slave nits NOTE The Installation amp Documentation CD contains SNMP MIB files for each device type for use with third party SNMP management software Email Notifications In the Email Notifications section enter the SMTP Server address in the SMTP Server Address field and the IP address of the server that will receive email notifications in the SMTP Server IP Address field The recipient s email address in the Email Address field 61 User name Passwords In the User name Passwords section click the button for the user type that you want to create The Name Password dialog appears as shown below Admin Name Password E Username Mew password ka Confirm new password EXAALAZA coo NOTE The default user name is clearone The default password is converge User names and passwords are not case sensitive User access privilege levels are as follows e Administrator Full Console and web portal access e Manager Web access to Dialer Maintenance Registration About and Help pages e User Web access to th
219. e Dialer Registration About and Help pages Enter the appropriate user information and press OK to save the user information or Cancel to return to the Site Properties dialog The Time Local tab enables you to configure time settings and specify location information as shown below As shown below you can set the date and time manually synchronize the time with a PC or use network time servers Site Properties Board Room Tine Local Time 2007 Te p ES Time Server 1 Time Server 2 Network Tine 1010124135 Doo 62 In the Time section of the tab select Local Time or Network Time for the clock synchronization source When Local Time is selected the Apply button is activated pressing it updates the date and time on all units in the current site When Network Time is selected you must enter the IP address es for the time synchronization server s The date and time is updated for all units in the site when you press the OK button and it is automatically synchronized with the specified server s Enter location information in the Location section of the tab optional Press OK to save the site file or Cancel to close the Site Properties window For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e Site File Overview e Connect To A Site e Unit Properties e Configuration Mode Overview 63 UNIT PROPERTIES Unit Properties define properties for a specific C
220. e F Filter E M ee Post Process Post Gate 20 20 Group View shows all channels of the same type for a unit in one screen 156 For more information on using AV devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices e Creating AV Devices e Channel Objects e Database Tab e Drag amp Drop Configuration For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Output Settings e Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings e Drag Drop Configuration 157 MATRIX TAB The Matrix Tab is used to route audio to one or more destinations outputs expansion bus processing or fader channels and to create cross points between channels To access the matrix select the Matrix Tab from the Tab Bar in Console _ Converge Console BBD1tal cvp Ele View Add Connect Modes Services Help Boo 77033 SOBSERBLS 0 29 pg ec war kasma I ETE Current Unit Gated A ToExp L ToExp M xp M Process 2 To Exp Process Bi n Procesi E a Process D n Pram E Proce F Process G Process hi ECH Output 6 Mk Power Amp Ml Poner mp 1 Bi Power amp 2 Bi Penner Arp 3 fib Power amp 4 GB Teko Tx i Tetoo Tx E Frocessing Proce A Process E Proce Processes Mode Configuration Ske Data Defoe MN Unk Data Oetauk ME Not Connected MMMM MMMM Ste Ur
221. e Properties Unit Properties Unit Tab Channel Tab Overview Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Output Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Matrix Tab Preset Mode Overview 183 OPTIMIZING GAIN STRUCTURE Optimizing Gain Structure maximizes the signal to noise ratio for each channel optimizes the performance of processing functions and ensures optimal audio quality Use these guidelines when optimizing initial gain structure for a venue Connect all input sources and output devices to the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit s Turn off all processing functions including AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation and Filters Optimize all mic and line inputs that are routed to an output before optimizing the output When optimizing output channels the objective is to match the output to the nominal gain of the input of the device that is connected to the output channel In general turn NOM off when an output channel feeds an amplifier Turn NOM on when optimizing Telco VoIP Tx channels in sound reinforcement applications and when optimizing for video codec configurations After optimizing gain using the procedures below re enable processing functions and NOM as required Optimizing Gain for Mic Input Channels 1 Open the Channel Tab and select the Mic Input on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize as shown below E Conver
222. e highlights for the selected channel as shown above Power Amp Channels CONVERGE Pro 880TA and SR 1212A The CONVERGE Pro 880TA and SR 1212A units are equipped with four 35 watt amplifiers capable of running in either 8 ohm or 70 100 volt modes Each amplifier operates independently to provide maximum flexibility Click the Channel Tab and refer to the Matrix Row The four Power Amp channels are listed after the Outputs click any of the Power Amp channels to access the available options 81 Pre Gain Gain Post Gain Post Process Post Gate 36 Coarse 20 20 hic 1 Input 1 gt 30 5 5 PA Adapt and AEC Reference Power Amp 4 maja TD 0 a g a O bo oD cq ta a oo m ra El l la E a gt le gt s gt e ES oe Post Gain Output Lewel 70 Power Amp 1 f pei Power mp 1 z ka EQ Filter Noh pS 3 4 E IMPED sosa fe ohm Hoise Gate Fo00 aa Options for the selected Power Amp appear below the Matrix row e IMPED Selects the Power Amplifier s impendence Options are 8 ohm and 70 100 volt IMF EO fe ohm 70400 Sound Mask Launches the Sound Mask pane Debug Console ET om Si gt Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes 1 Off Disables the feature 2 Voice Masking operates only in the range usually used when the target audio is vocal 3 Wideband Maskin
223. e lines e VAD Noise Matching Settings are None or Level Default is Level e DTFM Relay This setting emulates normal key tones on a regular phone when used during a call for example to select options from an in call menu e Payload e Codec Priority Negotiates the best possible codec for each call that both sides can utilize both units must have a given codec in order to use it If the codec is not present the next one in the list is tried This process is repeated until the best match is found To use the Priority setting follow the instructions given in the tab Dial Plan f Manual Configuration Manual Send Key je x Total Dial Timer a Minutes Interdigit Timer 30 Seconds First Digit Timer 30 Seconds M Extension Dialing 4 Min Mas e Local Dialing Prefix W Long Distance Dialing Prefix e International Dialing Prefix 4 e Emergency Dialing e Operator Dialing Dial Plan The Dial Plan consists of numbers and pattern digits for any given telephone number Since businesses deal in World wide calling this should consist of country codes access codes area codes and any combination of digits that can be dialed To accommodate this Dial Plans are required e Load from File e Manual Configuration Note After any changes are made CLICK OK to save all changes BEAMFORMING MICROPHONE ARRAY SITE PROPERTIES site Properties for the Beamforming Microphone Array are accessed identically to
224. e the Default Meter on the front panel LED Meter when a channel is not specifically selected Front Panel Mode amp PIN Front Panel Lock Unlock Select Lock in the Front Panel Mode field to lock the front panel LCD of the unit and require a PIN code to unlock it Enter the unlock code in the Front Panel Pin field Select Unlock in the Front Panel Mode field to leave the front panel LCD unlocked Telephone Country Code Select the appropriate Telephone Country Code for your installation 880TA 880T 8401 TH20 models only Unit Properties Comm Communications Tab The Comm tab contains IP protocol selection and address settings as well as serial port configuration settings as shown below Converge BBOTA Unit Properties Device 10 0 IP Settings If you want to use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol select the DHCP checkbox Selecting DHCP disables the remaining IP settings Otherwise enter the IP Address Subnet and Gateway information and DNS Domain Name Server addresses for your installation The default is Use DHCP 68 IP Filters Use IP Filters to enter specific IP addresses that will be allowed to connect to the selected unit You can specify a range of IP addresses by using zeros For example entering 192 168 105 0 will allow any IP addresses in the 192 168 105 1 to 192 168 105 254 range to access the unit Serial Port Settings Select the Serial Port settings Baud Rate and Flow Control that are appropriate f
225. e the window once the Setup Complete indicator has switched from yellow in process to green setup complete e Noise Gate This feature reduces buzz and hum from the amp when the system is on but not in use Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Fiter Limiter Muticharmel Control poe 75 1 Enable Noise Gate Enables or Disables the feature Mode e Adaptive Actively monitors the noise floor of the environment and determines when to enable gating e Manual User sets Threshold Timer Time before the Amp begins gating NOTE The Noise Floor must be at the Threshold Level for the duration set in the Timer in order to enable the Noise Gate Filter e None No filtering is applied to noise e High Pass A High Pass filter is applied to noise before threshold reading e Low Pass A Low Pass filter is applied to Suppress noise before threshold reading e High Low Pass High and Low Pass filtering is applied to noise before threshold reading 87 e Compressor Allows the user to enable compression on an amp channel based on configurable parameters With a few exceptions noted below this feature operates identically to the Processing Compressors Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EG Fiter Limiter Mutichannel Control Enable Compressor Group C Group 4 Group 3 C Group 2 G
226. e value while phone is ringing Command Form DEVICE XRINGERSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Unsigned Short 2 1 5 Null to query in text XRINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test This command plays the current audible ringer melody This command can be used to replace the RINGERTEST command for the R group This command is executable only There is no query Command Form DEVICE XRINGERTEST lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 z XSLVL Speech Level Control This command selects reports the setting of Speech Level Control This command can be used to replace the SLVL command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XSLVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 Oh ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text XSPEEDDIAL Speed Dialing This command dials a speed dial number This command can be used to replace the SPEEDDIAL command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XSPEEDDIAL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 20 R 2 Value Unsigned Short 2 1 20
227. each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control configuration with single command execution 11 CONVERGE Pro VH20 The VH20 enables VoIP call functionality for CONVERGE Pro installations through the addition of a SIP interface The VH20 expansion bus allows you to link to other CONVERGE Pro units and up to 16 VH20 units together for industry leading conferencing capability lt also adds two line level audio inputs and outputs for increased system capacity Advanced Feature Set e SIP Features Dual Proxy Registration Call Features Speedial Redial Network Features DNS VLAN Tagging TLS Encryption for added security Management Features HTTP Server XML Dial Plan SNMP Agent SNTP BootP Services Superior Audio Performance G 722 Wide band audio AGC on line inputs to keep gain levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable Link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control configuration with single command execution Compatibility Interoperability Cisco Avaya Nortel Codian landberg Polycom Accord Radvision MCU 12 CONVERGE Pro SR 1212A The SR
228. ecks Execute Preset Run Macro Service Menu Options Options available on the Services menu include e Dialer e Phonebook e Label Editor e Device Log e Event Log e Firmware Loader e Debug Console e System Checks e Execute Presets e Web Builder 210 DIALER The Dialer provides a software telephone interface for teleconferencing applications NOTE Dialer is only available when Console is connected to a site Accessing Dialer To access the dialer select Dialer from the Services menu press the Dialer E button on the Console Button Bar or press the Dialer button in the Telco Rx or Telco Tx channel screens AZ Converge Console 4 0 30 Untitle File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Sou 7 ce 22 AE Aa 2 Current Unit H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View jols P T R Se ClearOne Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String NOM Mute Gain NC mf a 4 91 TA MMOIODP 2HTACTNIXS lt ICANDOTVO Converge 880TA 1 2 3 0 Event Scheduler Database AV Devices Objects SQ Microphone ee DVD CD El wi Video Codec ad VCR ee Sound Card W Amplifier 4 Loudspeaker Mode Configuration Site Data Default Mi Unit Data Default Ml NotConnected MMMM MMMM Last Macro 0 211 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic _7 Using Dialer When using the dialer the date and time number dialed and call
229. ect operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation NOTE If you stop installation of this driver software Windows will terminate USB device driver installation however Console installation will continue to completion and Console will function properly over IP You will not be able to use Console over USB Follow the instructions that appear on screen to complete installation 10 When Console installation is complete the CONVERGE Console m icon appears on your desktop You can now start Console over IP by double clicking the icon or through the All Programs gt ClearOne Communications gt CONVERGE Console program group in the Windows Start menu 11 To use a USB connection with Console connect USB cables between the PC and the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro device 47 NOTE Windows automatically detects the device and begins the USB device driver installation This process occurs the first time a new CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro modelis connected to the system and once when you switch to a different USB port on the system If you install drivers for a model and subseguently connect another model to the system via USB Windows will repeat the installation process for the new device type 12 When the Found New Hardware Wizard appears select
230. ed gt PBDIAL Dial a PB Entry by Argument This command dials a speed dial number by name There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE PBDIAL lt Channel gt lt Label gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 1R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Label String 16 1 16 chars 284 PHONEBOOKADD Adds an Entry to the Phonebook This command saves an entry in the phonebook There is no query for this command No two entries can share the same label An argument error will be returned if an entry already exists To change an entry you must first delete it and then add it again If label is blank the first 20 characters of the number will be used as the label The Number argument must not be blank If an entry already exists with the assigned speed dial it will be overwritten The entries are alohabetized based on Label Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKADD lt ID Number Label gt Argument Type Size Values speed Dial Unsigned Integer 4 O for not assigned to a speed dial 1 20 Number String 44 1 44 chars 0 9 4 Label string 16 1 16 chars PHONEBOOKCNT Counts Entries in the Phonebook This command queries the number of entries in the phonebook This command is query only Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKCNT lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 20 PHONEBOOKDEL Deletes an Entry in the Phonebook This command deletes an entry in t
231. ee View Tab With someone talking on the phone monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level Optimizing Gain for Telco VolP Tx Channels Optimize Telco VolP Tx outputs using the same procedure as output channels with the following exceptions Select Telco VoIP Tx on the Tree View Tab With someone speaking into the microphones routed to the Telco VoIP Tx monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level NOTE Use a standard handset on the far end because levels can be unpredictable from speaker phones and amplified headsets Optimizing Gain for Output Channels 1 Open the Channel Tab and select the Output Channel on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize as shown below E Converge Cons ala BB0Lal eve sou ide ALA Current Uni HO Converped toT A 00 Mode Corfiguratico Ste Data Dalat MN Unt Data Defaut MN WotComected SUGU Ste Urt CormerpebsoTaDo Device ID 0 2 Optimize the gain level for all mic line and Telco VoIP Rx inputs routed to the selected output channel 3 Adjust the Gain Slider until the average level on the Gain Meter matches the nominal level of the next device in the chain 4 Repeat the above steps for each output channel in the system 185 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics Configuration Mode Overview Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Output Settings AEC Acoustic Ech
232. el Command Form DEVICE MUTE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 120090 bee 16 17 25 2611 UM Ed E TRKD UY Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text NAME Unit Name NETBIOS Name This command sets reports the name of the unit which is also used for its NETBIOS name Command Form DEVICE NAME Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 16 1 15 Characters Null to query in text NCD Noise Cancellation Depth Adjust This command selects reports the depth setting of the Noise Cancellation Command Form DEVICE NCD lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 17 26 M R Z V Value Unsigned Integer 2 6 15 dB Null to query in text NCSEL Noise Cancellation Select This command selects reports the setting of the Noise Cancellation for each microphone channel Command Form DEVICE NCSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 17 26 M R Z V Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text 278 NLP Non Linear Processing Adjust This command selects reports the setting of non linear processing for each microphone channel Command Form DEVICE NLP lt Channel gt V
233. el Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 Chars of O 9 S 302 XOFFA Off Attenuation Mode This command selects reports the off attenuation value of a Mic channel This command can be used to replace the OFFA command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XOFFA lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Float 2 0 00 60 00 Null to query in text XPBDIAL Dial a PB Entry by Name This command dials a speed dial number by name This command can be used to replace the PBDIAL command for the R group There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE XPBDIAL lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Label gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 261 Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 Chars XREDIAL Dial the last number again This command redials the last number This command can be used to replace the REDIAL command for the R group There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE XREDIAL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 20 FR 2 Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 XRING Ring Indication This command indicates a ringing line This
234. el editor to rename objects you can use the label entry fields provided throughout Console To access the label editor select Label Editor from the Services menu or click the Label Editor button on the CONVERGE Button Bar E Label Editor 30 ConvergeB40T 03 10 Convergesen ES S4017 Site Name Microphones Wiz i Sonwerngesa0T F 1 Teko TX Fromep o As shown above the label editor contains one tab for each unit in the currently connected site To modify a label select the unit tab and click on the entry field for the object name that you wish to change When finished click the Ok button to save the changes and close the label editor window For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Services Menu Overview Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Output Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings 215 DEVICE LOG The Device Log captures device events for administration configuration and troubleshooting purposes NOTE The device log can store 256K bytes of data Once this limit is reached the first 128K of data is truncated and logging resumes Accessing Device Log To access the device log select Device Log from the Services menu or click the Device Log button on the Console Button Bar File View Add Connect Modes Services Help A A E 2 Site Selection Stet a Pres Gain _ AEC NC Mute Gate I
235. elco On Off Button LEDs This button connects disconnects the communications line attached to the device while the LEDs indicate the connection status of the attached line 8401 TH20 VH20 VoIP only 8801 88014 In addition to making configuration adjustments from the front panel you can also run macros and execute presets For more information on using front panel controls see Controls and Connections Adjusting LCD Menu Parameters Use the following procedure to adjust LCD Menu parameters Press the Select button to access the CONVERGE Menu Scroll to the parameter you want to adjust using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to select the parameter The parameter will stop flashing when selected Select the value for the parameter using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to save the parameter value To discard the change and return to the previous menu press the Esc button MAA NS NOTE Use the Console software in Configuration Mode for advanced configuration tasks LCD Menu Tree Channels Settings Macros Presets Mics RS 232 L Macros L Presets Inputs Network 1 255 1 32 Outputs DID Process Default Faders Contrast Telco Tx Telco Rx Pwr Amp As shown above the main menus on the LCD display are e Channels e Settings e Macros e Presets 40 LCD Default Display When you power up a CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit the LCD display reads Initializing If an error occurs contact ClearOne Technical Support
236. en Microphones Mode 269 NTPSRV NTP Network Time Server Address 269 NULL Null the Telephone Line 269 OFFA Off AttenuationMode 269 PAA PA Adaptive Mode nuaa aaa 270 PACEN PA Softclipper Enable 270 PAENERGY PA Energy savermode 270 PAEQEN PA EQ FilterEnable 270 PAEQRST PA EQ Filter Reset 271 PAEOSET PAEOFilterSet 271 PAFLT PAFault 271 PAIMPED PA Output Impedance 271 PALEN PA Limiter Enable Cie PALT PA Limiter Threshold 272 PANGAT PA Noise Gate Activation Timer 2ra PANGEN PA Noise Gate Enabled 272 PANGF PA Noise Gate Filter 272 PANGM PA Noise Gate
237. en for that channel allowing you to modify the channel label and change channel configuration settings as needed Input Routing To route an input to an output click in the routing matrix at the intersection between the input and the output A mic input can be designated as gated yellow non gated blue or pre AEC brown by clicking repeatedly in the cross point All other input cross points will be colored green Expansion Bus I Z Routing Audio from any unit on the E bus network can be placed on the bus or taken off the bus and routed to any destination within the unit All models have 18 digital mix minus buses e S Z Buses These eight audio buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the network These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required e I R Buses These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOM count and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses By default all microphones are routed to the O bus 159 Process A D 840T and Process A H 880 880T 880TA 8i 212 SR 1212A Routing There are four processing channels on the CONVERGE Pro 8401 eight on the 880 8801 880TA 8i and eight on the CONVERGE SR 1212 and SR 1212A Proces
238. en move the slider to the desired gain settings Recv Boost adds up to 12dB of gain to the signal adjustable in 3dB increments from OdB to 12dB The default is Off Recv Input Meter Reow Input 20 20 dBu The Receive Input meter displays the dB level of the incoming Telco signal prior to any signal processing 129 NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters NC Button HC gt Clicking the Noise Cancellation button opens the Channel Property Configuration Telco VolP RX window with the NC tab selected allowing you to configure noise cancellation settings To use noise cancellation click Enable Noise Canceller then adjust the Cancellation Depth to the setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity for your installation The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from 6dB to 15dB The default is 6dB The noise canceller default is Off ClearEffect Button To reduce bandwidth requirements telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300HzZ 3 3kHz ClearEffect enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wdeband audio by adding high and low frequencies to the audio signal Click the ClearEffect button to toggle this feature on and off The default is On ALC Button Clicking the Automatic Level Control button toggles ALC on and off ALC provides auto leveling for all conference call participants on the Telco VoIP Rx line keeping s
239. er current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H e 125 Kie xido e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 840 Converge Pro 840T 4 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and 10W Amplifier 334 CONVERGE PRO 8l Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features e Number of Open Microphones NOM e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Last Mic Mode e Maximum of Mics Mode e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features e 36x24 matrix e 12 analog in out e 12 expansion bus in out e 8
240. er parameters to devices on IP based networks See also Default Gateway and Subnet Mask Dial Tone Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels that allows you to adjust the dial tone level in 1dB steps to 12dB DNS Domain Name System Part of the IP protocol suite DNS manages the translation of plain text internet domain names URLs into numeric IP addresses DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialing DIMF or touch tone dialing allows users to issue tones for access to voice mail pagers etc DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels used to adjust the level volume of the DIMF tones that are heard when dialing Level can be adjusted in 1dB steps to 12dB EC Echo Canceller Reference A signal that contains an electronic copy of all signals which will be removed from the signal the mics pick up This is always the far end audio and optionally local audio sources EC Echo Canceller Reference Summing The ability to combine multiple signals in a single echo cancellation reference signal See also Virtual Reference ERL Echo Return Loss The ERL meter shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller the ratio of the two levels ERLE Echo Return Loss Enhancement The echo return loss enhancement ERLE meter shows the loss through the echo cancellation and NLP non linear processing chain
241. ers include e Telephone Echo Return Loss TERL This meter shows the amount of echo loss from the telephone line to the unit e Telephone Echo Return Loss Enhancement TERLE This meter shows the enhancement added by the telephone hybrid to reduce echo below the audible level Total Telephone Echo Reduction TTER This meter shows the sum of TERL and TERLE e Transmit Input This meter shows the audio level input from the matrix to the telephone line e Transmit Output This meter shows the transmit audio level output to the telephone line e Receive Input This meter shows the audio level input received from the telephone line e Receive Output This meter shows the receive audio level output to the matrix Dialer The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer allowing you to place conference calls 128 See the Dialer topic for more information on using the dialer and its features Dial Tone Level Slider Dial Tone Level 12 6 p 0 h ae 0 0 dB The Dial Tone Level slider allows you to set dial tone gain using the slider or selector box The default is zero Range is 12dB to 12dB in 1dB increments Recv Boost Slider The Receive Boost slider allows you to set the gain for the incoming Telco VoIP Rx signal This is typically used for low level telephone lines allowing the signal to be boosted to an acceptable level of performance To use Receive Boost check the Recv Boost check box th
242. ert to insert the current command line into the row directly above the currently selected command 2 line in the table 3 When you are finished making changes click Save or Save As to save the macro 167 Running Macros Running Macros Using Console Use the following procedure to run a Macro from Console H 1 Select the Macro tab from the Console main screen or press the Run Macro button on the button bar only available when Console is in Configuration mode 2 Select the macro from the Select Macro list 3 Click Run to run the macro and close the window Running Macros Using the Front Panel Use the following procedure to run a macro from the front panel Using the Menu Dial select the Macros Menu 2 Select the macro you want to run from list and press the Select button 3 Answer Yes when prompted to run the macro or No to cancel Running Macros Using Control Devices Refer to the Control Tab topic for information on running macros using control devices Exporting Macro Objects Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them To capture a macro and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu For more information about objects see Creating Channel Objects Matrix Objects Control Objects and Drag amp Drop Configuration For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these relate
243. es or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output Command Form DEVICE DEVICETYPE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 23 1 0 M D Value Unsigned Integer 2 NULL to query in text DFLTM Default Meter This command selects reports the setting of the default meter on the front panel Command Form DEVICE DFLTM Channel Group Position Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels ji Null to query in text Group Group 1 112 3 716 111 0 M L TR Position Meter Type 2 1 4 as applicable for group see Meter Type Definitions DIAG Diagnostic Commands This command is used to return status and diagnostic information It is intended to be used as a text command only This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE DIAG lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 List of current commands Short J Power Amp 1 Fan Temp i 2 Noise Gate 3 Feedback Nodes Information String 80 Diagnostic String ALWAYS NULL IN TEXT DIAL DTMF Dialing This command dials a DIMF sequence or reports back the last sequence dialed Command Form DEVICE DIAL lt Channel gt Number Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Gr
244. est a particular tone click Test after you have selected the tone Note VH20 Units have five selectable ring types Telco Adaptation Some applications require the unit to adapt to line conditions using a white noise burst Noise rather than automatically Auto The default is Auto Not used in VolP Settings Hook Flash Sends a momentary interruption in the line seizure allowing activation of options such as 3 way Calling call waiting and call hold This feature is dependent on the services offered by your telephone company You can set the duration of the hook flash using the slider or the selector box Range is 50ms to 2 seconds in 10ms steps The default is 250ms DTMF Level This feature allows you to adjust the DTMF tone level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level of OdB to plus or minus 12dB in 1dB increments The default is OdB Audible Ring Indication When this feature is enabled an audible ring is heard for incoming calls The level adjustment allows you to customize the level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level O default to plus or minus 12dB in 1dB increments The default is OcB Audible Hook Indication When the unit goes off hook connects a beep is injected into the receive channel and transmit channel of the unit When the unit goes on hook disconnects
245. et Menu on the Front Panel Using control programming and external control devices such as the closure contacts on a room partition Using macros Using serial commands via a Telnet session or via RS 232 HAN NOTE Presets only run on the current unit shown in the site pane However you can execute a preset on a unit connected to the Expansion Bus by using a macro Executing Presets Using Console m Select Execute Preset from the Services menu or press the Execute Preset IP button on the button bar Select the preset you want to execute from the Execute Preset dialog that appears and press the Execute button Execute Preset Select Preset Execute Cancel NOTE When executing presets in Console the software assumes a preset execution flag value of 2 meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off Executing Presets Using the LCD Preset Menu Press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Presets and press the Select button The Preset Menu appears as shown below NOTE When executing presets from the LCD Preset menu Console assumes a preset execution flag value of 2 meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display 1 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute 2 Press the Select button 3 Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected
246. et changes and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current preset and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu To apply a preset object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode 191 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Database Tab Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Matrix Tab Control Tab Macro Tab Preset Mode Overview 192 PRESET MODE Preset Mode allows you to create and modify presets To execute presets Console must be in Configuration Mode There are 32 presets available in Console Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet the challenges of changing conference room requirements These changes include audio routing gating muting levels AEC referencing and signal processing as well as room combining and room configuration Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress This topic covers e Preset Configuration Tabs e Creating Presets e Executing Presets e Preset Execution Flags e Preset Control Masking e Preset Storage Space Considerations e Expor
247. etone e be a ORES REDE Ea VAA PRR ER GRR SRE ee AAA 187 HS Sa WA go oo wee AA Wey a nm aa conde eg SUR BSE aR elt te te te ER AER Hos eo S 193 File Menu Overview nee eee es 200 III see sees ea Gero FEE OE es ee a ee eee eee eee oes 202 View Menu venere 203 POG WCU erro oo ERE aio Ow GR BH aS E OD Oe Ie es 205 Connect Menu Overview namana naanza nana 208 Modes Menu OvVeVieW manono nanma nawa anaaaa nawa 209 Servic s MENU OVEIMIEW 5 66404444 AAA AWA EEES EPEE 210 POET AAA AA KWAA KAA WA AR IRA RE Ge eA RAN a eli ses A II 213 Esla ECNOl AAA MTI E ADAH OS OAS Ee 215 ye MOG IA IAA IIIA KIA KIAINA KUA Gee wa Aa 216 Ee BOG eaan rea aE a aaa EA ARREA A E 219 Web Bulder eee eee eee eee es 221 FA WA AI erat did EEE A a ie Ol oe A aod Oak IAA RETA 226 Bo e MASSA 230 e Midis See ape ab E KAA UWA UA He EEE RE OE ORS ERO ae 236 APPENDIX A APPLICATION PROGRAMMER S INTERFACE 238 We and Device DS 2 cus bene beh ances ure rr rare Hada eR eee een ene e ede eee ee 238 CONVENIOS ie santa a ee YA nn es Pe We ee nen ke a eo a Sa e 238 Command Form Description u 238 Eje e AS 239 Meter Type Definitions Taple wananaa nawa 240 Seal COMMAS is ee rere sa kee yea ee oh oo Eie oe oe A ee ee ee OR oe Oa eee ERS 247 se al Command Support Table lt 2 24 2 e00446 5500 riri pee eee eS ee Eo eee eae eee EERE BE pii 309
248. ettings enable you to customize telephone transmit channel settings using the Channel screen Accessing Telco VolP Tx Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the Telco VoIP Tx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane _ Converge Console BEDLa1 cwg Fic vew Add Connect Modes Services Help Zou FT Ee 23 SOBRE 0129 wa J comer Marc AEC Raterence macro cating contro swing Evert Schecter Database Current Unit HO Convergold0T A 00 nde Corfiguraicn Ste Data Dakar IE Und Data Defaut WI Not Connected MMMM MEE Ste Lea Corverps6BOTAOO Device ID 0 Converge Console 3 0 1 Untitled 1 cnv lt New gt File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Soa TT 001323 ENBERE 919 Ste Selection Uni Channel Matrix AEC Reference Gating Control seis y Current Unit DEE E0 CONVERGEVH20 0 Site View Tree View Event Scheduler Database BB Vor Rx Output 15 E0 CONVERGEVH20 0 WA Vor Tx 5 Line VoIP Rx O voip Rx Output VoIP Tx Voip TX Output Level 20 Dialer Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default W NotConnected MMMM MAMAR Last Macro 0 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGEYH20 0 Device ID 0 138 As shown above the Center Pane displays a signal flow diagram for the Telco VolP Tx channel real time peak level meters as well as the channel routing matrix which shows the audio routing
249. evel 249 DUPDATE DownloadUpdate 249 DVER Command Dictionary VersiOnN 249 ENETADDR Ethernet Port IP Address 249 ENETDHCP Ethernet DHCP Selection 250 ENETDNSA2 Ethernet DNS Server Address 2 250 ENETDNSA Ethernet DNS Server Address 250 ENETDNS Ethernet DNS Selection 250 ENETDOMAIN Ethernet Domain Argument 250 ENETGATE Ethernet Default Gateway Address 250 ENETSUBN Ethernet Subnet Mask 250 ENETVLAN Enable VLAN Tagging 251 ENETVLANID VLANID na 251 ENETVLANPRI VLAN Priority 251 EREF Expansion Bus Reference 251 EVENT Run ScheduledEvent 251 FEB Feedback EliminationBandwidth 25
250. f the unit This command is read only Command Form DEVICE VER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value string 8 Version of format MM mm rr Sent with a Null in text value returned XAA Auto Answer Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of auto answer This command can be used to replace the AA command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XAA lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 XAAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode Values Units See Groups and Channels 14 26 RZ z O Off 1 On 2 loggle Null to query in text This command selects reports the setting of adaptive ambient This command can be used to replace the AAMB command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XAAMB lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 296 Values Units See Groups and Channels 3 29 M V 0 Off 1 On 2 loggle Null to query in text XAMBLVL Ambient Level Adjust This command selects reports the ambient level This command can be used to replace the AMBLVL command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XAMBLVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Signed Float 2 80 00 0 00 dB Null to query in text XAARINGS Number of Rings t
251. from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way Such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Use the mains plug to disconnect the apparatus from the AC mains The mains plug shall remain readily operable On Off switch located on the front panel of the CONVERGE Pro 880TA and SR 1212A does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains To completely disconnect unit power from the AC mains disconnect the unit s power cord from the mains socket To reconnect power plug the unit s power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines Caution Danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Battery should only be replaced by qualified personnel and is not intended as a user serviceable part Do not expose batteries or battery pack to excessive heat such as prolonged sunlight fire or other heat sources Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock This product can interfere with electrical equipment such as
252. g e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 1620 4 12s X179 e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 881 Converge Pro 880T 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and 10W Amplifier 330 CONVERGE PRO 880TA Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22kHz 1 dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max Gain e Rs 150 ohm e THD Noise lt 02 e Dynamic Range gt 105 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 db re 20dBu Y 20 kHz channel to channel Audio Mixer Parameters e Number of Open Microphones e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Maximum of Mics e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate e Chairman Override e 96 Total Microphones per site e 6 Global Gating Groups e 4 Internal Gating Groups Matrix Mixing Parameters e 8 Microphone Analog Inputs e 4 Analog Line Inputs e 8 Analog Line Outputs e 4 Power A
253. g operates throughout the audible range of the unit 83 e Filter Filters selected from the Power Amp channel are only applied to the amplifier Otherwise they operate in any combination consistent with the Processing channel filters Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Fitter Limiter Mufichannei Control Fiters Processing Channels Remaining snow a B Tabis view ser ee Bypass AN Remove Fiter 4 Acton i i 84 Feedback Launches the Feedback window Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Deer fee e This feature allows you to reduce feedback through a simple configuration window 1 Enable Feedback Cancellation Enables or Disables the feature 2 Automatic Setup Creates notch filters based on your choice of Feedback Cancellation settings Target Gain Before Feedback Set your desired dB rating The unit slowly increases dB adding notch filters at detected feedback frequencies until it either reaches the target level or reaches the number of Fixed Filters specified in the Filter Settings Number of Fixed Filters The system detects feedback through an open mic while levels are increased If the target is reached without using the specified number of fixed filters the remaining slots are used as Dynamic Filters to be applied as the environment changes Feedback Controls Y e Reset Feedb
254. ge 312124 Device ID 0 Cancel Connection options include e To automatically create a new site file select the Create New Document and Connect to Site radio button e To pull data from the unit to the current Site File select the Pull Data from Unit to Current Document radio button only available if a site file is open e To push data from the current site file to the unit select the Connect to Site and Push Document radio button only available if a site file is open the unit is added e To connect via USB select the USB Connection radio button e To connect via IP select the IP Connection radio button and select a unit from the Available Addresses drop down list or enter an IP address in the Enter Address entry box Press the Connect button to connect to the site or Cancel to close the dialog NOTE The default login user name is ClearOne The default password is CONVERGE User names and passwords are not case sensitive To disconnect from a site press the Disconnect button on the Console Button Bar or select Disconnect from the Connect menu Answer Yes to the Confirm dialog that appears or No to cancel 58 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e Site File Overview e Site Properties e Unit Communication IP Settings SITE PROPERTIES Site Files are created and modified using the Site Properties window in Console Site files contain all information about
255. ge Console B 0ta1 crg sou TIO 23 UWA AA Mode Configatico Ste Data Defaut Unk Data Defaut Ml Not Connected MMM MMMM Ste Unit CorvergeEB0TADO Device ID 0 Have somebody repeat a test count at a normal distance from the microphone generally this would be seated at the conference table or positioned for a video teleconference Adjust the Coarse Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain Meter are close to 6dB just hitting yellow and the average level is close to OdB Adjust the Fine Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain Meter are as close to 6dB and the average level is as close to OdB as possible Repeat the above steps for each mic input in the venue NOTE The Post Gain Meter is a peak meter If the meter remains green the level may be too low If it peaks into red clipping occurs 184 Optimizing Gain for Line Input Channels Line inputs are optimized using the same procedure as mic inputs with the following exceptions Select the Line Input you want to optimize on the Tree View Tab With the line source connected monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level NOTE Line sources including video codecs consumer grade CD players DVD players and VCRs commonly require 10 12 dB of gain to bring their levels up to O dBu Optimizing Gain for Telco VolP Rx Channels Optimize Telco VolP Rx inputs using the same procedure as mic inputs with the following exceptions Select Telco VolP Rx on the Tr
256. ge840T 03 9 Line Site View Tree View i i G Telco Rx 30 Converges40T 0 A ae 48 Output z GQ Telco Tx Mic lt A aT as z anes 8 Processing dE 0 o A EG ELA i Fader EN Input 4 EE A A A pa y Line KI Input 5 N Input 6 O Gated 2 ne Non Gated my TW MP Pre sec EQ Telco Rx crosspoint Gp Telco RX a 0 Output f Output ew Output 1 pa u Output2 01 Output 3 NOM Output 4 mi Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E fa Telco Tx Telco TK Processing BD Process A R Process B B Process Q Process D fh Fader H Fader 1 MH Fader 2 v m B paapeg Zaapes r gaapey o paapey g ssaand gt 9 ssasud o q ssa0lg o o o a o yee gt a lo Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default Wi NotConnected SMM MRR Sie Board Room Unit Converge840T 03 Device ID 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the Filter tab selected as shown below 102 Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Fitter AGCIALC Gating j i Hz Phase Add Filter Filters Remaining Table View Bypass All Remove Filter 4 The following sections describe how to configure and activate input channel filters Use the Active Filter drop down list to select among active filters Selecting a filter highlights its node on the graph and displays its current settings Y
257. gn a compressor to a compressor group such as a group of two compressors configured for left and right stereo channels the compressors will monitor each other When one channel compresses all compressors in the group compress together A compressor group must be configured for a single unit a group cannot control compressors from multiple units Post Compressor Gain Adjust the compressor gain with the slider or by using the Up Down arrow buttons The graph reflects the input output decibel levels with the gain ratio and threshold settings you select Threshold Determines the RMS level at which the compressor begins to operate The range is from 30 to 20dBu The default is OdBu Ratio Changes the rate of compression applied to the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level The range Is 1 1 to 1 20dB The default is 1 1 Attack sets the time increment used to reduce the signal from input level to the prescribed output level when the threshold is exceeded The range is O to 100ms in 5ms steps The default is 10ms Release sets the time increment used to restore the signal to the input level when the signal drops below the threshold The range is 100ms to 2 seconds in 5ms increments The default is 500ms 148 Input Meter Shows the level of the signal as it enters the compressor Compression Meter Shows the instantaneous compression value at a given time Gain Slider amp Process Meter Process 30 5 20
258. graded Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel Upgrading from 2 X Firmware Ts Go Remove any 1 X 3 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 2 X units Re connect to the 2 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units The units will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware The 2 X to 4 X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade Units are fully upgraded Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel Upgrading from 3 X Firmware ja DARN Remove any 1 X 2 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 3 X units Re connect to the 3 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units The units will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware Units are fully upgraded Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel The units have been upgraded Reconnect all expansion bus cables if needed to complete the stack of units 228 NOTE All CONVERGE Pro units in the site must be running firmware 4 X to be compatible with the Beamforming Microphone Array Follow the appropriate procedure above to update the firmware on the CONVERGE Pro units Connect the expansion bus cable between the CONVERGE Pro unit and the Beamforming Mi
259. gt Value Min Max Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel see GroupAndChannels Group Value Signed Short 2 65 00 20 00 Null to query in text NA Max Signed Short 2 65 00 20 00 JB 274 MCMUTE Multi Channel Min and Max Gain Setting This command performs reports audio mutes of the grouped channels Command Form DEVICE MCMUTE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 i Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 1 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Value Unsigned Char 1 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text MCRAMP Multi Channel Ramp This command performs audio gain ramps of the grouped channels There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE MCRAMP lt Channel gt lt Multi Channel Group gt lt Rate gt lt Target gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 i Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Rate Signed Integer 2 50 50 If value 0 the ramp will stop dB If value lt O the gain will ramp down sec If value gt 0 the gain will r
260. h as the conversion of the signal between analog and digital formats select the Enable Delay checkbox to enable it Calibrate the amount of delay using the Length and Temperature configuration controls Length is defined as the distance between the source and audience The Calculated Delay reading reflects any changes you make in the Distance and Temperature fields Click Close to save changes and return to the Process Channel window Pressing the Cmprs button opens the Channel Property Configuration window with the Compressor tab selected as shown below 147 Channel Property Configuration Process A Filter Delay Compressor Enable Compressor Group Group 4 C Group 3 C Group 2 C Groupi None 30 Compression 050 20 25 18 10 3 5 3 20 40 0 0 dB Input level M Threshold m a 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 y l et i all l RAN teat Se Post Cmprs Gain gt Output level 1 Release 100 480 860 1240 1620 2000 l l 500 ms select the Enable Compressor checkbox to activate the compressor Using the compressor you can change the gain transfer characteristics of the signal path and control the dynamics of a signal Compressor settings are described below Group Use the Group radio buttons to assign this compressor to a compressor group The default is None When you assi
261. haracter combinations provide basic functionality in Command String syntax e la alert e b backspace e f form feed e n newline e r carriage return e t horizontal tab e lv vertical tab e backslash Type a command string in the Command 0 through Command 7 text boxes in the center pane of the Control Tab Alternatively you can copy an existing string from any source then right click in a Command entry box and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears 175 Running Command Strings Console stores the commands strings created in the Control tab for subsequent execution via the STRING serial command You can execute the STRING command in macros using control pin programming in the Event scheduler and from the Control Console page of the Web Builder tab Using macros also enables you to execute command strings from external control devices See the Control Tab topic for more information For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e Controls and Connections e Front Panel e Control Status Port e Gating Tab e Macro Tab e Event Scheduler e Control Tab 176 EVENT SCHEDULER TAB The Event Scheduler allows you to schedule commands for execution at a specific time events Using the event scheduler you can schedule single events or recurring events that are executed at pre defined time intervals Accessing the Event Scheduler To schedule events press t
262. he Event Scheduler Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Site1 cny Zou 77 00 as SOESUMee one PA es Cerca ANT Command Editor HO CONVERGESSOTA 0 Command Desorption Argument Description Mo command specified Hal vaid AO CON VERGESRDT AO gt Ra Mic 7 i j enone Time Scheduler Start Dade J Time 12A 92008 a milan i Event Recurrence aida Ter Scheduled Events Event ID i u g Oe Re L Mode Configuration Ske Data Defaut IN Unt Data Defauk BN Not Connected MMMM MMMM kasia Lax Preset 0 Ske Stew Units CONYERGEBSOTA O Device ID Scheduling Events Events must be scheduled and run on the local device However commands can be sent from events to other devices in the site using Macros Use the following procedure to schedule events 1 In the Command Editor section of the screen select command from the Command drop down list The command description appears in the Command Description box parameters appear next to the Command drop down list and the valid values for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box Command Editar Command Description AA state of ihe swiety mite Value io sed thee state do 011 1 fo sed the state toon end 2 fo loge Eh Stabe a 177 5 6 The commands available for event scheduling include e MACRO Executes a macro e PRESET Executes a preset e RESET Resets the specified device e SFTYMUTE Mutes all ch
263. he phonebook There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKDEL lt Label gt Argument Type Size Values Label string 16 1 16 chars PHONEBOOKREAD Queries the Phonebook by Index This command queries an entry in the phonebook This command is query only Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKREAD lt Index gt Speed Number Label Argument Type Size Values Index Unsigned Integer 2 O 19 Must be less than the Number of Phone Book Entries Speed Dial Unsigned Integer 2 O for not assigned to a speed dial 1 20 NULL to query in text Number String 44 1 44 chars 0 9 4 Label String 16 1 16 chars PP Phantom Power This command selects reports the setting of phantom power Command Form DEVICE PP lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text 285 Units Units Units Units Units PRESET Preset Execution Reporting This command selects reports the state of a preset Command Form DEVICE PRESET lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 0 Binary Null Text Query Last Preset Ran f See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 13 S Value Unsigned Integer 2 O Set preset state to off 1 Set state to on and execute if not already on 2 Execute and return state to off Null to query current state in text PRGSTRING P
264. he unit Command Form DEVICE SIGTOUT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Disable 1 30 Min Null to query in text 291 SLVL Speech Level Control This command selects reports the setting of Speech Level Control Command Form DEVICE SLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0n 2 Toggle Null to query in text SMTPSRV SMTP Mail Server Address Units This command selects reports the IP address of the SMTP Mail server and the Email Address the unit s SMTP client sends messages to Command Form DEVICE SMTPSRV Value Address Argument Type Size Values Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text 0 0 0 0 Clears IP and String Address String 40 1 40 characters Null to query in text SNMPMNGRIP SNMP Manager Host IP Address This command selects reports the IP address of the SNMP Manager Command Form DEVICE SNMPMNGRIP Value Argument Type Size Values Value IP Address 4 IP Address of SNMP Manager to send Traps to Null to query in text SNMPMNGRPORT SNMP Manager Notification Port This command selects reports the SNMP Trap port for SNMP Manager Command Form DEVICE SNMPMNGRPORT Value Argument Type Size Values Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 255 Null to query in text SNMPREADCOMM SNMP Read Community String This command selects reports the SN
265. hilet lt RT T EX 20 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l an o LL ra 0 0 de Use the Gain Slider to establish the gain level for this processing channel Range is 65 to 20dB The Process Meter shows the signal level when a signal is present Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the Min and Max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the Min Max levels provided relative gain commands are used Channel Routing Matrix The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Process A in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Dated Non Gated Pre aec o Crosspoint Aise Process 4 i Dela Cmprs Mute per A A s 30 dBi Process A miim aiiim a mtii 65 PSF VA A AS Gain j 2 Process 4 Lndmol z ndo g papo o t ndo 5 pudo a a pidyng 1 papo g pdo o p dwgaanod z dugaanog ro g duanag o t duanag kd x oaa a akg oy 2 de 01 gt aq 01 2 ay 01 gt aq oy a dol lt lt do
266. his command selects reports the microphone or expansion bus reference channel to be used for adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE AVR CHANNEL GROUP Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 M 1 8 E 1 18 Null to query in text Group Group 1 3 6 M or E AVRT Adaptive Volume Ratio This command sets the ratio at which gain will be automatically applied based upon the ambient level in the reference microphone Example A 1 1 setting would apply 1 dB of gain for every 1dB rise in ambient level of the reference microphone up to the Max Gain setting Command Form DEVICE AVRT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 QS 2 1 11 241 2 Ratio Null to query in text AVT Adaptive Volume Threshold This command sets the level at which the adaptive volume algorithm will be activated This value is referenced to the noise floor of the channel and the target above ambient for the adaptive volume to reach Command Form Device AVT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Short 2 80 00 to 0 00 Null to query in text BAUD Baud Rate This command selects reports the baud rate of the serial port Command Form DEVICE BAUD Value Argument Type Si
267. his command sends reports the use of an audible ring Command Form DEVICE RINGEREN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text RINGERLVL Audible Ring Level This command selects reports the audible ring s level Command Form DEVICE RINGERLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text RINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection This command sends reports the audible ring melody Command Form DEVICE RINGERSEL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 S Null to query in text 288 Units Units Units Units RINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test This command plays the current audible ringer melody This command is executable only There is no query Command Form DEVICE RINGERTEST lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 RINGMOD Ring Cadence Mode This command sets the ring cadence to either standard mode or custom mode The cadence can be set using the RINGON and RINGOFF commands The country code should be set first using
268. how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party JAPANESE COMPLIANCE The DC resistance of the PSTN line is restricted to 1700 397 1373 Ohms 350 MA A APPENDIX F PROVISIONING THE CONVERGE VH20 PROVISIONING THE CONVERGE VH20 Overview This document describes the process of configuring a CONVERGE VH20 using configuration files and compares this to the use of the CONVERGE Console software Automatic Provisioning By default the VH20 is configured to automatically get provisioning information from a TFTP server defined by the DHCP server This power on default behavior can be changed to configure from a different TFTP server or to stay with current settings These changes can be made through the Console software by changing the network settings for ENETTFTPIP for the TFTP IP address or ENETPROV for selecting source for provisioning If provisioning has been enabled at boot time two files will be requested from the TFTP server These files are named as follows CLROVoipContfig txt and CLROVoipConfig MAC address txt where MAC address is the 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address of the VH20 to be configured Thus the first file can contain settings general to all units and the second file can contain unique settings specific to a unit NOTE Although the settings configuration file may appear to be well formed XML it MUST adhere to the formatting as defined in this example Parameter settings CANNOT be spread across
269. hrough your Network Administration e Display Name Hostname The name assigned to the specific unit This name is configured within the CONVERGE Console software Proxy 1 Proxy 2 Proxy 1 and Proxy 2 are identical and used as redundancy items e SIP Authentication Enables SIP Authentication from the Network e Authorization User User name assigned for network authorization e Authorization Password Password assigned for network authorization e SIP Proxy Registration e User Domain e Default e Proxy e Domain Name e Proxy IP Address URL Enter the IP address URL of the proxy server e Proxy Port Enter the port number for the proxy server e Outbound Proxy Enable this feature to use a proxy outside or alongside a firewall e Proxy IP Address URL Enter the IP address URL of the proxy server e Proxy Port Enter the port number for the proxy server e SIP Transport Set transport settings here e UPD Listen Port Specify the UPD Listen Port e TCP Listen Port Specify the TCP Listen Port e TLS Listen Port Primarily used by Avaya systems the TLS Listen Port is specified here e Private Key Click the Browse button to upload your Private Key file 70 Local Cert Click the Browse button to upload your Local Certificate file e CA Certs Use the Add or Del buttons to add or remove CA Certs Timers Timers are used to keep SIP sessions alive on the network Normally default values are appropriate Occasionally your Network Administrator may
270. ich are described in the sections below 109 Gating Settings Auto Gating The upper section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains the gating controls for Auto Gating as shown below Gale Settings Settings Ambient Tracking Processing Functions 1508 Gate Ratio Adaptive Ambient I Chairman Override a 0 3 sec Hold Time Auto Gating C 12 008 Ofi Aiterustion Manual F PA Adoptive Mode SE ae ip aa PA and AEC Reference ag rai Output E xi Auto Gating Settings Gate Ratio Specifies how much louder than the ambient level the audio level must be before the channel automatically gates on The gate ratio range is from O to 50dB The default is 15dB Hold Time Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the audio falls below the Gate Ratio threshold The hold time range is from 1 to 8 0 seconds The default is 3 seconds Off Attenuation Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is gated off The range is from 0 to 60dB The default is 12dB Decay Rate Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires The default is Medium NOTE Changing Hold Time Off Attenuation and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Manual Gating Auto Gating Ambient Tracking e Adaptive Ambient Adjusts the ambient reference level as noise and room conditions change When Adaptive Ambient is on the mic channel monitors the ambient noise level on the input and adjusts the
271. icrophones This command selects reports the maximum number of microphones for a Gating Group Command Form DEVICE MMAX lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 G Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Unlimited 1 8 Maximum of Mics Null to query in text MODEL Model Identification Label This command selects reports the model identification label of the specified channel Command Form DEVICE MODEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Reserved gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1237 i lI O M L D Reserved Unsigned 2 0 Integer Label String 16 1 16 characters CLEAR clear the label dB Null to query in text 276 MTRX Matrix Routing This command selects reports the matrix routing of an input to an output Command Form DEVICE MTRX lt Src Ch gt lt Src Gp gt lt Dest Ch gt lt Dest Gp gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Source Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Source Group Group 1 13 5 6 7 12 124 2020 ji I M P E L F R K Z U V Destination Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Destination Group Group 1 2 9 Oy 12 16 20 25 26 i med O R ER 7 By KD Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Cross point off 1 Cross point on Not Valid for Mic Sources 2 Toggle Not Valid for Mic Sources 3 Non Gated Mic Sources Only 4 Gated
272. imum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously e First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is gated on e Last Mic Mode Sets the last activated mic to Last On Mic 1 8 or Off Gating Groups A set of gating parameters which can be applied to microphones connected to the local device or to microphones connected to other units on the Expansion Bus Global Gating Groups A D Gating groups provide greater flexibility and control of mics See also Global Gating Bus and Expansion Bus Global Gating Bus Part of the Expansion Bus these ten mix minus buses I R pass mic status and gate parameter information such as First Mic Priority and NOM Number of Open Mics See also First Mic Priority and NOM GPIO General Purpose Input Output GPIO enables external devices to access the Converge Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes via the Control Status A and B ports All Converge Pro devices connected via the Expansion Bus can be controlled from a single Control Status port on any of the devices Hold Time The length of time that a microphone remains on after the voice input level drops below the gate ratio This can be used to prevent the microphone from gating off during brief pauses in speech HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Part of the Internet protocol suite HTTP
273. in Mute MATRIX Gain Pres T Telco TX Telco RX mue g 1 _Jooe BN Telco TX Jon jon Audio TX From Exp O oO o Exp O om Exp F P o Exp F om Exp Q a o Exp Q a XD R R kE o Exp E 0 XD 5 5 o Exp 5 a xD T 0 CD om Exp y o Bp L 0 xo W W xo Y om Exp X x SP O Exp A T xp Y Y oO XD Y ro XD y DO CXD E xD 0 END rom Exp J o Exp om Exp K B o Exp TY T 7 M T T 7 om Exp f N A P Processing RX Processing TX Process A A Process A Process B 8 8 E Process B Process C UD E Process C Process D e O Process D F Fader RX Pres Fader TX A Fader 2 2 E A Fader 2 Fader 3 3 i Fader 3 Fader 4 A Wl Fader 4 Pointing to a fader channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white Shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree View 0000 80 Fader 1 Set the desired gain settings for the fader channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle mute on and off by clicking the associated Mute LED Button To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on Channel Label or number or letter of the channel next to the matrix 80 Expansion Audio RX and TX MM MIC Line Fres AEC HC Mute Ga
274. in the AV Devices Tree then click the New button on the Database Button Bar The configuration options for that type of device appear on the AV Devices Tab in the Center Pane For example the configuration options for a new Video Codec device are shown below 180 Name the new device using the Name field Enter other information as needed adjust the configuration controls to optimize device performance and click the Save button to save the changes The new device now appears in the AV Device Tree as shown below NOTE The AV Device Tree is also available when the Unit Tab is selected making all pre defined and custom AV Devices available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue Channel Objects Channel objects allow you to save pre defined configurations for a channel such as an Output channel To access objects select the Objects tab in the center pane The Object Tree appears in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen as shown below 181 Available channel object types include Mic Input Line Input e Telco VolP Rx e Output e Telco VoIP Tx e Processing e Fader Channels To create a new channel object select an object type in the Object Tree and click the New button Enter a name for the object in the Name field adjust the channel configuration controls to optimize channel performance for your application and press the Save button The new channel object appears in the Object Tree along with all othe
275. in the site is turned on Help Opens the context sensitive help system provides software and firmware version information 51 Tab Bar Tabs available on the Tab Bar include e Site e Unit e Channel e Matrix e AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference for SR 1212 SR 1212A e Macro e Gating e Control e String Event Scheduler Database Clicking a tab displays the screen for that tab in the Console Center Pane Site Pane Site Selection Board Room tl Current Unit Current Unit 34 Converqes40T 03 30 Converqes40T 03 0000da da O Uri Properties Ste Properties Print She Report Print Uni Report In Configuration Mode the Site Pane contains the Site Selection drop down list Site View tab and Tree View tab Right clicking in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab brings up a context menu with site unit channel and reporting options applicable to the selected unit type 52 Current Site Board Room Current Unit 30 Converges40T 03 Preset Selection 7 Presei Mack 1357941131517 19 Macro Selection peo ll e In Preset Mode the Site Pane displays the Current Site Current Unit Preset Selection list and the Preset Name Description and Preset Mask entry fields Center Pane M MIC Line iN j 0 j 3 0 9 9 9 J00 W PowerAmp3 4 D Q9 9 9 000 W PowerAmp 4 NOM Mute Gain___ Pres T Telco TX 1 _ Jaoe Telco TX n Audio TX
276. ined by sound reflections from the room surfaces S Z Buses These eight buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the Expansion Bus These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required See also Expansion Bus Signal Generator A device for generating a reference tone for sound system calibration purposes Site File Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more Converge Pro devices including Inputs Outputs Fader channels Processing channels Matrix routing and Presets for a specific application or venue Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with site hardware using your PC Site Properties The Site Properties window opens when you select New Site from the File menu or click on the New Site button on the Console button bar It allows you to enter information about the site as well as configure the communication and security settings SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite SMTP servers resolve the DNS address and recipient information used to transport email messages over IP networks See also DNS Subnet Mask A subnet mask defines the range logical IP addresses used for internal network traffic and is used by DHCP gateway devices and routers to distinguish between internal and external network traffic on IP networks See also DHCP Gatew
277. ing Group a microphone input is assigned This command can be used to replace the GRPSEL command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XGRPSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 See 4 G in Group and Channels Null to query in text XHOOK Hook Flash This command sends a hook flash This command can be used to replace the HOOK command for the R group There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE XHOOK lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Reserved gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 XHOOKD Hook Flash Duration This command selects reports the hook flash duration This command can be used to replace the HOOKD command for the R group Command Form DEVICE KHOOKD lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Reserved gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Reserved Unsigned Short 2 50 2000 Multiples of 10 Ms only Ms Null to query in text XLOCALNUM Local Number This command sets or reports back the current value of the local number This command can be used to replace the LOCALNUM command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XLOCALNUM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Number Argument Type Size Values Units Chann
278. ing procedure to assign device IDs using the front panel controls 1 Press the Select button on the front panel The CONVERGE Menu appears 2 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the Settings menu Press the Select button The Settings menu appears 37 3 Use the Menu Dial to highlight DID Press the Select button The Device ID menu appears 4 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the desired value Press the Select button to select it 5 The Change DID Menu prompt appears Choose Yes to set the selected DID value or No to return to the Device ID menu 6 Press Esc until to return to the Settings menu 7 Repeat this process for each device on the E bus network NOTE You can also set Device IDs in the Unit Properties screen in Console when disconnected However DID assignments made in Console must match the DID assignments made using the front panel Assigning Beamforming Microphone Array Device IDs set each Beamforming Microphone Array unit within the site to a unique ID using the Device ID selector rotary switch on the back of the unit Range O F LINKIN and LINK OUT E bus Connections For Future USB Audio Input Support Power Over Device ID Ethernet Selector Connector 38 LCD PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW LCD Programming allows you to make simple configuration adjustments using front panel controls shown below A B C D EF G H CONVERGE PRO 880TA A USB Type B Port Provides conve
279. io clipping events Telco On Off Reports when the Telco line goes on or off hook Dial Reports dial command events including DTMF Phonebook Speed Dial and Redial Call Duration Reports the time between on and off hook events for all calls Microphone Gains Reports microphone gain levels Processor Gains Reports processor gain levels Fader Gains Reports fader gain levels Telco Gains Reports Telco gain levels Power Amp Gains Reports power amp gain levels Caller ID Shows Caller ID report Power Amp Errors Reports power amp errors NOTE All device events and Event Scheduler events are logged automatically Use the Refresh Clear Save and Print buttons to refresh the log display clear the log save the log to a text file and print the log 217 For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics Site Properties System Checks e Firmware Loader e Console Overview e LCD Settings Menu e Macro Tab e Preset Mode Overview e Execute Presets e Dialer e Phonebook 218 EVENT LOG The Event Log captures Console events for administration and troubleshooting purposes Event types captured include failed login attempts site disconnects unit reboots socket time outs internal system errors and serial command execution errors Accessing Event Log To access the event log select Event Log from the Services menu or click the Event Log button on the Console Button Bar E Conve
280. ion from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telco Set e RJ 11 e POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telephone Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB e THD N lt 0 3 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz e SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation e Tail Time 31 ms e Null 55 dB nominal Telephone Noise Cancellation e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length CONVERGE PRO 8807 continued Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity e Hardware flow control on default off USB e Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjustin
281. irmware Wersion Dictionary Version FPGA Version Host DSP Date SAT DSP Date i Cancel Configure the new unit s properties using the General tab Configure the new unit s IP and serial port settings using the Comm tab For more information on configuring unit properties see Unit Properties Post Gain Post Process 20 i PA Adapt and AEC Reference Power Amp 4 Bla p 5 En w En Output Level 20 Power Amp 1 abs poet PowerAmp 1 3 EQ Fitter 5 NOR aia MPEG fe ohm Moise Gate 70 100 Press OK to add the unit to the site or Cancel to return to Console The added unit appears on the Site View tab of the Site pane highlighted in orange as shown below NOTE The Status bar at the bottom of the Console window displays the current status of the unit and the site As shown above site data errors and unit data errors are indicated by magenta and red LEDs respectively Complete unit configuration with correct settings to clear the errors When correct configuration is complete the status LEDs will change to green The Status bar also displays Last Macro and Last Preset 206 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Unit Properties Create A New Site Connect To A Site Site Properties Unit Tab e Configuration Mode Overview 207 CONNECT MENU OVERVIEW The Connect Menu enables you to connect to a site disconnect from a site an
282. is case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking ita second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box T D E L pdng g pdg r g pdg t papo G pipa e g papio e E papo g papio e duanag e g durpiamog al g duane le t duanag Mel x1 0921 oct op gt deg oy bale W deg op g g oy co eg oy rag op fee op mtgal S Kobe oy Adol zigol ra tgo pozos y igol 1301 yy deg oy Nodo y 553001 g s59001d E For Telco VolP Rx channels Outputs 5 8 Speaker and To Exp Bus S are selected as cross points by default You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to a cross point routing path or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Chrl C Paste Chrl 131 The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box displays
283. is used to transmit information such as HTML pages between servers and clients on IP networks Last Mic Mode Sets the last activated mic to Last On Mic 1 8 or Off The Last On setting leaves the last activated mic gated on until another mic input gates on Macro A series of commands stored and executed together Macros can be executed from within Converge Console using serial commands and within Presets Manual Gating Provides the ability to gate a microphone on or off manually See also Gating Matrix Mixer The Converge Pro mixer that allows routing of any input or combination of inputs to an output or any combination of outputs The Converge Pro mixer permits level control at each cross point in the matrix See also Cross Point Maximum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously MIB Management Information Base A database file that describes networked communication devices for SNMP management purposes See also SNMP Microphone Mixing The process which mixes audio signals from different microphones All mic signals can be mixed into one signal any or all outputs or mixed into separate groups Microphone signals can also be processed together or individually Min Max Gain Level Yellow and green limit arrows in Console that set minimum and maximum gain levels respectively for all channels These arrows are available on the Gain Slider for each channel type Min Max limits apply to all serially
284. ive Command text box 6 To complete programming for the selected pin repeat steps 3 through 6 to set the Active Command for the opposite pin state 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 to program additional pins Clearing Pin Programming To clear programming for a pin select the Control Port and Selected Pin using the drop down lists select the pin state using the Active Command buttons then press the Clear button To clear all pins right click and select Clear All from the shortcut menu Exporting Control Objects You can save control port objects into the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro database To capture the currently displayed control pin programming right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu After saving the control port object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console For more information about objects see Creating Channel Objects Matrix Objects Macro Objects and Drag amp Drop Configuration For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e Expansion Bus e Controls and Connections e Device IDs DIDs e String Tab 174 STRING TAB The String Tab enables you to create up to eight command strings that allow CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro units to control external devices such as lighting projectors and room dividers Command strings are written using the syntax of the external device being
285. k balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to O dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment e Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu e Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation e Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 O e Nominal Level O dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector CONVERGE PRO 880 continued Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e
286. l Input Transmit Mute 10 Y Status Output Transmit Mute status Wa if Control Input Receive Mute 12 Y Status Output Receive mute status 13 i Control Input 14 ay Status Output 15 i Control Input 16 Y Status Output 17 Y Status Output 18 Y Status Output 19 1 Status Output 20 Y Status Output 21 Y Status Output 22 xX Status Output 23 x Status Output 24 Y Status Output Ring Indication 25 NA NA Ground 321 Yast onverge Pro VH20 re A P ort tA Cc F emg Je D IB 25 i J User Definable Control Status Default Description o N O O A N ES DS O DY b O RSI ND BS PS PS eas faa KG O Aa NMN O O WON OO GT BW D O Z lt K KX KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KOK OX OX Za gt 322 Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output NA Telco On Telco On Indicator Telco Off Telco off indicator Transmit Mute Transmit Mute status Receive Mute Receive mute status Ring Indication Ground re S s 4 9 1 2 n IO rt A ai L ge ew Fema e DB N gt User Definable Control Status Default Description
287. l Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 1 Slow 2 Medium f 3 Fast Null to query in text XDELAY Audio Delay This command controls reports signal delay on a Channel This command can be used to replace the DELAY command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XDELAY lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 2918 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 0 250 00 Null to query in text ms 299 XDELAYSEL Audio Delay Enable This command enables signal delay on a Channel This command can be used to replace the DELAYSEL command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XDELAYSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 SWALA e Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text XDELAYSEL Audio Delay Enable This command enables signal delay on a Channel This command can be used to replace the DELAYSEL command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XDELAYSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 a co FJ Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text XDIAL DTMF Dialing This command dials a DIMF sequence or reports back the last sequence di
288. l s x om won ag 01 akg 01 lt de 01 akg 01 dos samud You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Ctro Paste Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB 149 NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above or below the cross point box for a channel displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel as shown below Pre Gain Gain i Post Gain gt Post Process gt Post Gate 36 Coarse 20 Me 1 56 20 Jin uti 50 El p e 41 Ka 61 35 5 5 5 28 PPWR 21 14 86 7 5 30 30 30 PA Adapt and AEC Reference CT AEC NC hute Filter AGC ALC Gate mow oa gear ze Bx ai KA 3z Enon Gated oro eSSSSSR ESSERE SESE EE TE Bpre nec Tontos no SED MN NN NA Bs fic BRRHHHHHBHHEHHSEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESS msot SSSSEESSESSEESEEEESESESSESSSESEEEEE q lll 2 OOOO OS E Process 4 Gain KWA Wa wa ies Pvt Nem Sey a YA bed a Process 30
289. l space is required to store the site files and other project files e USB or Ethernet Network Interface to connect your computer with CONVERGE Pro product Minimum Software Requirements e Administrator permission to install and run the software e Java Runtime Environment version 6 0 or higher e Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 0 or higher e Adobe Flash version 9 0 or higher 17 UNPACKING Use the illustrations below to verify that you received all components for your CONVERGE Pro product ClearOne is not responsible for product damage incurred during shipment Inspect your shipment carefully for obvious signs of damage If the shipment appears damaged retain the original boxes and packing material for inspection by the carrier and contact them immediately 1 Converge Pro 880 P N 910 151 880 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green To P N 673 017 212 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 hoger Power Cord 8 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD 6292150005 P N 800 151 881 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 800 151 880 P N 830 153 001 18 CONVERGE PRO 880T TELCO 12345678 1 Converge Pro 880T P N 910 151 881
290. le you can configure a site with multiple units for a room combining application where all units act together when three smaller rooms are combined into a larger room When the rooms are divided again the audio from one room will not be available in the other two rooms due to the Audio Master configuration In graphic above the third unit in the network is an Audio Master with an RS 232 control device attached Audio from the first and second units in the network does not pass beyond the second unit Likewise the second Audio Master unit in the network does not pass audio from the unit before it Sites can use multiple RS 232 devices which you can connect to any unit regardless of Control Slave or Master designations serial control is not affected by Audio Master or Slave designations Global serial control of the site is maintained by the unit connected to a control device through its RS 232 port in this case the third unit in the stack which is also designated as the first Audio Master in the network 67 NOTE A master unit is not reguired for CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro sites and in most installations all units will be slaves Also SNMP Control is not affected by Audio Master designations For information about the Link In and Link Out connections used to build sites see Controls amp Connections Room Enter a descriptive name for the room in the Room field Default Meter 8 Channel Select an input output or processing channel to b
291. lect Cross Point from the shortcut menu The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider 154 Pre Gain Gain m Post Gain Post Process Post Gate 36 20 20 gt E J l SIERRAS Mo 1 a o gt a D 4 a i cia it SN Shee Se ae T ee ee YA 885858585888 FF eee n0 EEEEEEEEEFEEEEBSS8S8RERS essssssesssesseseeeocn nwa Gb fe u u u u u u u u hh O ee 0 0 LU ee ee YA ae eee EmO 2 EEE ee ha food gt Fader 1 _ A pr 2J3 5s 5 7 8 91 ri ooo fr sf Io Ev mp jojo 2434 1 0000000003454 2002020 BESS oS momo mmm Sssee ee RRR RRR RAR TF UIRBBHBBHBBBRBHBBHBRABSSSE TREE HMO PAR a OF YH eae Cope ue eee Pink cam etme cies N S oOo 8 4 y O vp DO A Cet Sse MR SAN Gain Output Level Output 1 20 2 Output 1 nou mia 5 mm erin gt a This display is identical to that shown on the Channel tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane You can change the label name of the channel in the label entry box You can also change channel configuration settings For example for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel
292. lid on VH20 ONLY Change requires reboot to become effective Command Form DEVICE ENETVLANPRI Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned 4 0 7 f Integer Null to query in text EREF Expansion Bus Reference This command selects an output or reports which output is the expansion bus reference Command Form DEVICE EREF lt Channel gt Value Channel Value Group Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Reference Channels in Groups and Channels Group Group 1 8 A E Value Channel 1 0 none See 2 20 O B in Groups and Channels Null to query in text Value Group 1 O for none or 2 20 N for none or O B EVENT Run Scheduled Event This command manually runs a scheduled event on a unit There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE EVENT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 10 Group Group 1 21 Q Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 261 FE Feedback Elimination Enable This command enables or disables feedback elimination on the power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE FE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 FEB Feedback Elimination Bandwidth Values Units see GroupAndChannels 23 J 0 On 1 Off 2 Toggle Null to query in text This command sets the filter bandwidth of the notch filter Options are a Q 5
293. ll models use the RTS and CTS pins on the RS 232 port to regulate the transmission and reception of data You can enable or disable flow control on the front panel and set the flow control type in the Unit Properties window in Console If you select On default from the front panel LCD menu select Hardware as the flow control type in the Unit Properties window If you disable flow control on the front panel select None in the Unit Properties window When None is selected the unit ignores flow control and the relies on the connected external control device to ensure data is not lost NOTE ClearOne recommends that you leave Flow Control enabled and connect all DB9 pins to avoid communication errors Network The Network submenu displays the unit name IP address Gateway and Subnet Mask settings for the unit You cannot change any of these settings from the Network submenu Use the Unit Properties screen in Console to change these settings 44 DID The DID submenu allows you to select a Device ID for the unit Select the DID you want to use press the Select button Answer Yes to the prompt to change the DID or No to keep the existing setting You can also use the General tab of the Unit Properties screen in Console to change this setting when disconnected from the unit However DID assignments made in Console must match DID assignments made using the front panel Default Default restores ALL settings to their factory default val
294. lobal and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced 145 Filter EA Pressing the Filter button brings up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Filter Tab selected as shown below Channel Property Configuration Process A Filter Delay Compressor Bypass All Remove Filter 15 ds o aap ME ae ag ee Phase Add Filter Fitters Processing Channels eran Table View show a B C Db E F G H For more information on Filters and their configuration use the Table of Contents to locate the Filters topic Press the Delay button to bring up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Delay Tab selected as shown below 146 Channel Property Configuration Process A Fiter Delay Compressor Enable Delay Length Calculated Delay ad 0 000 ft 2 0 00 ms nits Temperature fe Feet E Fahrenheit Inches Celsius Metres Temperature GC Millizeconds 70 00 F Introducing an appropriate amount of delay to the forward mounted driver s re establishes the acoustical alignment necessary for proper sound imaging in a room The same principle of introducing delay applies to separate speaker enclosures located various distances from the listening area Other types of delay to consider when establishing delay parameters are delays which occur naturally as a result of processing within the unit Propagation delay is an example This delay is caused by operations suc
295. lt Group gt Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 see Groups and Channels Group Group 1 29 V Zone 1 Unsigned 1 0 Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text Zone 2 Unsigned 1 O Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text Zone 3 Unsigned 1 O Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text Zone 4 Unsigned 1 0 Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text Zone 5 Unsigned 1 0 Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text Zone 6 Unsigned 1 0 Zone Disabled Character 1 Zone Enabled Null to Query in Text BFMUTEMACRO Define Macros that Run When Beamforming Mic Mute Button Is Pressed Define which macros to run on which CONVERGEPro board to Mute and Un Mute groups of Beamforming Mics when the specified Beamforming Mic s Mute button is pressed This allows pressing a single button to Mute or Un Mute multiple Beamformingr Mics If the Macro numbers are zero default then ALL Beam Former Mics in the system will be Muted or Un Muted Command Form DEVICE BFMUTEMACRO Type ID Device ID Mute On Macro Mute Off Macro Argument Type Size Values Units Type ID Integer 1 Type ID of board where the Mute On and Mute Off Macros are defined Null to Query in text Device ID Integer 1 Device ID of board where the Mute On and Mute Off Macros are defined Mute
296. macro using the Macro Editor 1 Select the Macro number to create from the Macro drop down list Macro Selection Matro Macro Description pS oo NOTE Used macros are indicated by an asterisk in the macro drop down list Press Change Name to assign a name to the macro optional Enter the name into the Change Name dialog that appears NOTE Macro names appear in Console macro lists and on the LCD Macro menu Using brief descriptive names makes it easier to identify a macro s functionality Enter a description of the macro s functionality in the Macro Description entry field optional Select the device Type DID Device ID number and Command from the drop down lists When you select a command a description of it appears in the Command Description box The parameters associated with the command also appear along with the valid values or range for each parameter in the Argument Description box shown below 6 Setthe parameter values for the command as required optional Bw 166 Command Editor Command Description Sets the gain for an Input Output Processor Channel Group F Faders Inputs L Line Inputs M Telco Rx or Telco Tx Microphone Inputs Outputs P Processing R Telco Rx T Telco Tx Type DID Command ChannelGroup Rate Target O h r E 10 RAMP 14 F 50 20 0 Add Insert Delete 7 Click Add to add the command to the end of the macro or Insert to insert the comm
297. mand selects the output impedance for the PA channel to be either 8 ohms or 70 100V Command Form DEVICE PIAMPED lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 8 ohms Short 1 70 100V Null to query in text 281 PALEN PA Limiter Enable This command changes enables the Limiter on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PALEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 PALT PA Limiter Threshold Values see Groups and Channels 23 J O Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text This command sets the Limiter threshold on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PALT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Signed Float 2 PANGAT PA Noise Gate Activation Timer Values See Groups and Channels 231J 65 00 to 20 00 Null to query in text Units Units dB This command sets the Noise Gate activation timer The noise gate will be activated if the timer conditions are met along with Gate thresholds Command Form DEVICE PANGAT lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 PANGEN PA Noise Gate Enabled lt Group gt Value Values See Groups and Channels 23 J 1 16 Null t
298. mplifier Outputs e 18 Expansion Bus in out e 8 Processing Blocks Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All Pass Low Pass Low shelving High shelving PEQ Notch Crossovers e Compressor e Delay up to 250 msec Power Amplifier Output Processing e Feedback Elimination w ring cancellation e 10 band EQ filter e 4 node filter bank for crossover e Delay Block e Compressor Limiter e Noise Gate for Hiss Control e Sound Masking Generator per channel e Adaptive Volume Control e Multi Channel Control Microphone Processing e 4 node filter bank e AGC ALC Power Amplifier e Channels 4 e Amplifier Output 35 Watt into 8 ohm e Impedence Selectable 80hm 70V 100 V e THD Noise lt 2 1 3 Power 331 e Crosstalk lt 68dB Telco Line Port e RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog PBX extension e A lead supervision provided Telco Set Port e Pass though RJ 11 analog jack Telephone Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and e Receive ALC disabled e Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB e THD N lt 0 3 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz e SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation e Tail Time 31ms e Null 55 dB nominal Telephone Noise Cancellation e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus e Connection CAT 5 RJ45 e Mix Minus Structure e 18 Audio Buses e 6 Gating Buses
299. multiple lines For example Valid lt username gt admin lt username gt Invalid lt username gt admin lt username gt Also since there are two proxies each proxy tag can take an index value of O or 1 for the primary or secondary proxy Those tags that take a proxy index are shown within the tag field with index n where n O or 1 For example the tag to enable the primary proxy sip authentication would be lt use_sipauth index 0 gt 1 lt use_sipauth gt A sample CLROVoipConfig txt file containing configuration settings is shown below After the sample file is a complete list of tags and the ranges allowed 351 lt C1CONFIG gt lt dialplan gt C1EngDialPlan txt lt dialplan gt lt tls cert update gt 2 lt tls cert update gt lt tls private cert index 0 gt C1PKeyCert txt lt tls private _cert gt lt tls local cert index 0 gt C1LocalCert txt lt tls local cert gt lt tls ca cert index 0 gt C1CAOCert txt C1CA1Cert txt lt tls ca cert gt lt C1CONFIG gt All Configuration Tags and Associated Ranges lt ringtone gt ringtone index 1 to 5 lt localnum gt Local telephone number lt mute_ringtone gt 1 mute ringer on incoming call O disable mute lt dialplan gt File name of Dialplan TFTPed from server lt use_sipauth index n gt 1 enable SIP authentication O disable sip authentication lt sip_username index n gt sip authentication username lt sip_password index n gt sip au
300. n HTTP web server Telnet Client SMTP Client SNMP Agent DNS DHCP Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 29 41029 Xx e 43 8 x 26 x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number e 910 151 825 CONVERGE Pro VH20 e Telephone Interface for CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro Platform CONVERGE SR 1212 Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting e Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB e Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N lt 0 02 e Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted e Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features e Number of Open Microphones NOM e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Last Mic Mode e Maximum of Mics Mode e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features e 36x36 matrix e 12 analog in out e 12 expansion bus in out e 8 assignable proce
301. n adaptor or other method Mic Line Inputs Mini terminal push on block connector for any combination of microphone and or line level inputs CONVERGE Pro 880 8 inputs CONVERGE Pro 880T 8 inputs CONVERGEPro 880TA 8 inputs CONVERGE Pro 840T 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro 8i 8 inputs CONVERGE Pro TH20 VH20 0 inputs CONVERGE SR1212 8 inputs CONVERGE SR1212A 8 inputs Line Outputs Mini terminal push on connector for line level outputs 880 8801 880TA 840T SR 1212 SR 1212A Line Inputs Mini terminal push on block connector for line level inputs only CONVERGE Pro 880 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro 880T 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro 880TA 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro 840T 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro 8i 4 inputs CONVERGE Pro TH20 VH20 2 inputs CONVERGE SR1212 4 inputs CONVERGE SR1212A 4 inputs Line Outputs Mini terminal push on block connector for line level outputs 880 880T 840T TH20 VH20 lad bales Link In and Link Out Ports Two RU 45 E bus expansion bus connectors used to connect multiple CONVERGE Pro units together to create a site You can connect up to twelve CONVERGE Pro 840T 880 880T 880TA 8i SR1212 SR212A units up to 16 CONVERGE Pro TH20 VH20 units or any combination thereof where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96 Maximum cable length is 200 feet using Category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable WARNING Use the Link In and Link Out ports with CONVERGE Pro Devices or Beamforming Microphone Array ONL
302. n of pin states to define when a preset will execute Preset Mack ___Cortrol Status B HL 135 7 Ot 17 00 A typical use for preset masking is a room combining application that uses automatic partitions with sensors that set the pin to high when a partition is open and to low when a partition is closed For example if Pin 1 is connected to a first partition and Pin 3 is connected to a second partition then the preset mask control status B settings shown above would activate the preset when the first partition is open and the second partition is closed Preset Storage Space Considerations In most preset configuration scenarios it is unlikely that you would reach the storage capacity of a CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro unit In the event that you exceed the preset storage space Console will alert you when you try to save the preset You will be asked to reduce the number of cross point changes in the Matrix or reduce the number of Macros in the preset As a general rule you make cross point changes to three fourths of the matrix with up to two macros in a given preset OR you can use up to 255 nested macros for a given preset 198 Exporting Preset Objects Preset objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly apply preset changes and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current preset and save it as an object right click anywhere in
303. n the Site Pane Cc Converge Console Board Room cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Soe Te cf 3 BOBSRREH Oa oo Re ClearOne Board Room Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database qs Objects Current Unit 30 Converge840T 03 9 Line Site View Tree View E Telco Rx Q Input 2 48 Output Q Input 3 ES Telco Tx Q Input 4 i Processing Ny Line UI Fader a Input 5 a Input amp Input 7 Gated oo Non Gated Su Telco Rx Pre nec q Telco RX Acrosspoint c e Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 pa j Fader 1 Speaker E fas Telco Tx p Telco TX E a Processing Q Process A R Process B Q Process BD Process D E im Fader ARR Fader 2 ML Fader 3 MH Fader 4 A Process D Process B Mio Process Lape Z doped i p ndo zandno e nano o t ndo s ndo o a pdo o ndo g pdpo sayeado 0 g ssadd gt 9 ssaandg o q sad o Mode Configuration Site Data Good E Unit Data Good E connected ARMADA site Board Room Unit Converges40T 03 Device ID 0 As shown above the Center Pane displays the configuration controls and gating for the selected Fader channel Fader configuration controls are described in the following sections Fader 1 Fader 1 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are glob
304. ncy range HEADQUARTERS Salt Lake City UT USA EMEA APAC LATAM TechSales 5225 Wiley Post Way Tel 44 1454 616 977 Tel 011 852 3590 4526 Tel 801 974 3621 Tel 800 705 2103 Suite 500 E mail global clearone com E mail global clearone com E mail global clearone com E mail techsales clearone com Salt Lake City UT 84116 Tel 801 975 7200 Toll Free 800 945 7730 Fax 801 977 0087 E mail sales clearone com Technical Support Tel 800 283 5936 E mail tech support clearone com 2013 ClearOne Inc All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice 800 151 880 Rev 4 2 April 2013 361
305. ndChannels 23 J 0 8 Null to query in text dB FEGL Feedback Elimination Gain Level This command reports the gain value achieved at the end of the feedback automatic setup The maximum value possible is set in the FEG command This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE FEGL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 99 99 to 99 99 dB Sent with Null value returned FELD Feedback Elimination Lock Depth This command sets the operation of a fixed filter node to be either locked or unlocked In locked mode the fixed filters depth will remain the same after all the fixed filters are placed In unlocked mode the fixed filter s depth can be modified anytime until the maximum depth is achieved Command Form DEVICE FELD lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChamnels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Float 2 0 Locked 1 Unlocked i Default O Null to query in text FEM Feedback Elimination Mode This command set the feedback mode to either Music or Voice This effects how aggressive the reduction is Command Form DEVICE FEM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Float 2 0 Locked 1 Unlocked i Default O Null
306. nds In general you should set the Coarse gain slider to 56dB for a mic input 28dB for active equipment that requires an input between mic and line level or OdB for a line level input device Use the Fine gain slider to adjust input volume level You can also set fine gain in 5dB increments using the Up Down buttons or enter a value directly in the field The Post Gain Meter displays the audio level after gain adjustments Post Process 70 The Post Process Meter displays the audio level after it passes through all mic input processing such as Processing channels Filters AEC NC AGC ALC and Mute 114 The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level after gating Channel gating for mic inputs is configured on the Gating tab of the Channel Property Configuration window for mic input channels which is described in the next section The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure the available features for mic input channels With the exception of the Mute button which toggles muting clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window Each feature is shown on a tab in the window that corresponds with the configuration button shown in the Center Pane For example clicking the AEC button displays the Channel Property configuration wndow with the AEC tab selected as shown below Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Fiter AGCIALC Gating e Enable Acous
307. ned Butig Type DO Commard Macro Nama Press fa Converge 40T Io macro gt Command type Seen Ce j ec T Active State EE E CRO m E apoy Em Status type o p conenewor llo crol Changing the settings of a fader group element or pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row if applicable Accessing the Web Portal After programming User Console and Control Console you can access them using the Web Portal to monitor and manage audio conferences User access privileges to these web based management tools are as follows e Administrator Full web access e Manager Web access to Dialer Maintenance Registration About and Help pages e User Web access to the Dialer Registration About and Help pages To open the web portal enter the IP address of the unit you want to connect with The web portal appears as shown below 224 DIALER A gt MANAGEMENT REGISTRATION LOGOUT HELP Signal Gene alice To access programmed call management functions click on DIALER To access programmed control console mixing functions click on MANAGEMENT shown above For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Dialer Phonebook Macro Tab Mic Gating Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx Settings Telco VoIP Tx Set
308. ng Overview e LCD Settings Menu e LCD Channels Menu e LCD Presets Menu e Macro Tab LCD PRESET MENU The LCD Preset Menu allows you to execute presets from the CONVERGE Pro front panel To create presets use Console in Preset Mode Accessing the Presets Menu To access the menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Presets and press the Select Button The Preset Menu appears as shown below Executing Presets Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute Press the Select button Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected preset or No to cancel Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu ron gt You can also run presets from the Services menu while Console is in Configuration Mode For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e LCD Programming Overview e LCD Settings Menu e LCD Channels Menu e Preset Mode e Console Overview e Services Menu Overview e Configuration Mode Overview 46 CHAPTER 3 CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING INSTALLING CONVERGE CONSOLE The CONVERGE Console software is designed for Windows operating systems 1 2 9 Ensure that all other programs or applications are closed and disconnect any USB cables from all CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices you will reconnect them later Insert the CON
309. nges in Its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service This equipment uses an RJ11C jack that is used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network This RJ11C jack complies with the applicable FCC Part 68 Rules and Requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details 344 If you experience problems with this equipment contact ClearOne Communications 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 Salt Lake City Utah 84116 or by phone at 800 945 7730 for repair and warranty information If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved No user serviceable parts are contained in this product If damage or malfunction occurs contact ClearOne Communications for instructions on its repair or return Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service If y
310. nient front panel connectivity for laptops and PCs B Microphone On LEDs Indicate microphone gate status and mute state C LCD Display Shows model number unit name IP address firmware version menu pages Menu options configuration settings and parameter values D Menu Dial Navigates the CONVERGE Pro LCD programming menu and enables you to modify basic configuration settings E ESC Button Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display F Select Button Displays the CONVERGE Pro LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option G LED Bar Meter Displays the audio level of a selected input output processing or fader channel Default meters 880 Output 12 8801 Output 12 840T Output 8 8i Mic 1 TH20 Telco Tx VH20 VoIP Tx SR1212 Output 12 e AMP Fault Indicator LEDs 880TA SR 1212A Indicates amplifier faults 1 4 indicates clip 5 indicates thermal overload 6 indicates fault gt 7 indicates fan on off e Telco VoIP Tx Rx Indicators 840T TH20 VH20 Indicates transmit and receive activity during Telco VoIP calls H Amplifier On Off Switch 880TA SR 1212A Turns power to the amplifiers on or off NOTE 880TA SR 1212A This does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains To disconnect unit power from the mains disconnect the unit s power cord from the mains socket To reconnect power plug the unit s power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines 39 I T
311. nputi a Current Unit H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View ui Jol e ri Mute NC moe 1 uiy y 7 sssssssssssssssssg t 12 Telco RX Audio RX om P Processing RX Process A IOTMOOWP ZENACN lt XS lt CANDODO Converge 880TA A A ClearOne 19 990 229900 3 9 0 9 13009 NOM Mute ZITACTNXXS lt ICANDOTVO ff pane nm ial T ry ee ree TT 17 o Ste ont _ cramer uara acts waso Gama cono srno evert sete nd LL 0 0 43 0 0 43 aa 43 i a PowerAmp 1 W PowerAmp 2 W PowerAmp 3 E N Microphone Ela DVD CD Et Video Codec Ham VCR H E Sound Card sl Amplifier U Amp a Loudspeaker Mode Configuration Site Data Default W Unit Data Default MM NotConnected MMMM MMMM Last Macro 0 216 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGE880TA 0 Devic _ In the Device Log window select the events you want to log using the Event Selection check boxes Device Log Events available for logging include Reset Reports unit reset events Errors Reports internal unit errors Access Reports all web Telnet front panel and USB access events System Checks Reports the pass fail status of System Checks Firmware Download Reports firmware downloads Default Reports unit default events Safety Mute Reports safety mute events Macro Reports Macro execution events Preset Reports when Presets are run Audio Clipping Reports aud
312. nsole Cc Converge Console Board Room cvg File View Add Connect Modes Services Help CHE TFC ee 22 ER On Site Selection E Current Unit 30 Converge840T 03 Site View Tree View I amp Telco Rx a Telco RX 48 Output Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Speaker E fas Telco Tx UD Telco TX Processing BD Process A Q Process B Q Process BD Process D E ii Fader IL Fader 1 PL Fader 2 m gt v Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Control Status Pin Select Control Status A Control Port la Selected Pin h Control Pin Control Pin State Active Low Command lt NONE gt Inactive High Command lt NONE gt Command Editor Command Description Argument Description No command specified Not valid Type DID Command la y o y none y Apply Clear 83 Control Port Objects Mode Configuration Site Data Good BI Unit Data Good Bl connected MAA AAA Site Board Room Unit Converges40T 03 Device ID 0 The Control tab of the Console main screen shows a graphical representation of Control Status Port A The pins numbered in blue are user definable command pins the pins numbered in green are status pins Control interface functionality and pin programming are explained in the following sections 172 User Definable Pins
313. nt upgrades from previous versions including support for the Beamforming Microphone Array ClearOne strongly encourages users to upgrade all firmware to the latest release version NOTE Save the CONVERGE Console site file before performing any firmware upgrade NOTE CONVERGE Console checks for firmware software compatibility when connecting to a CONVERGE Pro site If a compatibility issue is found the firmware uploader screen will be presented to update the firmware Follow the steps below to update the firmware If you choose not to perform the firmware update close CONVERGE Console and use CONVERGE Manager to select the version of CONVERGE Console that is compatible with the firmware in the CONVERGE Pro If the connected Site contains units that are Version 3 X they must be removed from the expansion bus prior to performing the firmware upgrade Please follow the steps below to upgrade your Firmware Upgrading from 1 X Firmware Ts Go o Remove any 2 X 3 X and 4 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 1 X units Re connect to the 1 X stack with Console Download the 4 X firmware file to the stack of units The units will default and reboot after the download of 4 X firmware The 1 X to 4 X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade Reconnect to the stack with Console Download 4 X a second time to the units The units will reboot Units are fully up
314. nter pane Mew Export Upload All Devices Download All Devices Click the Report button to view and print a report of all AV devices 179 AV devices allow you to save pre defined configurations for a particular type of device such as a ceiling microphone To access AV devices expand the AV Device Tree in the AV Devices Tab in the Object Pane on the right side of Console Click on a device in the tree to display its configuration in the center pane For example the default settings for a ClearOne tabletop microphone are shown below AV Devices Objects ReadOnly ay Aue T EPSP fw Enable Phariom Power in Aio T CSSa S Bayer MPC22 Gain S BeyerD MPCESV SW Disiance Use Course Fine Active Filer at Dever MECHEY SW active Type Frequency Gain O Bencwidh S EOS ha PEQ rea 00 00 4 00 fo 20 zl 5 00 el 5 Clock Audio CSI S Clock Audio CS2 5 Clock Audo CSI S Crown POCI3O A Shure MKIC A Push to Tak S Audio TATE9IR S Bayer MPC 67 9 Led 140 l A Crown dB dE E Cros POC 170 SW a ey 10 li POL Zk a E i zit z Hz E Filters Phase Remove FE n L Phase acarreo Remove Faer sens e Save Comos Repot Export import Upload AN Devices Download AI Devices NOTE Pre defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane They cannot be modified or deleted To create a new AV device select the type of device you want to create
315. nts for teleconferencing applications Accessing Phonebook To access the phone book select Phonebook from the Services menu press the Phonebook a button on the Console Button Bar or press the Phonebook button in the Dialer screen 2 12 2007 1 47 17 PH idle Using Phonebook To add an entry to the phonebook press the New Entry button enter a Name and Number and select a Speed Dial Number optional Phonebook Edil Removed phonebook entry NOTE The Number field allows numbers and only No other characters such as parentheses and dashes are allowed 213 Press the Add button to add the entry to the phonebook The number now appears in the phonebook list and in the Phonebook portion of the Dialer screen Phonebook Edit Name Bob Evens haa Mewen ao Remove Added phonebook entry To edit an entry select it and press the Change button To delete an entry select it and press the Remove button For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Dialer e Button Bar e Services Menu Overview 214 LABEL EDITOR The Label Editor allows you to guickly change the names labels assigned to units and channels Using descriptive names makes it easier to identify units and channels for configuration and management purposes Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced In addition to using the lab
316. nu e Site File Overview e Site Properties e Connect To A Site e Preset Mode Overview e Controls amp Connections e Serial Control e SNMP Control 74 CONFIGURATION MODE OVERVIEW CONVERGE Console has two modes Configuration Mode default and Preset Mode Configuration Mode enables you to perform advanced configuration of devices to customize them to your specific application Accessing Configuration Mode Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode with the Unit tab displayed as shown below Converge Console Site1 cnov File View Add Connect Modes Services Help 7 233 SOBSERBES 419 A ClearOne une Channel matrix AECReference Macro Gating Control string Event Scheduler Database Pres Gi a e i Current Unit H0 CONVERGE S80TA 0 Ste View Tree View DE OO a xe_exoasaoyro gt Ear Hs E Converge 22077 6 y Q r 2 T y v w x Y J et u A B l AL Da a Daa BD Bd pac p ed Dec el pa pa BA Da Da Doa DD DD f ods 3 Ez g E S E e z E E a Last Macro O LastPreset 0 Site 880CT Unt CONVERGESSOTA 0 Device ID 7 You can switch between modes by clicking on the Mode Er br buttons on the Button Bar For a description of the Console screen components while in Configuration Mode see Navigating CONVERGE Console Configuration Mode Tabs Console has ten tabs on the Tab Bar that provide specific configura
317. o Auto Answer On This command selects reports the setting of the number of rings to auto answer This command can be used to replace the AARINGS command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XAARINGS lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 2641 Z Value Unsigned Short 2 2 4 Null to query in text XACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication This command selects reports the status of the audible connect disconnect indication This command can be used to replace the ACONN command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XACONN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 26 R Z Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 On ji 2 Toggle Null to query in text XACONNLVL Audible Connect Disconnect Level This command selects reports the audible connect disconnect indicator s level This command can be used to replace the ACONNLVL command for the R group Command Form DEVICE XACONNLVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 14 201 Z Value Signed Short 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text 297 XCALLDUR Call Duration This command indicates how long a call has lasted If no call is in session this will report 0 At the time of call termin
318. o Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Filters 186 DRAG AND DROP CONFIGURATION NOTE Objects and Devices created in Console 1 0 4 and 1 1 5 are NOT compatible with Console 2 0 Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re created Console provides powerful Drag and Drop Configuration capabilities that allow you to quickly configure CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro devices and perform advanced system configuration tasks The types of objects available in Console for drag and drop configuration include e AV Devices Channel Objects e Matrix Objects Control Objects e Macro Objects e Preset Objects Accessing Drag and Drop Configuration To select objects for drag and drop configuration use the Objects Pane on the right side of Console The objects available in the objects pane vary depending on the tab selected on the Console Tab Bar For example when the Unit Tab s selected both AV devices and channel objects are available as shown below L Converge Console Sitel cnr Fie View Add Connect Modes Services Help EDE TT Ce 23340808250 019 ne unt channel matric AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database MICKLine Pres Garr AEC H Mute Gate Higi biie Gan 0 CONVERGESSOTA 0 O E IN Oo Lot o mai Sie View Tree View 00 L e a P AT CA jis yd O LI amp F a T u vw KC mi 5 y
319. o query in text This command enables noise gating on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PANGEN lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 PANGF PA Noise Gate Filter lt Group gt Value Values See Groups and Channels 23 J 0 No Filter 1 High Pass 2 Low Pass 3 Hi and Low Pass Null to query in text Units Minutes Units This command sets either a High Pass or Low Pass filter to be used in the activation of the noise gate This will affect the threshold conditions for activation of the gate A low pass will remove noise floor contributions to gate threshold above 500 HZ A high pass will remove noise floor contribution to gate threshold above below 2K Command Form DEVICE PANGF lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 231J Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off 1 On 2 Toggle 282 Null to query in text Units PANGM PA Noise Gate Mode This command sets the Noise Gate mode to be either manual or automatic In manual mode the gate threshold will be used to activate In auto mode the noise floor will be used to activate Command Form DEVICE PANGM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Automatic 1 Manual Null to query in text PANGT
320. of mics is limited to the number of mics included in the gating group For global gating groups the maximum number of mics is eight up to a maximum of 96 microphones in E bus linked systems e Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop down list the default is off Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until another mic gates on The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all other mics gate off Off gates all mics off when no audio is present For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Mic Input Settings e Channel Tab Overview e Mic Gating e Expansion Bus Overview 171 CONTROL TAB The Control Tab allows you to configure pin assignments for the user definable pins on Control Status Port A and Control Status Port B All models implement control status using DB 25 pin ports on the back panel and GPIO General Purpose Input Output with active low pull to ground inputs and open collector outputs For details refer to Appendix B and the Control Status Ports section of Appendix D Specifications The control ports enable external devices to access the CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes All devices connected via the E bus can be controlled from a single control status port on any of the devices To access command control press the Control Tab on the Tab Bar in Co
321. of the Channel pane for a Mic Input channel is shown below 93 oo gt 24 0 0 0 0 8 14 00 0 E 0 aa A se age mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm m gt III IP PPP PPPS LISTS s Za oTo Dn Cog x lt N oxXrEez gt o wpa Use the routing legend to determine the current cross point configuration of the selected input channel As shown in the example above Input 1 is non gated and cross pointed by default to Output 1 lt is also gated and cross pointed by default to Outputs 5 7 Telco VoIP Tx and Exp Bus O Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu as shown below _ f Cross Point Enter Copy Cher Paste Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dqB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Changes are automatically saved when you close the slider aje oj es s 1 5 9 oo rre sele els 4 In the channel routing matrix section of the Channel pane pressing the channel button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box shown above displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel shown below
322. oft and loud participants at a consistent level The default is Off See AGC ALC for additional information NOM Button HO SS Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On Mute Button Mite aa Clicking the Mute button toggles muting for the Telco receive channel The default is Off 130 The Gain slider changes the gain for the Telco receive channel from nominal 0 To change the value use the slider or the selector box Range is from 65 to 20dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels The Post Gain level meter displays the post gain signal level in dB The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel Telco VoIP Rx in th
323. ol for system wide troubleshooting and configuration The Gate View tab shows real time gating status allowing you to monitor gating activity for the mics and gating groups for the currently connected unit Debug Console Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Masting The gate indicator for each input is dark green in the gate off condition and light green if the input is gated on 231 The Signal Generator tab enables you to generate test signals to audibly test signal paths gain settings routing and channel configuration settings The signal generator can also be used for noise masking in courtroom clergy and corporate applications NOTE When the signal generator is on for any unit in the site the Signal Generator LED on the Console Button Bar flashes green Debug Console HO ConmergeSloT Ach Channel 1 Signal On Signal Timeout 0 no timeout OM Ho Cormerge BO T 4 00 fi gA 1 22 Test Signal Types The signal generator provides three types of test signals Pink White and Tone e Pink Noise A test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum with equal energy in each octave Pink noise is the default signal e White Noise A test signal with equal energy distribution throughout a given frequency range e Tone A sine wave test signal with less than 03 distortion Selecting Tone with the Signal Selection slider activate
324. ol the dynamic range of an audio signal Control Bus Part of the Expansion Bus the Control Bus passes control information to the units Control is not affected by audio master slave settings and will continue to function even if the units are not using the audio channels See also Expansion Bus Crossover A device that passes designated frequency ranges of an audio signal to specified loudspeaker elements in a sound system Converge Pro provides the following types of crossovers e Bessel A crossover using a low pass filter design characterized by a linear phase response This results in a constant time delay throughout the passband e Butterworth A crossover using a low pass filter design characterized by a maximally flat magnitude response This results in no amplitude ripple in the passband e Linkwitz Riley A fourth order crossover consisting of a cascaded second order Butterworth low pass filter Offers a vast improvement over the Butterworth crossover and is the de facto standard for professional audio active crossovers Cross Point The intersection between an input and an output in the routing matrix Cross point cells are color coded according to input type yellow gated blue non gated brown pre AEC green cross point See also Gating Pre AEC Channel Cross Point Level Adjust The process of adjusting the audio level gain attenuation at the cross point Cross Point Levels are set using the Cross Point Attenuation Slider which
325. om the ceiling Table Mount and Wall Mount modes will be available with a future firmware upgrade Beam Configuration fode Ceiling hiourt Select checkbox to disable zone The Auto mode allows the Beamforming Microphone Array to select it s own mode by referencing a built in accelerometer that senses the position of the microphone array However this is not displayed in the Console Zone Disabling Clicking on the checkbox associated with a zone in a mode will disable that zone removing it from microphone pickup This is useful in customizing the zone to the room conditions where the Beamforming Microphone Array is used 95 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics Mic Input Channel Line Input Channels Telco VoIP Rx Channel Output Channels Telco VoIP Tx Channel Processing Channels Fader Channels AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation Filter AGC Automatic Gain Control ALC Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Filters Site Pane Objects Pane 96 AEC ACOUSTIC ECHO CANCELLATION AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation reduces or removes acoustical echo from an input signal thereby improving audio clarity CONVERGE Pro devices perform AEC using the full bandwidth 20hz to 22kHz of the signal AEC uses a reference source to perform AEC based on the acoustic characteristics and dynamics of a specific room Use the AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference tab to set u
326. ommand Form DEVICE FES lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Reserved Zero 2 Values Units See GroupAndChannels 234J Zero FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete This command reports when the automatic feedback eliminator setup training cycle is in progress The training cycle is started using the command FES Feedback Elimination Setup This is a guery only command Command Form DEVICE FESC lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Short 2 264 Values Units See GroupAndChannels 23 J O Setup Complete 1 Setup in Progress Sent Null Value Returned FILTER Filter Adjust This command selects reports the settings of a filter Command Form DEVICE FILTER lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Node gt Type Frequency Gain Slope Bandwidth Subtype Argument Type Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Node Unsigned 1 Integer Type Unsigned 1 Integer Freguency Unsigned 4 Float Gain Slope Signed Float 2 Bandwidth Subtype Unsigned 2 Float FILTSEL Filter Select This command turns on and off the filters DEVICE FILTSEL lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Node gt Value Command Form Argument Channel Group Node Value 265 Type Channel Group Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Size Size 1 1 1 Values See Groups and Channels 3 5 23 29 M P J V
327. one 7 Gate Status Microphone 8 Gate Status Ground User Definable Control Status Omen O fem gt Bees SS hem ND BOB O DY DN Be PSN Bea Bea a Ke O Aa OO NMN O O OoN OO O MN O Z lt XXX lt XzZZZZS lt S lt S lt lt S lt lt S lt SSXS lt GC lt XS lt SCS lt XGS lt GSCS lt xS lt xSGS Z gt 319 O A nverae Pro 8 VUIIVETUSCS FIO Py gt 4 A y aw i D we AY i Y u K a A y a ft U ln E q Y AN Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output NA Default Description Mute All Mics Toggle Status of Mute All Mics Telco On Off Toggle Status of Telco On Off Auto Answer loggle Status of Auto Answer Mute Output 5 Toggle Status of Mute Output 5 Mute Input 5 Toggle Status of Mute Input 5 Volume Up Output 8 1 dB Volume Down Output 8 1 dB Microphone 1 Gate Status Microphone 2 Gate Status Microphone 3 Gate Status Microphone 4 Gate Status Ring Indication Ground P a ae Aa a a FR ad i et WA PEN i Pris AaKAR IA Dis Dd ra yr A in gt AEC DL YF converge Pro 8i Port A Female DB 25 as 4 User Definable Control S
328. opy and Paste Matrix To copy the entire matrix use the shortcut menu commands or press lt Ctrl G gt to copy the matrix select the unit you want to copy the matrix to in the Site View Tab and press lt Ctrl P gt to paste the matrix into the matrix screen for the selected unit Clear Matrix Press the Clear Matrix button to clear all current matrix settings A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the operation Use this option with caution because the operation cannot be undone 160 Exporting Matrix Objects Matrix objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly re configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu To apply a matrix object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen For more information on using AV devices and objects refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Controls and Connections Channel Tab Overview Expansion Bus Overview e NOM Mic Gating Filters Processing Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Telco VoIP Rx
329. or similar addresses In the example shown above when any four digit number is entered it is passed to the stack as lt four digit number gt Osipgateway com NOTE Although the wild card parameter is defined in the MATCH string and in the DIAL STRING it assumes that the rules applied for STRIP FIRST DIGITS and ADD_PREFIX_ AFTER_STRIP still take effect before the entered number replaces the wild card in the DIAL STRING 355 A AAA GLOSSARY Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC A process in which acoustical echo is removed from a signal AEC can be used to remove unwanted signals from mic audio if the unwanted acoustic signal is available separately as an electronic signal Adaptive Ambient This portion of the mixer monitors the varying ambient noise level in the room and changes the threshold level at which a microphone gates on Ambient Level A user defined background noise level used to control microphone gating used only if Adaptive Ambient is disabled Ambient Noise The existing room level noise such as that caused by ventilation systems paper shuffling and background chatter Attack Time Determines how quickly compression is enabled calibrated in milliseconds See also Compression Compressor and Threshold Attenuation A reduction of signal amplitude Audible Hook Indication A series of beeps that indicates when the telephone line goes on or off hook This feature can be turned on or off and the level can be adjuste
330. or your installation Serial Echo enables and disables echo on the serial port The default for Baud Rate is 57600 The default for Flow Control is Hardware The default for Serial Echo is On When you are finished configuring unit properties click OK to save the changes or Cancel to close the Unit Properties window AMX Duet Mode Sets a beacon to signify the device is AMX compatible and looks for new or updated modules on the AMX Web Site lf new or updated modules are available the user will be prompted to download the module CONVERGE PRO VH20 SITE PROPERTIES Site Properties for the CONVERGE Pro VH20 are accessed identically to any other CONVERGE unit However once the Properties SIP Properties window has launched several new configuration features are available NOTE The SIP Properties window is also accessible by right clicking the VH20 icon under Site View and selecting SIP Properties Converge VH20 Unit Properties lt New Unit gt General Comm SIP Proxy Timers Network Audio Stream Dial Plan Phone Number Local Phone Number Display Name Hostname CONYERGEVYH20 0 Proxy 1 Proxy 2 T SIP Authentication Authorization User admin Authorization Password clearone I SIP Proxy Registration User Domain Detaut T Proxy IP Address URL Proxy Port HE 1 Outbound Proxy Proxy IP Address URL Proxy Port S060 HH SIP Transport UDP Listen Port koo E N
331. ork Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 e Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port e DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default oft USB e Version 2 0 compatible e Type B connector Control Status Ports e DB 25 female A B 2 e Inputs A B active low pull to ground e Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each e 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software e Converge Console Power Input Range e Auto Adjusting e 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 X10205 XLS e 438x26x4 5 cm CONVERGE PRO 81 CONTINUED Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4 kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 Cto 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals e See Appendix D Compliance e AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 810 Converge Pro 8i 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer no outputs 336 CONVERGE PRO TH20 Telephone Audio Performance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled e Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB e
332. orner frequency is adjustable to 15dB First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is on This helos ensure that only one mic gates on when a person speaks Gain The amount a signal is increased over a given reference typically 0 normally specified in dB decibels On Converge Pro devices gain is adjustable from 65 to 20dB 85dB range in 5dB increments Gain Structure A set of configuration parameters that define the gain characteristics of a signal The optimal input gain setting is one which provides both an adequate signal to noise ratio and reasonable headroom Gateway A device used to provide external network access to client devices on IP networks All traffic with IP addresses outside the specified subnet mask are automatically routed to the gateway See also DHCP and Subnet 358 Mask Gating The activation and deactivation of mic inputs Converge Pro provides three types of microphone gating Auto The microphone will gate on according to the input level assigned gating parameters and gating group e Manual On The microphone will gate on unless it exceeds the NOM requirements of the gating group e Manual Off The microphone is deactivated Gate Ratio Specifies how much louder the microphone audio level must be over the ambient sound level before a microphone gates on Gating Controls The gating parameters that are assigned to a gating group including e Max
333. ou can configure up to four active filters per input channel NOTE There are no filters configured by default Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel When you add a filter it appears in the Active Filter drop down list and on the active filter graph Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Filter AGCIALC Gating Active Filter Type Frequency Gain Bandwidth Q 3 PEQ v PEQ vw 3997 85 243 E 28 85 0 05 Bypass i Remaining 7 Table View Bypass All Remove Filter 1 In graph view you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes 103 Filter Nodes In graph view you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes Filter node colors represent the following e Green The filter node is selected and active Dragging a green node changes the gain setting for PEQ filters and the frequency for all filter types e Grey The filter node is selected but not active e White The filter node is not selected and not active e Black Dragging a black filter node changes bandwidth settings for Notch and PEQ filter types Adding Filters To add additional filters click the Add Filter button The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filte
334. oup Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 REFSEL Reference Select for PA Adaptation amp AEC This command selects reports which output or expansion bus reference is used for a Mic input as a reference for power amp adaptation mode and acoustic echo cancellation where applicable Command Form DEVICE REFSEL lt Channel gt Ref Group Ref Channel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See 3 M in Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Reference Group Group 1 2 8 20 A B E H J O Reference Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Null to query in text 287 REFSET Reference Channel Set Up This command selects reports the output the reference channel tracks Command Form DEVICE REFSET lt Channel gt Reference Output Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 20 B Value Reference Output 2 0 none See 2 O in Groups and Channels Null to query in text RESET Reset Resets the unit There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE RESET No Arguments RING Ring Indication Units This command indicates a ringing line This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE RING lt Channel gt lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned 2 O Ring Cycle Ended Integer 1 Ring Cycle Started RINGEREN Audible Ring Enable T
335. oup Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 E Number String 40 1 40 Chars of 0 9 E Null to query last number dialed in text 258 DID Device ID This command reports the device id This command is read only except through the front panel Command Form DEVICE DID Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 See Type And Device IDs Null sent in text Value returned DTMFLVL DTMF Tone Level This command selects reports the DTMF tone level Command Form DEVICE DTMFLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text DTONELVL Dial Tone Level This command selects reports the audible dial tone level Command Form DEVICE DTONELVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text DUPDATE Download Update This command reports the status of download updates Command Form DEVICE DUPDATE Channel Group Status Percent Done Message Argument Type CC as Cts Channel Unsigned Integer 1 z Group Unsigned Integer 1 Status Unsigned Integer 1 Null to query in text Percent Done Unsigned Integer 1 E Message Char 60 a DVER Command Dictionary Version This command reports the version of the command dictionary being used
336. oup Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 O Off Short 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text 280 PAEQRST PA EQ Filter Reset This command resets the EQ Level for ALL bands in the filter bank There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Zero PAEQSET PA EQ Filter Set This command sets reports the EQ Level for a given band in the filter bank Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Band gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Band Unsigned 2 1 32 25 Hz Short 2 62 5 HZ 3 125 0 Hz 4 250 0 Hz 5 500 0 Hz Hz 6 1000 0 Hz 7 20000 P2 8 4000 0 Hz 9 8000 0 Hz 10 16000 0 Hz Value signed 4 12 00 12 00 dB Float Null to query in text PAFLT PA Fault This indicates one of the power amplifier channels is in a FAULT condition This is Read Only and is automatically generated if a fault occurs Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN Bitmap Argument Type Size Values Bitmap Hexadecimal Integer 4 31 30 08 OF 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Mm Frame Sync Fault PA Power Fault WART Fault DSP Memory Fault mp Fault Amy 1 Fault IZC Fault Fan Controller Fault SPI Fault Bits 032 31 weed PAIMPED PA Output Impedance This com
337. oup gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 0 10 8 00 Null to query in text XGMODE Gating Mode This command selects reports the setting of gating mode This command can be used to replace the GMODE command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XGHOLD lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 0 10 8 00 Null to query in text XGOVER Gating Override This command selects reports the setting of gating override This command can be used to replace the GOVER command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XGOVER lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 O Off Un 2 Toggle Null to query in text XGRATIO Gate Ratio Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the gate ratio This command can be used to replace the GRATIO command for the M group Command Form DEVICE XGRATIO lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 29 M V Value Unsigned Short 2 0 50 Null to query in text qB 301 XGRPSEL Gating Group Select This command selects reports which Gat
338. our home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY This equipment uses AC power which can subjected to electrical surges typically lightning transients which are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources The warranty for this equipment does not cover damage caused by electrical surge or lightning transients To reduce the risk of this equipment becoming damaged it is suggested that the customer consider installing a surge arrestor IC COMPLIANCE IC 1970A CONVPRO Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 0B ac NOTICE The term IC before the certification registration number signifies that Industry of Canada technical specifications were met This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the
339. output processing or fader channel or combination thereof on any CONVERGE Pro unit or across the expansion bus Front panel control of mute and gain for all input and output channels Safety mute button on the Console software button bar instantly mutes all outputs ClearOne s DSP Digital Signal Processing technology ensures crystal clear audio between conferencing sites AEC Acoustical Echo Cancellation Enhancements smoothing filters to reduce artifacts Pre AEC bypass channels Improved AEC adaption and noise suppression algorithms Automated Push to Talk microphone mode with AEC freezing Gain and gating control tracking Cross point gain adjustments Four fader channels Microphone preamp gain control 7 dB coarse gain and 5 dB fine gain increments for improved microphone gain matching AGC Automatic Gain Control algorithm ALC Automatic Level Control algorithm Telephone Hybrid Enhancements 880T 880TA 840T TH20 Custom telephone line settings for international teleconferencing and in country localization Type amp Type II auto sensing telephone interface U S and E U International impedance matching Improved TEC Telco Echo Cancellation with 31 millisecond tail time Continual TEC adaptation to telephone line conditions ClearEffect wideband audio emulation algorithm Digital anti alias filter minimizes CO switching noise and hum ALC Automatic Level Control on telco receive channel Improved call managemen
340. p these references Accessing AEC With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the AEC button located just below the Pre Gain meter ia nans ole BEOtat c CWE g E TI SINCE oa Mode Configuration Ste Data Delat MM Unk Data Oefaut ME Not Conected MMMM MR Ste Ueit CormergetcoTaco Device ID 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AEC tab selected see below 97 Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC AGCIALE NC Gating Fiter fw Enable Acoustic Echo Canceller ABC fe Enable Push to Talk Mode Non linear Processing NLF Pre Gain PTT Threshokd C Aggressive 0 PA Adapt and AEC Reference e uput B Soft Com Echo Return Loss Total Echo Reducion QERL ERLE 20 so seas The AEC tab shows a signal flow diagram for AEC and has the following features Enable AEC PA Adapt and AEC Reference NLP Non linear Processing and PTT Push to Talk mode These features are described in the following sections Select the checkbox to enable AEC This button displays the expansion bus output channel currently used as the AEC reference for the selected channel Clicking the button closes the Channel Property Configuration window and opens the AEC Reference tab in the center pane of Console NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments NLP feature
341. p to 16 Beamforming Microphone Arrays can be daisy chained in the site WARNING Use the Link In and Link Out ports ONLY with CONVERGE Pro and or Beamforming Microphone Array devices Connecting ANY other devices to the Link In and Link Out ports including ClearOne XAP or PSR1212 products or Power Over Ethernet PoE devices will result in severe equipment damage 2 Power over Ethernet Connector PoE The PoE connection is only for power not control Power must be provided through a standard Power over Ethernet switch or through an external PoE power supply for individual units no daisy chain power is allowed 3 Device ID Selector Set each Beamforming Microphone Array unit within the site to a unique ID using the Device ID selector rotary switch on the back of the unit Range 0 F 35 MA AAA CHAPTER 2 EXPANSION BUS amp LCD PROGRAMMING EXPANSION BUS The Expansion Bus E bus allows you to connect multiple CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro units together to create powerful audio and conferencing solutions for any size venue The E bus is a proprietary digital audio bus that provides control and audio data links between devices Expansion Bus Connections Using the E bus Link In and Link Out ports you can connect up to 34 CONVERGE Pro 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i and CONVERGE SR1212 SR1212A units and 16 Beamforming Microphone Arrays and up to 16 CONVERGE Pro TH20 and VH20 units where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96
342. preset or No to cancel Executing Presets Using Control Programming Use the PRESET serial command in the Active Low Command or Inactive High Command fields in the Control Pin State section of the Control Tab To execute multiple presets when a control condition is met use the MACRO command to call a macro with multiple PRESET commands embedded as explained in the next section For more information on PRESET and the complete CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro serial command set refer to Appendix A Serial Commanas 197 Executing Presets Using Macros Use the PRESET serial command to execute presets in a macro To run multiple presets at the same time use multiple PRESET commands in the macro Macros can be executed from within Console or by using any external control device Typically you will create a macro for each room configuration group of presets that you want to execute at the same time Preset Execution Flags Console uses user selectable preset flags to determine the current execution state of a preset This gives you complete control over preset execution and allows you to combine multiple presets in a macro or multiple macros while ensuring that only the presets required for a given room configuration are executed when needed The three user selectable execution flags are e 0 do not execute the preset and set the execution state to off e 1 check Preset state If off execute preset and set Flag to on If on do nothing e 2
343. provements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines 18 expansion busses Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command CONVERGE Pro 880 The successor to the industry leading XAP 800 The 880 delivers rich functionality with improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration for audio conferencing and sound reinforcement
344. ptive Mode PA Adaptive Mode allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference This prevents an audio signal from gating on microphones without interfering with speech from conference participants PA Adapt AEC Reference This setting determines which output channel typically a loudspeaker is used as the reference for AEC See also PA Adaptive Mode and AEC Parametric Equalizer PEQ A multi band variable equalizer with control of gain center frequency and bandwidth A properly configured PEQ enables Converge Pro devices to offset soeaker anomalies and room acoustic imaging deficiencies Phantom Power Power supplied by Converge Pro units to power condenser microphones This feature can be switched off for microphones that do not require phantom power Pink Noise An audio test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum with equal energy in each octave Pre AEC Cross Point Setting a Pre AEC Cross Point in the Matrix bypasses the cross pointed input audio from the AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation reference This is primarily used for Sound reinforcement applications to prevent mic input channel audio from being degraded by AEC artifacts See also AEC and Matrix Mixer Preset Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet changing conference room requirements These changes include audio routing gating muting levels AEC referencing and signal processing as well as room combining and room configuration
345. r custom channel objects you have created as shown below 182 NOTE The Object Tree is also available when either the Unit Tab or the Channel Tab is selected making all custom channel objects you have defined available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue Import Export AV Devices and Objects All AV Devices and channel Objects are stored as XPT files and XMO files respectively on the host computer or network To import or export these files use the Import and Export buttons on the Database Button Bar These features enable you to share device and object file definitions across sites applications and venues Upload Download AV Devices and Objects To upload or download ALL AV Devices or channel Objects in the database use the Upload and Download buttons on the Database Button Bar These features enable you to share databases among sites applications and venues Modifying AV Devices and Objects To modify AV Devices and channel Objects select the device or object in the Object Pane modify the configuration settings for the device or object in the Center Pane and click the Save button on the Database Button Bar When you make changes to the device or object Edit appears at the top of the Center Pane NOTE Pre defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane They cannot be modified or deleted For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Sit
346. r 15 minutes of no receive data A heart beat to keep the session alive will need to be used ClearOne recommends using the VER command to establish a heart beat in order to keep the session alive ALL MODELS RS 232 PORT 1 N DCD 2 N TXD S N RXD 4 N DTR 5 N Ground 6 N DSR 7 N CTS 8 N RES 9 N No connection NOTE To avoid communication errors ClearOne recommends using all nine pins when connecting to the RS 232 port 315 316 APPENDIX B DEFAULT PINOUTS CONTROL STATUS PORTS Converge Pro 880 Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Status Default Description CO SIS fem gt RN Be Rem DN SY O Bem DN Be Bes Bea eas aa ee O Aa OO MN O oO WON OO OT BW PO O Z WEA Yu z eai YA lt WI lt WA lt mI ee Ya Aa mI RiR Z gt 317 Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output NA Mute All Mics Toggle Status of Mute All Mics Mute Output 9 Toggle Status of Mute Output 9 Mute Output 10 Toggle Status of Mute Output 10 Mute Output 11 Toggle Status of Mute Output 11 Mute Output 12 Toggle Status of Mute Output 12 Volume Up Outp
347. r 2 1 Auto 2 Manual On f 3 Manual Off Null to query in text GOVER Gating Override This command selects reports the setting of gating override Command Form DEVICE GOVER lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0n f 2 Toggle Null to query in text GPIOSTATUS General Purpose Status This command sets the state of a General Purpose Status Pin Command Form DEVICE GPIOSTATUS Pin Port Value Argument Type Size Values Units Pin Unsigned 1 1 24 Only user definable status pins Integer Port Unsigned 1 1 2 Integer Value Unsigned 2 0 High Integer 1 Low 2 Toggle NULL to query in text GRATIO Gate Ratio Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the gate ratio Command Form DEVICE GRATIO lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 50 dB Null to query in text GREPORT Gate Report This command selects reports the mode of gate and audio presence status reporting Command Form DEVICE GREPORT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text 267 GRPSEL Gating Group Select This command selects reports which Gating Group a microphone input is assigned Command Form DEVICE GRPSEL
348. r e fon fon Internal gating groups control mic inputs connected to a specific unit Configure Internal Gating Group settings as follows e Enter a name in the Group Name field optional e Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature default or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off NOTE ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant s voice First Mic Priority allows more than one microphone to gate on at same time but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source lt does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group If First Mic Priority is disabled two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks e Select the Max of Mics from the drop down list the default is 4 This sets the maximum number of microphones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group The maximum number of mics is limited to the number of mics included in the gating group For internal gating groups the maximum number of mics is 8 for CONVERGE Pro 880 8801 880TA 81 CONVERGE SR 1212 and SR 1212A units and 4 for CONVERGE Pro 840T units Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop down list the default is off Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until
349. ration PowerAmp 1 Filter Delay Compressor Feedback Moise Gate EG Filter Limiter Multichannel Control Mulichannel Group 1 Enable Adaptive Yolume volume PA Channel Selection 1 2 3 4 Reference Microphone linput 1 PA Gainto Ambient Change Ratio 1 1 Adaptive Threshald Moise Floor Maximum Gain Adaptive Gain i 48 15 Mulichannel Group 2 Volume PA Channel Selection 2 3 2r cc mhe SI dad e Volume Indicates the volume level assigned to the Multichannel Group e PA Channel Selection Each box represents a PA Channel Check the box you wish to assign to the corresponding Multichannel Group e Mute Mutes the Multichannel Group e Enable Adaptive Volume When enabled the level of the PA Channel will adjust based on the Noise Floor heard by the selected reference microphone As the level of noise changes the output level adjusts according to the selected PA Gain to Ambient Change Ratio For example if the rate is set to 2 1 the amplifier level will adjust by 2 dB for every 1 dB in noise for increase The gain applied is governed by the Maximum Gain setting Before any gain is applied the noise floor heard by the mic must be equal to or greater than the Adaptive Gain setting 90 For more information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e AEC Auto Echo Cancellation e NC Noise Cancellation e Configuration Mode e Channel Tab e Matrix Tab e Processing Settings e
350. rema Macro Nata Active State 3 Converge a40T lo macro B Status type DD Command Macro Nome Inactive State 3 Convergea4oT macro J E Clone Pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row if applicable for the programmed command Control Console provides eight fader groups mixers with gain sliders mute buttons and level meters lt also provides four user programmable buttons The fader groups can control multiple units in a site WebBuilder This command elects the stabus of lewel reporting tor the specified channel Argument Description Channel depende on Lina type input e L Ling O Cuiput M Microphone F Processing A Taco Fx a Command Associated with Function Meter Press 3 Converge 8401 o LVLRERORT f F lf Command select the fader group or user key you want to program from the drop down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen For fader groups you will also need to select Gain Mute or Meter from the second drop down list NOTE You can also select an element to program such as a gain slider or user button by selecting its graphical representation in the Control Console window For example in the screen shot above the meter element for Fader Group 1 is selected The LVLREPORT command associated
351. rge Console 4 0 30 r File View Add Connect Modes Services Help P EoaiTK c s223 8OBSaeees 0129 B ClearOne ana Sape hai site unt Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database ST Wine Pres Input 1 E Current Unit H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View N Lu E N Microphone Ela DVD CD Ht Video Codec Hams VCR Pres 3 Amp W PowerAmp 1 W PowerAmp 2 W Poweramp3 4 Q 0 9 9 Jo0o Bi Poweramp4 NOM Mute Gain Pres T Telco TX 1 _ an Telco TX Audio TX Pres Gain NC ES 9 RX SSS SS o Exp O 0 P Q R S T V W X Y E J K L M N o 0 0 0000 00000 0000 0000 lt O w 5 gt 8 0 P Q R 5 T U V W X Y E J K E M N A B c D E F G H Mode Configuration Site Default Wi Data Default Ml NotConnected MMMM MMMM Last Macro Last O Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES80TA 0 Devic 219 Captured events appear in the left section of the Event Log window Event Codes and Messages appear in the right section of the window Event Log LI Mezsage 149 2007 11 16 26 4H Ura lrwabid Unk Values 3 9 2007 11 20 534H User Intisted Disconnect 49 2007 11 23 07 AM Remote socket limed cut 3114 2007 321 00PH Remote Conmechon Closed 3202007 500019 FM Remote socket hrned cul 22007 25847 Remote Connection Closed 27 2007 11 45 34 AM User Intisted Disconnect V27 2
352. rload that has forced it to go off hook This condition can occur because of a connection to a Digital PBX and is done to protect the Telco Circuitry from damage The command is a notification only and cannot be set or queried Command Form DEVICE TELOVER lt Channel gt lt Overload gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 O Not Overloaded 1 OVERLOADED TIMELOCALE Time Locale Settings This command sets or reports the time locale settings Command Form DEVICE TIMELOCALE DaylightSavings TimeZone TimeZoneName Argument Type Size Values Units Daylight Savings Unsigned Integer 4 O Do not use Daylight Savings 1 Use Daylight Savings NULL to Query in Text Time Zone Unsigned Integer 4 The number of seconds from UDT 86400 86400 j Time Zone String a2 Description of time zone Argument 295 TOUT Time Out Select This command selects reports the inactivity time out before returning to the unit title screen on the front panel Command Form DEVICE TOUT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 O No Time Out L 16 Min Null to query in text UID Unit ID This command reports the unit id This command is read only Command Form DEVICE UID Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 Sent with a Null value returned in text VER Version This command reports the version o
353. rmance e Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain Rs 150 Q THD N lt 0 02 Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features e Number of Open Microphones NOM e PA Adaptive Mode e First Mic Priority Mode e Last Mic Mode e Maximum of Mics Mode e Ambient Level e Gate Threshold Adjust e Off Attenuation Adjust e Hold Time e Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features e 36x36 matrix e 12 analog in out e 12 expansion bus in out e 8 assignable processing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn e Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley e Compressor e Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks e Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration e Input Gain Adjust Mic or Line Level Phantom Power on off Echo Cancellation on off Noise Cancellation on off Filters All Pass 327 Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off e Pre AEC chamnel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 e Push on mini terminal bloc
354. rnal speaker 80 Four 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier NOTE To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on Class 2 wiring is required Maintain the correct polarity on output connectors For example Channel 1 positive speaker lead connects to amplifiers channel 1 positive terminal Channel 1 negative speaker lead connects to amplifiers channel 1 negative terminal Repeat this procedure for each channel di Md LINKOUT MM A cL N 8 OHM CHNL 1 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 33777777 11 Telco Line and Telco Set Ports Two RJ 11 connectors telephone ports The Telco Line port connects an analog telephone line to CONVERGE Pro devices The Telco Set port provides a pass through connection for telephone handsets 880TA 8801 840T TH20 NOTE The Telco Set port is not available for use when the telephone hybrid is off hook 12 Amplifier Terminal Block 880TA SR1212A 12 speaker terminals used to connect an external speaker 70 100 v Four 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier NOTE To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on Class 2 wiring is required Maintain the correct polarity on output connectors For example Channel 1
355. rogram String This command sets reports a programmed string COMMAND FORM DEVICE PRGSTRING lt ID gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units ID Unsigned Integer 4 0 7 Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 80 Chars Null to query in text Special Characters a alert b backspace f form feed n new line r carriage return t horizontal tab v vertical tab backslash PROXYSTAT Proxy Registration Status This command reports the registration status for the primary or secondary proxy This command is only queried not set and can be sent asynchronously Command Form DEVICE PROXYSTAT lt Index gt lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Units 129 No text group Index Channel Index 1 O Primary Proxy 1 Secondary Proxy Group Group 1 Value Signed Float 2 0 SIP Proxy Disabled PROXYTYPE Set Get Proxy Type 1 SIP Proxy Registered 2 SIP Proxy NOT Registered If the proxy server requires specific firmware changes to work with this setting tells firmware what proxy server type to work with Command Form DEVICE PROXYTYPE lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Units 131 a Const Channel Const 1 1 Channel Group Group 1 Value Signed Float 2 286 O Default means no specific changes required 1 Cisco Proxy CCM7 PTTTHRESHOLD Push to Talk Threshold This command selects reports the setting of the push to talk threshold for a microphone
356. roup 4 None Posi Cmors Gain Hbeaa EPIA Tersar yA El pees Chu H i 0 0 de Attack 00 0 400 600 ewer Sal Se Delay Mode Enabling Delay Mode sets a timed delay after which the Compressor activates Timing ranges from 0 to 20ms Note Groups do not interact with Processor channels e Mute Mutes the specific Power Amp channel e Polarity Reverses the amplifier s output polarity e EQ Filter Adjusts specific frequency bands within a 12db range Enable EQ Filter Enables or disables the EQ 88 e Limiter Establishes a ceiling level for the amplifier output gt Enable Limiter Limits the output to the Threshold Max Level specified by the user Enable Soft Clipper Softens the clipping effect at Threshold Max level to prevent damage to external equipment Note Both settings can be active simultaneously 89 e Multichannel Control Multichannel Control is only available on amplifier channels Each of the 4 amplifiers can be assigned to one of two Multichannel groups When amplifier channels are assigned to a Multichannel group Mute and Gain for the group are controlled from a single point NOTE Multiple PA Channel Selections cannot be applied to both groups simultaneously If you assign PA 1 and 3 to Multichannel Group1 those amplifiers cannot be assigned to Multichannel Group 2 without removing them from the first group Channel Property Configu
357. roup for greater flexibility and control When inputs are assigned to a gating group the gating information from the inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves Gating Groups are created and defined using the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console The 880 880T 880TA 840T 81 SR 1212 and SR 1212A feature four internal gating groups Internal 1 4 and six global gating groups across the expansion bus Global A F Mic Inputs can only be used in one gating group at a time If an input is not assigned to a gating group that mic s gating properties are independent and they have no effect on any gating group When gating groups span two or more units global gating groups the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group NOTE Input channels can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time Mic Inputs are routed to Global Group A by default To assign a gating group select an Internal or Global radio button in the Gating Group section of the screen or select None to have the Mic Input gate independently of any gating group Gallina Group Hiema Gobel None EE ie be Co E F MOE gt EA gt p w s Post Gate Meter Post Gabe 20 30 The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level of the selected channel after Auto or Manual Gating settings are applied Meter range is from 30 to 200B 111 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Gating Ta
358. rs Remaining Filter Types Use the Type drop down list to select from the following input filters All Pass Frequency range is 20 00Hz to 20 00KHz All pass changes the phase of the audio signal at the set frequency High Pass Selectable frequency cutoff is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHz Rolloff is 12dB octave Level is fixed at OCB Low Pass Selectable frequency cutoff is 20 00Hz to 20 00KHz Rolloff is 12dB octave Level is fixed at OdB Notch Center frequency range is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHz Bandwidth is from 05 to 5 00 octaves in 01 octave increments Level is fixed at 80dB PEQ Parametric Equalizer Center frequency range is 20Hz to 20kHz in 01Hz increments Bandwidth is 05 to 5 octaves in 01 octave increments Level range is 15 to 15dB in 0 5dB increments Frequency Available for all filter types Use the Frequency selector box to set the center frequency in Hertz for the filter you are configuring Range is from 20Hz to 20kHz in 1Hz increments The default is 1kHz Gain Available for PEQ filters only Use the Gain selector box to set the gain value for the filter you are configuring Range is from 15 to 15dB The default is OdB Q Available for Notch and PEQ filters only Use the Q Quality Factor selector box to select the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth Q is the inverse of bandwidth and the two parameters are linked Therefore changing the Q value also changes the bandwidth value Range is from
359. s Reference Sources Expansion Ret 1 Unit fao Converges40T 03 tput Output 1 Clear Use the Expansion References 1 8 section of the screen to use audio from an expansion bus channel as the AEC PA Adapt reference source For each expansion reference select the Unit and the Output you want to use as a reference using the drop down lists The following types of sources are available for use as expansion AEC PA Adapt reference sources e Output channels e Speakers e Virtual references PA Virtual References A PA Virtual Reference assigns audio from a given amp output and applies the same processing to a corresponding Amp Channel All processing and audio information is applied to the Amp Channel For example if the feedback eliminator is enabled on PA channel 2 the feedback eliminator adds a new node That same feedback node will be added to the audio contained on PA Virtual Channel 2 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation e Mic Input Settings e Processing Settings e Fader Settings 164 MACRO TAB Macros define a series of commands which can be run using the Front Panel LCD Serial Commands Control Ports Presets the Web Portal SNMP and other macros Macros allow you to make quick configuration changes and to execute multiple Presets simultaneously Macros can also contain commands that are executed on other units on the
360. s created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks 122 To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below 33 Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Line 5 az Podium DVD Played Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects na pa Podium Mic PTT Microphone Podium CO Changer Podium OD Player IB Processing 0 Fader Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance Before configuring an input channel ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel
361. s four settings Soft Medium Aggressive Off The default is soft NOTE Use NLP with care There are corresponding trade offs associated with NLP including suppression and half duplex operation The AEC tab also includes meters for Echo Return Loss ERL Echo Return Loss Enhancement ERLE and Total Echo Reduction ERL ERLE shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller the difference of the two levels This is an average meter that updates when a receive only signal is present Shows the loss through the echo cancellation and non linear processing chain the difference of the two levels This is an average meter that updates when a receive only signal is present 98 Shows the total ERL and ERLE reduction This is an average meter that updates only when a receive only signal is present Select the Enable Push to Talk Mode checkbox to enable PTT PTT notifies AEC when a microphone is switched off and freezes AEC convergence until the microphone is switched back on As a result PTT helps prevent AEC divergence and improves overall AEC performance with push to talk microphones When the microphone is off set the PTT Threshold slider to the level of the Pre Gain Meter for the channel The AEC controls on the Beamforming Microphone Array differ in that an HD Mono AED or Stereo AED mode is selected and one or two Ebus References can be selected One reference for mono two for stereo The selec
362. s the Frequency configuration section of the tab e Linear Sweep Sine Wave A test signal increasing in frequency using predefined steps e Log Sweep Sine Wave A test signal increasing in frequency using exponential steps rises on a curve Running a Signal Test Use the following procedure to run a signal test 1 Select the unit and channel to test using the unit and channel drop down lists 2 Select the type of test tone using the Signal Selection slider 3 Select the amplitude volume of the test tone using the Amplitude slider The amplitude range is from 60 to 20dB The default is 20dB 4 Set the level for the test tone using the dB entry field or up down arrows 5 Set desired test tone duration using the Signal Timeout entry field 6 For Tone signals set the additional Frequency settings as explained in the next section 232 7 Press the Signal On button to initiate the test signal on the selected unit and channel The signal will continue using the specified settings until the Signal Timeout is reached or the Signal On button is pressed again whichever occurs first Tone Freguency Settings Configure Freguency settings for tone tests as follows 1 Select a tone frequency using the Frequency slider or enter a frequency in the entry box 2 Alternatively use the Auto Sweep button to sweep a range of frequencies using the Begin Frequency End Frequency Increment and Rate settings Select the Repeat checkbox if you
363. s the setting of the compressor group Command Form DEVICE CGROUP lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 518 Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 none Com 1 4 pressor Null to query in text Group CHAIRO Chairman Override Mode This command selects reports the setting of chairman override Command Form DEVICE CHAIRO lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0n f 2 Toggle Null to query in text 254 CLEAREFFECT ClearEffect Wide Band Telco Emulation This command enables disables or reports the current status of the ClearEffect Command Form DEVICE CLEAREFFECT lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text CLOCK Clock Set This command sets or reports the current time Command Form DEVICE CLOCK Date Month Year Hours Minutes Seconds Day Argument Type Size Values Units Date Unsigned Integer 1 T 31 Month Unsigned Integer 1 1 12 Year Unsigned Integer 2 2000 2099 f NULL to Query in Text Hours Unsigned Integer 1 00 23 Minutes Unsigned Integer 1 00 59 Seconds Unsigned Integer 1 00 59 Day of Unsigned Integer 1 1 Sunday Week 2 Monday 3 Tues
364. set Execution MEET TELL TITLE ETE gt Audio Clipping MTL FETT LETT I gt Microphone Gains Lt JE yy Edy gt Processor Gains ITT TTL ITE gt Fader Gains MTT TELL LIT gt Telco Gains HI ITA gt Power Amp Gains HI PLE gt Power Amp Errors MEET EE I gt Caller ID HI l gt SIP Message Log gt Reserved Null to query in text LVL Level This command reports the level of a channel This command is read only Command Form DEVICE LVL lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Position gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 0 5 7 12 16 17 20 25 26 Il J O M PL F T R K Z Position Meter Type 2 See Meter Type Definitions Value Signed Float 4 99 99 99 99 dB Sent with Null in text Value returned LVLREPORT Level Report This command selects reports the status of level reporting for the specified channel Command Form DEVICE LVLREPORT lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Position gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 123 57 12 16 17 K Z Md O FL FA KZ Position Meter Type 2 See Meter Type Definitions Value Unsigned Integer 4 O Off Delete from list being reported 1 On Add to list being reported 2 Toggle 272 Null to query in text LVLREPORTEN Level Report Enable Enables level reporting for the unit Command Form DEVICE LVLREP
365. shown below Objects 88 Telco Rx 48 Output Dra Telco Tx el Processing ii Fader Hh Fader channel Group View for a desired Channel type can be entered from a click on the channel box label in Site View or by clicking on the Channel Header in Unit View Group View Unit CONVERGE880 BC Group Mic Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref Output 12 Gos Ecos Output 12 BEAR Output 12 mi PER Eres Output 12 E kasi Pre Gain Post San Pre can 1 Post San Pre parn Gain Post pan Pre gain A 1 Post pan Coarse Fine ne Fine Coarse 10 736 56 72 61 41 41 35 35 28 28 SA ad Los zik 30 86 30 89 14 30 a f ood e AEC ALC eee Ku Post Process Post Gate Post Process Post Gate Post Process Post Gate Post Process Post Gate 20 20 20 20 5 Gate H ri 5 Gate H wal gt 5 Gate H el gt 5 Gate sb ig 30 30 30 30 30 30 EJ dB 30 dB 30 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 3 PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref PA Adapt amp AEC Ref Output 12 pros Output 12 rw output 12 12 ere output 12 ERKE eres Pre Gain Gain Post a Pre oan Gain i i Gain Post Gain 36 Coarse Ts a 20 20 20 E LE sm 4 7 35 5 i 14 2 85 30 86 86 dBi a 0 D 0 dB 30 dB 86 AEC p NC b Mut
366. si teh eh eeeeeate nape ae ee ee eo eee bE ee rea ee Cee a eee eee Rees aoa 76 Channel Tab Overview o o o oooo www n aua 92 AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation IIIA AA IIIA aaa 97 NC Noise CANCEIIGIION IIIA AKI AA ARA ria 100 PU Se ii WA ae ae sirenas ica tates Get a tere a ee oe ds ee eee 102 AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Tab 107 MIE GUNG IIIA dma dhe ee ee eee eee HAAR WAG RRR OSS ok ed oe eee AAA 109 Mie MCU ets ee Bo Be ee oe oe OE OO BOS Oo ORAS poa wate eae oe Mew ee 113 Eine Ut U eere eee boos A E R aaa whe es 119 TelcoNolP AX SCHINGS eces supra ia ub eh sb eR Rd Kew Ones E a EPE 124 SUE IIIA 555455555 Gen dah iei deh ba A 134 Telco VolP Tx Seti 138 Processno o C INGS e 444444445654 KA bee A E AIKA KIKA a 145 Fader SeN ULALE Be he Gee AG eee be EE OS EE Oe Dee A ea EEEE A 153 NI EEEE E E EEE E WA NDUDU EE E YA 158 AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab 162 Weeg s PEE EEEE EE O ei E awamu eee ee ae are are are et ee eee SA 165 Es ASS 169 TABLE OF CONTENTS continued UONI WA A IA a a wn es IAA 172 UMM A EA AA ha wa ai aa ee ee ee ee ee eee 175 Event Scheduler TaD aananuna 177 Esc ht hes acs bs ey EERO ER OO EA OE RENAE Ay ts E ai be a eA a 179 OOUMIZING Gal SWUCIIIG 225 225 i4anad onde ended AAA SEEDERS IA 184 Diao anc Dron 0 1 le Y p 11 0 s 2 2 2 2 26 r ac
367. sing channels enable you to apply filters compression delay and other processing settings to an input or a group of inputs which can then be routed to a single output or group of outputs FACC DninT amp WIUI3I3 FULIL y gt N ortcut Menu In addition to setting levels the Cross Point Shortcut Menu shown below enables you to copy and paste the configuration of the current cross point to other cross points To access the shortcut menu right click anywhere in the Center Pane of the Matrix screen Cross Point Enter Copy Cell Chr Paste Cell CE Copy Matrix Chrl 6 Paste Matrix Ctrl P Clear Matrix Export as object Cross Point Level Control To adjust the level for a cross point right click on the cross point and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 124B in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider The level you select now appears numerically in the cross point box within the matrix Copy and Paste Cells You can copy a single cell or the entire matrix using the shortcut menu options To copy a cross point to multiple cross points press lt Ctrl C gt to copy then press lt Ctrl V gt while holding down the left mouse button and clicking on the cross points to which you want to copy the settings C
368. ss or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel For example clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below Input 1 a oo gt Piaf al oF o bo fe PETES EL i a a a a me ee De ee ee ee ee ee e a E SBS ee eT eee SRA SRR Ra RR RR LAR eR Re Re ee Ia 2 5 5 oO 702010002 E a 53M CFSE Feo Fi to E Gain Output Level gt Cutput 5 ee Output 5 z5 C F This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You can change the channel Label name of the output channel in the label entry field toggle NOM constant gain on or off toggle Mute on or off and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object i
369. ssing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn e Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley e Compressor e Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks e Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration e Input Gain Adjust e Mic or Line Level e Phantom Power on off e Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off 339 Mic Line Inputs 1 8 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment e Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu e Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 O e Nominal Level 0 dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps e Category 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length between any two Converge Converge Pro devices Ethernet e Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port e 10 100 Mbps Ethernet
370. st e Mute on off e Auto gate manual gate Power e PoE IEEE 802 3AF 2003 e CAT 5 cable or higher e 6 watts average power consumption Expansion Bus In Out e Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 e Category 5 twisted pair cable for 200 feet maximum cable length between any two CONVERGE Pro devices 342 USB e Not currently supported for future use RS232 e Commands through CONVERGE Pro Configuration amp Administration Software e CONVERGE Console 4 X Weight e 4 4 lbs 2 0 Kg Mechanical e 30 0 x 1 00 x 5 75 WxHxD 762mm x 25 4mm x 146mm Mounting e Ceiling mount kit with 12 spanner e Ceiling mount kit with 24 spanner Environmental e Operating Temperature 14 F 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient temperature Installation e Optimum Mounting Height About 8 10 foot ceiling e Optimum Coverage Distance About 6 10 traditional cardioid mics About 2 3 ClearOne ceiling mic array About 8 10 foot radius Supported CONVERGE Pro Units e CONVERGE Pro 840T e CONVERGE Pro 880 CONVERGE Pro 880T e CONVERGE Pro 880TA Maximum 3 Beamforming microphone array per each supported CONVERGE Pro unit and maximum 16 units Part Numbers 910 001 003 Beamforming Microphone Array 910 001 004 PoE Power Supply amp Cables Kit for BFM Array 910 001 005 12 Ceiling Mount kit with 12 inch spanner for BFM Array 910 001 005 24 Ceiling Mount kit with 24 inch spanner for BFM Array
371. st in the Site Pane as shown below Use the Files of type drop down list to open G ware files PSR file extension original CONVERGE files cvg file extension or CONVERGE ver 3 files cnv file extension and convert them to CONVERGE Pro cpd file extension site files Site Selection Current Unit 34 Converqges40T 03 Ste View Tree view 500000d TR The selected site file is now available for use You can open up to four site files simultaneously and switch between them using the Site Selection drop down list 56 Saving Site Files To save the current Site configuration parameters including any changes made since the active Site file was opened click the Save button al on the Button Bar or select Save or Save As from the File menu For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Create A Site e Connect to a Site e Site Properties e Console Overview e Configuration Mode Overview e Channel Tab Overview e Matrix Tab 57 CONNECT TO A SITE Click the Connect button on the Console Button Bar or select Connect from the Connect Menu The Connect dialog appears as shown below Connect Pull Data from Unit to Current Document Create New Document and Connect to Site Connect to Site and Push Current Document f USB Connection 7 IP Connection Device Information Connection USB Device Name Convergesk 2 25 Device Type Conver
372. strator privileges to connect to units with Console and to modify user names and passwords User names and passwords are not case sensitive Site Properties are described in the following sections The General tab of the Site Properties window displays Site file information as shown above Enter a site name file 60 author and site description in the Site Info section of the tab Press OK to save the changes Cancel to close the Site Properties window or click on the Management or Time Local tabs to continue site configuration The Management tab shown below enables you to configure SNMP parameters email notification settings as well as user names and passwords Site Properties ctsite 2 General Management TimelLocal SNMP Manager IP Address Manager Port 0 0 0 0 hi 62 write Communit Read Communit private public Email Motification SMTP Server Address Resolved SMTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Email Address Username Pass words Edit Administrator Username Password Edit Manager Username Passyyord Edit User Username Passvvord Control Master Unit All units in the site appear in the Control Master unit list Selecting a Control Master unit designates that unit to control the SNMP interactions for the entire site across IP based networks To use SNMP the Control Master unit s must be connected to the LAN via IP All other units in the site are Control Slave units Control Slave units report events to th
373. t CorwengeG30TA0n Device 100 The matrix appears with the current routing configuration displayed for all channels The functionality of the matrix screen is described in the following sections The routing legend shows the status of cross points using colored cells that mark the intersection or cross point of the routing from input to output The color of the cross point cell identifies the input type e Yellow gated mic input e Blue non gated mic input e Brown pre AEC e Green cross point NOTE The current audio level to the nearest dB is shown in cross point cells Black cell are restricted routing paths which prevent Telco E Bus Processing and Fader channels from being routed back to themselves 158 Clear Matrix Button Clear Matrix Press the Clear Matrix button to clear ALL current matrix settings A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the clear matrix operation Use caution when using this feature because the operation cannot be undone Audio Routing Matrix ed m A A mall a E Siren 7 ee Se Vac cra na Sra ziri e il j i Ta The numbers and letters along the top and left side of the matrix show the cross point coordinates The Labels for each channel are also shown to make them easy to identify As you move the cursor over the matrix the labels for the channels are highlighted in white for each cross point NOTE Clicking on a channel label opens the Channel scre
374. t e 4 assignable processing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out e 1 telco in out Assignable Processing Blocks e Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn e Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley e Compressor e Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks e Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration e Input Gain Adjust e Mic or Line Level e Phantom Power on off e Echo Cancellation on off e Noise Cancellation on off e Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ e Mute on off e Chairman Override on off 333 e AGC on off e Automatic Level Control on off e Auto Gate Manual gate e Adaptive Ambient on off e Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 4 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to O dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment e Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu e Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain e Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation e Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 5 8 e Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging e Impedance lt 10 KO e Nominal Level O dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 8 e Push on mini terminal block balanced e Impedance lt 50 O e Nominal Level O dBu e Maximum Level 20 dBu Amplifier Output e Binding Post Connection e
375. t and processing Adjustable dial tone DIMF attenuation Off hook DTMF generation Robust dial tone detection Caller ID amp selectable ringers Touch tone dialing capability 44 character dial string Analog telephone line compatibility 10 W speaker amplifier 880T 880TA 840T Custom ring cadence detect VolP and SIP Functionality VH20 e Voice over Internet Protocol functionality Providing telephone functionality over an Internet connection e SIP Session Initiation Protocol used to establish modify and terminate VoIP calls e Support for wideband Audio G 722 e ClearEffect wideband audio emulation algorithm e ALC Automatic Level Control on telco receive channel e Caller ID amp selectable ringers Beamforming Microphone Array Enhancements e Beamforming amp adaptive steering technology e Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation e 24 microphone elements Mono and stereo modes for diverse applications Flexible mounting for ceiling Works with CONVERGE Pro products 880 840T 880T 880TA Expandable for larger room applications by daisy chaining up to three arrays per CONVERGE Pro unit Adaptive acoustic processing automatically adjusts to room configuration for best possible audio pickup Replaces up to 10 traditional microphones with twice the pick up range IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Read all safety information before using this product E Uwa o 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
376. t operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command 13 CONVERGE Pro SR1212 The successor to ClearOne s PSR1212 the SR1212 is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound reinforcement and room combining applications In addition to improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration the SR1212 offers industry leading expansion capabilities to accommodate virtually any size venue Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt 0 56dqB in 7dB increments Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four intern
377. tatus Default Description 1 y Control Input 2 Y Status Output 3 Y Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute All Mics 5 Y Control Input Mute Mic 1 Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 1 7 if Control Input Mute Mic 2 Toggle 8 it Status Output Status of Mute Mic 2 9 X Control Input Mute Mic 3 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 3 igl Y Control Input Mute Mic 4 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 4 13 y Control Input Mute Mic 5 Toggle 14 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 5 1s Y Control Input Mute Mic 6 Toggle 16 T Status Output Status of Mute Mic 6 17 N Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status 21 N Status Output Microphone 5 Gate Status 22 N Status Output Microphone 6 Gate Status 23 N Status Output Microphone 7 Gate Status 24 N Status Output Microphone 8 Gate Status 25 NA NA Ground 320 Aanvaar Dra TLIAN Dart A ICamaala DND EY Ja k f ea rA I POF LA pa EA 7 AA DNS r KI o LU xy il l i a y LI l d Control Status Default Description 1 Y Control Input Telco On 2 Y Status Output Telco On Indicator 3 Y Control Input Telco Off 4 Y Status Output Telco off indicator 5 Y Control Input 6 Y Status Output 1 y Control Input 8 y Status Output 9 y Contro
378. te Fres 0 Output Input 1 O 1 E Output 1 Input 2 mu A mi Output 2 Input 3 DM 5 E Output 3 Input 4 sal II Output 4 L Line Prez Mute AGC Outputs InputS MN 4 3 5 EE Output 6 InputG HN 2 E EE Output 7 Input MN 4 d T E Output 8 InpukS g F 5 E Speaker R Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC MATRIX HOM Mute Gain Pres iT Telco TX Telco RA moo E 9 1 1 a na da MM Telco TX Expansion Audio Rx Expansion Audio TX a 9 DO gt gt AA dE rom Exp A F A Eo rom Exp A E AAA To Exp O rom Exp FR o Exp From Exp 5 5 To Exp 5 From Exp 7 T To Exp 1 From Exp U U To Exp U From Exp Y y E To Exp Y From Exp W iy To Exp Y From Exp T To Exp X From Exp Y To Exp Y From Exp 2 I To Exp Z From Exp I CO To Exp I From Exp J J i To Exp J From Exp E K To Exp E From Exp L L qd To Exp L From Exp M hi To Exp M From Exp M h To Exp M P Processing RZ Pres Processing Tx Process 4 A E Process 4 Process B E E Process B Process E c qd E Process C Process D D E Process D IF Fader RZ Pres Fader TX Fader 1 1 Ca E Fader 1 Fader 2 2 Fader 2 Fader 3 3 E Fader 3 Fader 4 4 E Fader Pointing to an Expansion RX or Expansion TX channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange Clicking the channel selects it and shows the Input Tx channels only Output RX channels only Processing Expansion and Fader channel routing whit
379. te is connected For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Site Setup Overview e Connect To A Site e Create A New Site 208 MODES MENU OVERVIEW The Modes Menu allows you to switch Console between Configuration Mode and Preset Mode Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for all models Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them to instantly to a unit Accessing the Modes Menu File View Add Connect Modes Help TA i 0012 N0BRa AY 9129 Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Sie ricino Pes can NOM Mas Current Unit 4 aa HO CONVERGE880TA 0 a E N Microphone 9 Bwa DVD CD Ste View Tree View x A Hw Video Codec E VCR a Sound Card yg Amplifier a een i MJ Loudspeaker 0090004 Pres Gain Mute NC mos 4 91 Converge 880TA Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default MN NotConnected MMMM MMMM LastMacro 0 LastPreset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES80TA 0 Devic _ In Console select Modes from the menu bar The Modes menu appears as shown below Gites Services Help a Configuration FS Preset F A bullet indicates the current mode To switch modes select Configuration or Preset Console immediately reflects mode changes NOTE You can also switch modes using the 8 Er buttons on the Console But
380. te the selected tests by pressing the Start button on the System Checks tab 234 Sound Masking Tab Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes Debug Console Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Mask Unit Ho CONVERGES80TA 0 gt Power Amp 1 Power Amp 2 PowerAmp 1 PowerAmp 2 Gain 20 A a Enable Masking E Enable Masking Al Mode Voice y Mode Voice v Timer Omn gt Timer Omn Power Amp 3 Power Amp 4 PowerAmp 3 PowerAmp 4 Gain Gain A Enable Masking i T Enable Masking Mode voice Mode Voice gt a hd Timer Omn Timer Omn gt e Off Disables the feature e Voice Masking operates only in the range usually used when the target audio is vocal e Wideband Masking operates throughout the audible range of the unit For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Device Log e Event Log e Mic Input Settings e Line Input Settings e Telco VoIP Rx Settings e Telco VoIP Tx Settings e Output Settings e Processing Settings e Fader Settings e Matrix Tab 235 EKECUTE PRESETS The Execute Presets command on the Services menu allows you to run presets while Console is in Configuration Mode NOTE This command is not available while Console is in Preset Mode
381. that the Mic is gated on The following sections describe the configuration setting shortcuts available in the Unit tab Input Channel Settings Pres AEC HC Mute Gate Hon Mute Gain Pres 0 Output 3 9 5 g A A Output 1 Input 2 Es 3 9 9 2 oo g E Output 2 Input 3 a 3 9 ms 3 2 g E Output 3 Input 4 a 3 9 gE 4 E Output 4 L Line Fres Mute AGC 5 g E output 5 Input 5 5 6 3 g E Output 6 Input 6 4 4 6 7D A Output 7 Input 7 9 9 F 5 ai Output 8 Inputa 5 g a 10 08 BN Speaker R Telco RX Pres Mute NC HOM Mute Gain Pres iT Telco TX Telco RA Zz 3 0 1 a 0 0 da E Telco Tx Pointing to an input channel on the left side of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white on the right side of the screen shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the site pane shown below 77 Site view Tree View a Gi Input 1 Set the desired Gain settings for the Input channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Channel Label or number or letter of the channel next to the matrix Output Channel
382. the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGMOD lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 O Standard 1 Custom Null to query in text RINGOFF Ring Cadence Off Time This command sets the ring cadence off time The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGOFF lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 0 80 1 128 2 256 3 384 4 512 WA 5 640 6 768 7 896 8 1024 Null to query in text RINGON Ring Cadence On Time This command sets the ring cadence on time The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGON lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 Q 100 T 150 2 200 g 72900 4 384 ms 9s 5l 6 640 7 1024 Null to query in text 289 RXBOOST Receive Boost This command selects reports the receive boost status Command Form DEVICE RXBOOST lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 306 39 0612 dB Null to query in
383. the No not this time radio button Click Next to begin installation Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows YA seach ca curerd and updated soise by ong on pour compute on the hardwaee installation CD ce on the Windows Updabs Web sie wath pour parmesan A ra Can Wiandopa connect bo Window Update lo peach foe solana O Yes this time ordy O Yes now and every time connect a device 6 Mo rol this tee 13 Select the Install the software automatically radio button in the second screen of the wizard Shown below then click Next to proceed with installation Found New Hardware Wizard Thee wizard helps pou retal sole hor ClearOne Cormerge Pro 8407 If pour hardware came with an installation CD lt on floppy disk invert it now What do pou wani he woad bo do GE Install the software automatically Recommended O Install irom a list or specific location Advanced Cik Nest to continue 14 When the Windows unsigned driver warning dialog appears proceed to install the drivers 15 When the USB driver installation is complete click Finish to close the wizard 16 If you will be using IP to run Console connect Ethernet cables between your LAN and CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro device s 48 The Console software and your CONVERGE CONVERGE device s are now ready for use If you experience any problems during installation contact ClearOne technical support 49
384. thentication password lt sip_proxy_enable index n gt 1 enable 0 disable lt sip_proxy_server index n gt sip proxy server IP hostname or FQDN lt sip_proxy_port index n gt Sip proxy server port range 1024 to 65535 lt outbound_ sip _proxy_enable index n gt 1 enable 0 disable lt outbound_sip_proxy index n gt sip Outbound proxy IP hostname or FQDN lt outbound_proxy_port index n gt sip outbound proxy port range 1024 to 65535 lt sip_register_timetout gt sip registration timeout in seconds lt sip_session_timer_enable gt 1 enable 0 disable lt sip session erpires timer gt range 90 to 65535 range must be greater than or egual to min SE timer see below lt sip min SE timer gt range 90 to 65535 lt sip_refer_timer gt range O to 65535 352 lt sip retrans timer T1 gt range O to 655385 lt sip_retrans_timer_T2 gt range O to 65535 lt sip_retrans_timer_T4 gt range O to 65535 lt sip_transport index n gt sip transport O udp 1 tcp 2 tls lt sip_udp_port index n gt sip udp port range 1024 to 65535 lt sip_tcp_port index n gt sip tcp port range 1024 to 65535 lt sip tis port index n gt sip tls port range 1024 to 65535 lt dtmf relay enable gt 1 enable inband dtmf relay O disable lt dtmf_relay_payload gt dtmf relay payload 96 to 127 lt vad_enable gt 1 enable voice activity detection O disable lt adaptive_vad gt 1 enable adaptive vad 0
385. tic Echo Canceller AEC Enable Push to Tak Mode Nonlinear Processing NLP Pre Gain PTT Threshold Aggressive PA Adept and APC Reference gt Ebus Ret 1 i Som Off Echo Return Loss Total Echo Reduchon Enhancement ERLE ERL ERLE 20 50 30 ER E For more information on each configuration feature see the following topics e AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation e AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control e NC Noise Cancellation e Mic Gating e Filters e Beamforming Microphone Configuration 115 The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel mic input 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Input 1 dl Linda e ndo r ndo es t pamo sanda o g pdng do gado oo dienod ALIYE Ta e E dupa es t duenog logal e gdgop o o dq o bot op 0 y deg ay gt E keg oy nte op e fey oy lt Mm dey a S xo MIME ze oy ra ego podegay y egol 1go e yy deg oy a Noto yaani g ssa 7 To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl
386. ting Preset Objects Accessing Preset Mode To access Preset Mode press the Preset br button on the Console Button Bar or select Preset from the Modes menu Converge Console BE0ial cry Sen TF Oe 23 2 user eae ene nas tra cornet mari ABC Reference Current Una HO Converged aT ADO set Selection 7 Preset Mask v3 8 p 011131517 5 Metro Selechon Dae ee Mode Preset Ste Data Default Unt Data Detauk MN Not Connected MMM MMMM Ste Urt CoriergeGa0TA0O Device 1D 0 As shown above Console displays the Matrix tab by default in Preset Mode rather than the Unit tab that is the default in Configuration Mode The Site Pane also changes to display the Current Site Current Unit Preset Selection list and the Preset Name Description and Preset Mask entry fields NOTE Clicking a channel label in the matrix displays the Channel tab for the channel Right clicking anywhere in the matrix displays a shortcut menu that allows you to set a cross point copy a cell copy the matrix paste a matrix and clear the matrix 193 Preset Configuration Tabs In preset mode the following tabs are available on the Console Tab Bar for defining preset configurations e Unit Tab e Channel Tab e Matrix Tab e AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab e Gating Tab e Control Tab The channels available for configuration in a preset are determined by the channels selected in the Use in preset row on the matrix tab Rows that are
387. tings Output Settings Matrix Tab 225 FIRMWARE LOADER Firmware Loader allows you to upgrade firmware when ClearOne releases enhancements All models use the same firmware file converge mdo When upgrading firmware all units in the site are automatically updated simultaneously NOTE Before upgrading firmware save a copy of your site files using the Save or Save As options on the File menu When upgrading from CONVERGE Console 1 0 4 or 1 1 5 to 2 0 x or 3 0 x the Firmware must be updated twice To load firmware click on the Services menu select Firmware Loader The CONVERGE Firmware Loader window appears as shown below Converge Firmware Loader Select Firmware File Firmware File C Program Files ClearOne Corrwerge Consoles Firmware Converge mda Firmware File Version 4 0 0 24 Date 03 06 2013 37 Cancel Upload Firmware Cloze QQ E mquq2 gt h_zE E AA Upload Firmware Loader automatically looks for firmware files in the default CONVERGE Console directory Press the EN button to locate firmware files stored in a different directory or enter an explicit file path into the Firmware File entry field All available firmware files in the chosen directory are displayed in the firmware file table Once you have located the firmware file you want to load select it from the firmware file table and click Upload Firmware A warning dialog appears shown below Click Yes to proceed with the firmware upload
388. tion To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu To apply a matrix object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen Control Objects Control Objects allow you to save control port objects into the Database To capture the currently displayed control pin programming right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu After saving the control port object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console To apply a control object after saving it to the database drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Control Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen Macro Objects Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them To capture a macro and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu After saving a macro as an object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console To use a macro object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Macro Command List portion of the Macro Tab screen Preset Objects Preset Objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly apply pres
389. tion is made from 8 Ebus References There is no PTT mode e Enable Acoustic Echo Canceller AEC HO AEC riode tano T fone AEC Block Reference Ebus Ref 1 on linear Processing LP Aggressive Medium ir Soft C off Total Echo Reduction ERL ERLE 50 Lod Bus Ref For additional information refer to the Table of Contents tor these related topics e AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation e Mic Gating e Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings 99 NC NOISE CANCELLATION NC Noise Cancellation is a process in which ambient background noise is removed from an input signal with no noticeable degradation in signal quality NC is available on Mic Input excluding SR 1212 and SR 1212A and Telco VoIP Rx channels Accessing NC With the Channel tab selected in the Center Pane select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the NC button located just below the Coarse Gain slider Converge Console B60ta1 cvg fou TT Mode Corfguration Ste Data Defaut MM Unk Data Detauk WM Not Conmected MMMM MMMM Ste Urt Corierpeee0TAN0 Device 1D 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the NC tab selected as shown below 100 Channel Property Configuration AEC ONC Fiter AGCIALC Gating select the
390. tion options while in Configuration Mode e Site e Unit e Channel e Matrix e AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab e Macro e Gating e Control e String e Event Scheduler e Database These tabs are described in the following sections 75 SITE TAB The Site tab shows a view of the site in the order the CONVERGE Pro units are connected with the Expansion Bus E bus It displays the configured units in order of connection using the E bus Link In and Link Out ports Converge Console 4 0 20 Marketing cpd fx File View Add Connect Modes Services Help I A leae AUA M E E E On AA ClearOne AA Site Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Caina Control String Event Scheduler Database Set Current Unit E0 CONVERGEVH20 1A DO CONVERGES80T 95 20 CONVERGETH20 21 Wine waa Ni R Telco Rx ime T Telco Tx Ste View Tree view Mme wau 7 L Line T Telco Tx R Telco Rx P Processing P Processing F Fader F Fader y K YolP Tx DO CONYERGES80T 95 ie Mojo 0068 20 CONWERGETH20 21 Azo Gia 40 CONVERGESI 82 E8s0 BC 30 CONVERGE840T 98 AD CONVERGESI 82 M Mic P Processing ee E 0 Output M Mic 0 Output KITAA L Line ve F Fader L Line y P Processing L Line T Telco Tx mi P Processing de P Processing 17 F Fader R Telco Rx x
391. ton Bar For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics e Configuration Mode e Preset Mode e Console Button Bar 209 SERVICES MENU OVE RVIEW The Services Menu provides various utilities for using and managing CONVERGE CONVERGE Pro units Accessing the Services Menu xE Converge Console 4 0 30 L File View Add Connect Site Selection Sie Current Unit H0 CONVERGE880TA 0 Site View Tree View aam L Jol PIT IR Modes Help SoealFTTlce 22 POSS YI r ou Site Unit M MIC Line 1 Input 2 2 Channel Matrix AEC Reference ao a Pres Gain Mute NC mps YO 1 LILONMOODWDP Oo ZIMAMOTO Macro Converge 880TA Gating Gain Pres W PowerAmp 29 98 9900 3 0 9 9 9 uve 4 9 9 0 os NOM Mute Gain __ Pres Ini Telco TX Ls O ZEITACTNIXSICANDOTVO Control String Event Scheduler EN Microphone le DVD CD Ht Video Codec mm uy Amplifier de sn E Loudspeaker BN PowerAmp2 A PowerAmp 3 E PowerAmp 4 T Telco TX TX 4 Mode Configuration Site Data Default MN Unit Data Default MN NotConnected UU LastMacro 0 Last Preset 0 Site Sitel Unit CONVERGES880TA 0 Devic 4 In Console click Services on the menu bar The Services menu appears as shown below Help Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Web Builder Firmware Loader Debug Console System Ch
392. ts pickup pattern towards participants in the room and reject unwanted noise and reflections CD Horn EQ Constant Directivity Horn Equalizer Horn drivers used in arenas and auditoriums have an inherent 6dB octave high frequency rolloff The CD Horn EQ compensates for this characteristic Chairman Override Provides gating priority for chairman override enabled microphones within the same gating group When a mic with chairman override gates on all mics that don t have chairman override enabled and are in the same gating group will gate off ClearEffect To reduce bandwidth requirements telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300HZz 3 3kHz ClearEffect enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wideband audio by adding 356 high and low frequencies to the audio signal creating a richer fuller sound All output signals routed from an input channel with ClearEffect enabled are routed as wideband audio Clipping Clipping occurs when a signal level exceeds the maximum level a circuit can handle This is usually caused by improper gain settings Clipping causes distortion listener fatigue and accelerated failure of speakers Compression An induced reduction in the dynamic range of all or part of an audio signal Compression is usually used to protect individual loudspeaker components from damage caused by transient peaks in audio signals Compressor A signal processor used to perform compression and contr
393. ts reports the ambient level Command Form DEVICE AMBLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Signed Float 2 80 00 0 00 dB Null to query in text AMXDUET Use AMX Duet Discovery This command sets and reports the status of AMX Duet Discovery Command Form DEVICE AMXDUET Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 toggle i Null to query in text AUDIOMASTER Expansion Bus Audio Master Mode This command reports the mode of the unit for control of the expansion bus audio Command Form DEVICE AUDIOMASTER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 Master 2 Slave Null to query in text AV Adaptive Volume This command enables disables adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE AV lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 0 Off 1 On f 2 Toggle Null to query in text 250 AVG Adaptive Volume Gain This command sets the maximum gain setting that the algorithm will not exceed Command Form Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupsAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Short 2 0 00 to 18 00 Null to query in text dB AVR Adaptive Volume Reference T
394. ues Answer Yes to the prompt to restore default settings or No to retain the existing settings Contrast Contrast allows you to change the LCD contrast level Use the Menu Dial to adjust the contrast level then press the Select button to save it Version Version displays all relevant version data related to the device SIP SIP Displays which Proxy Settings are currently enabled on the VH20 For more information see the Table of Contents tor these related topics e LCD Programming Overview e LCD Channels Menu e LCD Macros Menu e LCD Presets Menu e Site Properties e String Tab e Unit Properties LCD MACROS MENU The LCD Macros Menu allows you to run macros from the front panel To record Macros use the Macro Tab in Console Accessing the Macros Menu To access the Macros menu press the Select Button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Macros and press the Select Button The Macro Menu appears as shown below 45 Executing Macros Use the following procedure to run macros from the front panel LCD display Use the Menu Dial to highlight the macro you want to run Press the Select button Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected macro or No to cancel Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu SANS You can also run macros using the Macro tab or the Services menu in Console For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics e LCD Programmi
395. ut 1 1 dB Volume Down Output 1 1 dB Microphone 1 Gate Status Microphone 2 Gate Status Microphone 3 Gate Status Microphone 4 Gate Status Microphone 5 Gate Status Microphone 6 Gate Status Microphone 7 Gate Status Microphone 8 Gate Status Ground wyi CO RS BA gt BEN N ES Rem MN BOM O DY DN Be Bes BN Beas MN oe O Aa WH NMN O O WON OO MH BW PO O Anvarga Dra oOnverge Pr Z WE Zz yA z Ya z ei WI lt ml KA lt WA lt RI Aa A lt Z gt 318 tA Female DB 132 7 Y ww aw Control Status Default Description O OOU I FOIL F r Definable Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Control Input Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output Status Output NA Mute All Mics Toggle Status of Mute All Mics Mute Output 9 Toggle Status of Mute Output 9 Mute Output 10 Toggle Status of Mute Output 10 Mute Output 11 Toggle Status of Mute Output 11 Mute Output 12 Toggle Status of Mute Output 12 Toggle Telco On Off Telco Toggle Status On Off Microphone 1 Gate Status Microphone 2 Gate Status Microphone 3 Gate Status Microphone 4 Gate Status Microphone 5 Gate Status Microphone 6 Gate Status Microph
396. utomatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control e Label Editor e Output Settings Telco VoIP Tx Settings 133 OUTPUT SETTINGS Output Settings enable you to customize output channel settings All settings for a given output are available on the Channel screen Accessing Output Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired output channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane E Converge Console 080 1 crg a FTC ss OBRA ene E unt crore sarc AzcrReterence mero co cect suing Evert seneawer patabazo Current Unit HO ConvergedF0T A 00 Mode Corfiguration Ste Data Dalak MN Und Data efa Ml Not Comnected MMM MMMM St Lea Corwergaeat Tan Device D0 The center pane of the screen displays a signal flow diagram a real time Output Level Gain meter as well as the channel routing matrix which shows the audio routing configuration for the selected output channel The following sections describe how to use output channel configuration controls Channel Label Line 5 Input 5 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level Hoh Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally
397. ve the command line 12 MUTE 5 M 0 In this command line 1 the Device Type for CONVERGE 880 2 the Device ID for unit 2 MUTE serial command 5 the channel Value M the channel type Value for mic input channels and O the command Value that turns mute off 238 If an asterisk is placed in the Device Type or Device ID fields the command will apply to all units or all devices respectively For example a command with a Device Type 1 and a Device ID would apply the command to all CONVERGE 880 units A command with a Device Type and a Device ID 6 would apply the command to all units with a Device ID of 6 If a command specifies Null to query in text in its Value table leave a blank in the command line to query the current state of that value For example the command 12 MUTE 5 M lt blank gt would return the current mute state of Mic 2 on an 880 unit with a Device ID of 0 GROUPS AND CHANNELS All serial commands use common alpha and numeric designators to reference channel groups channel types and other command values Also different channel groups have different allowable channel ranges as shown in the following table CONVERGE Pro 880 and Group Alpha SR 1212 CONVERGE CONVERGE CONVERGE CONVERGE CONVERGE CONVERGE CONVERGE Beamforming Pro TH20 Pro 840T Pro 8i Pro 880T Pro 880TA SR 1212A Pro VH20 Mic Array Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel amna Range Range Range Range R
398. wer 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 salt Lake City Utah 84116 U S A EU Representative Name ClearOne Communications Ltd EU Representative Address Atlantic House Imperial Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OTD United Kingdom Model Converge Pro 880TA amp Converge SR 1212A Product Standard s to which Conformity of the Council Directive s is declared EMC 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive EN 55103 1 1997 Emissions Electromagnetic Compatibility Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 1 Emissions EN 55103 1 1997 Magnetic Field Emissions Annex A 10 cm EN 55022 2006 Information technology equipment Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Radiated Class A Limits Conducted Class B Limits EN 61000 3 2 2000 Part 3 Limits Section 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 section 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A EN 55103 2 1997 Immunity Electromagnetic Compatibility Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 2 Immunity EN 61000 4 2 2001 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity EN 61000 4 3 2006 Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000 4 4 2004 Electrical Fast Transients
399. with the proper unit when there are multiple units of the same type in a site Therefore each unit of the same type in a site must have a unique Device ID assigned using the front panel LCD Settings menu All units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 F VH20 E 0 F 8401 3 0 B 8i A 0 B 8801 D 0 B 880TA H 0 B SR 212 G 0 B SR 1212A 0 B Beamformer N 0 F For example if there are two CONVERGE Pro 880s and one 840T in a site the 880s must have unique DIDs They could be assigned DIDs of 0 and 1 respectively while the 840T could be assigned a DID of 0 without any conflicts NOTE You must disconnect from the site in order to set the Device ID Press the Disconnect button on the Button Bar NOTE The DID specified in Console MUST match the DID set for that unit in the LCD Settings Menu Otherwise when you reconnect to the site Console will correctly recognize the unit with the correct DID but it also adds a duplicate unit with the incorrect DID Audio Master select Slave default or Master from the Audio Master drop down list Audio Master units ignore audio from upstream units in a site as shown in the sample stack below 66 Converge Pro 840T RS 232 control device Link In Converge Pro 880 CONVERGE PRO BA This prevents audio from being received from units above the master unit in a site For examp
400. wn list You can use any one of the outputs expansion bus references virtual references or speaker output channels as the reference Gate Settings Manual Gating The lower section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains gating configuration controls for Manual Gating as shown below Manual Gating Senga Processing 030560 wa a sec Hold Time 1200 Off Attenuation Chatman Override Manual On O Fate Meir r 110 Manual Gating Manual On Manual Off Select the Manual On radio button to gate the channel on or Manual Off to gate the channel off Off gating behavior is controlled by the settings described in the next section Manual Gating Settings e Hold Time Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the channel is manually gated off The hold time range is from 1 to 8 0 seconds The default is 3 seconds e Off Attenuation Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is manually gated off The range is from O to 50dB The default is 12dB e Decay Rate Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires The default is Medium NOTE Changing Hold Time Off Attenuation and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Auto Gating Both Auto Gating and Manual Gating are affected by Gating Group membership as described in the next section Gating Groups In addition to specifying gating characteristics for each Mic Input channel you can assign the channel to a Gating G
401. wo line level inputs and outputs for increased system capacity Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel ClearEffect wideband emulation for soeech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID Selectable ringers Increased 1 0 capabilities Two line level inputs and two line level outputs Audio Expansion bus E bus Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects gt Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC on line inputs to keep gain levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 CONVERGE Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can
402. xer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command CONVERGE Pro 880T The 8807 leverages the rich functionality of the CONVERGE Pro 880 and adds a built in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications The 880T also provides industry leading expansion capabilities allowing you to connect it with other CONVERGE Pro units for complex installations Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel gt ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage gt O 56dB in 7dB increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles
403. y Type 6 0 eee nee 276 244 PTTTHRESHOLD Push to Talk Threshold 217 PUSHTOTALK Push to Talk 277 RAMP Ramp Gain Adjustment 277 REDIAL Redial the Last Number u on 277 REFSEL Reference Select for PA Adaptation amp AEC 277 REFSET Reference Channel SetUp 278 RESET RES WEE AI rare ran AROS 278 RINGEREN AudibleRingEnable 278 RINGERLVL Audible Ring Level 278 RINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection 278 RINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test 279 RINGMOD Ring Cadence Mode oooooooo eens 279 RINGOFF Ring Cadence Off Time 279 RINGON Ring Cadence On Time 279 RING Ring iIndication 278 RXBOOST Receive Boost auauua EEEE EEEE 280 RXBSTEN Receive Boost Enable 280 SERECHO SerialEcho
404. you want to include in the preset using the matrix Input amp Fader 3 Fader i 6 Configure the desired setting changes for the preset including e Mic Input Line Input Output Telco VolP Rx Telco VolP Tx Processing and Fader channel settings e Gating settings e Control settings e AEC PA Adapt Reference settings 7 Click on the Preset Mask Control Status B boxes to set the pin states H High L Low required to trigger preset execution optional See Preset Control Masking for more information Preset Mack Control Status Bl HL 135 7 8 Wt 0 17 10 8 Press the Macro Selection button to execute one or more macros when the preset executes optional Macro Selection NOTE In most cases macros should not be used in a preset unless you want to run a serial command Some examples that require a macro include querying device status when a preset executes and sending a command string to an external control device to indicate preset room configuration status Also macros execute at the end of a preset after all other routing level and configuration changes included in the preset are completed 9 Press the Save button to save the preset 10 Click the Exit button to exit preset mode and return to configuration mode The preset is now available for execution as described below 196 Executing Presets There are five ways to execute presets Using Console in Configuration Mode Using the LCD Pres
405. ze Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Null to query in text 251 BFBINFO Beamforming Array Beam Information This command reports the given Beamforming Array s current active beams This command is read only Command Form DEVICE BFBINFO Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Integer 4 String with binary representation of the status of the eight maximum future beams O Beam Inactive 1 Beam Active Null to Query in Text BFMODE Sets Reports Beamforming Mic Mode This Sets the Beamforming Mic to Table Top Wall Mount Ceiling Mount or Auto Let the Beamforming Mic decide Command Form DEVICE BFMODE lt Channel gt lt Group gt lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 see Groups and Channels Group Group 1 29 V Value Integer A 1 Auto Default 2 Table Top 3 Ceiling Mount 4 Wall Mount Null to Query in Text BFPOS Beamforming Array Position in Auto Mode This command reports the given Beam Former Array s Position if the BFMODE is Auto This command is read only Command Form DEVICE BFPOS Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Integer 4 2 lable Top 3 Ceiling Mount 4 Wall Mount Null to Query in Text 252 BFZONE Manually Disables Enables Beamforming Mic Zones For each Mode of a Beamforming Mic manually Enable or Disable each of the Mic Zones Command Form DEVICE BFZONE lt Channel gt

ClearOne Converge Pro 840T

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents